Fedegari Autoclaaf Technical Manual

SERIES FVG STERILIZERS TECHNICAL MANUAL

FEDEGARI AUTOKLA VEN AG 

Via alla Gerra, 11 • CH-6930 Bedano – SWITZERLAND  0041 91 9352090 •  0041 91 9352099 •  http://www.fedegariautoklaven.ch

SECTION 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1

SECTION 2 - INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS

2

SECTION 3 - DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS

3

SECTION 4 - PROCESS CONTROLLER

4

SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE

5

SECTION 6 - COMPONENT DATA SHEETS

6

FEDEGARI AUTOKLA VEN AG 

Via alla Gerra, 11 • CH-6930 Bedano – SWITZERLAND  0041 91 9352090 •  0041 91 9352099 •  http://www.fedegariautoklaven.ch

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

1 / 22

February 2006


TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SECTION 1 1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE..................... ......................................4

1.1.

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 4

1.2.

FAMILY IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 4

1.3.

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................... 4

1.4.

KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE ........................................................................................... 5

1.4.1.

STERILIZATION CHAMBER ....................................................................................................... 5

1.4.2.

LID AND SEALING SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 6

1.4.3.

TECHNICAL AREA CABINET ..................................................................................................... 6

1.4.4.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................... 7

1.4.5.

ELECTRICAL PANEL .................................................................................................................. 7

1.4.6.

HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ................................................................................. 7

1.4.7.

PROCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL..................................... 7

1.4.8.

ELECTRIC COMPRESSOR FOR PRESSURIZING THE GASKET ........................................... 7

1.4.9.

STEAM GENERATOR................................................................................................................. 7

1.4.10.

CONDENSATE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM ............................................................................ 8

1.4.11.

PRODUCT LOADING/UNLOADING DEVICES........................................................................... 8

1.5.

MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL) ............................................ 8

1.5.1.

ENHANCED INTERNAL ELECTRIC AIR COMPRESSOR (KG41) ............................................ 9

1.5.2.

CONDENSATE COOLING UNIT (KG50) .................................................................................... 9

1.5.3.

CONDENSATE RECOVERY TRAY (KG64) ............................................................................... 9

1.5.4.

PRE-VACUUM DEVICE (KG65)................................................................................................ 10

1.5.5.

TANK FOR SUPPLYING WATER TO THE STEAM GENERATOR (KG66)............................. 10

1.5.6.

PROCESS PRINTER (KG81) .................................................................................................... 10

1.5.7.

LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83) ............................................................................................... 11

1.5.8.

PORT ADAPTER FOR VALIDATION SENSOR (KG90)........................................................... 12

1.6.

CONTROL AND MONITORING COMPONENTS.............................................................................. 12

1.6.1.

CONTROL AND MONITORING STATIONS ............................................................................. 12

1.6.1.1. 1.6.1.2.

OPERATOR PANEL.............................................................................................................. 13 DISPLAY................................................................................................................................ 13

1.6.1.3.

KEYPAD ................................................................................................................................ 13

1.6.1.4.

MAIN SWITCH....................................................................................................................... 16

1.6.1.5.

MONITORING VACUUM GAUGES ...................................................................................... 16

1.6.1.6.

MANUAL VALVE FOR CHAMBER DISCHARGE................................................................. 16

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

2 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.7.

SAFETY SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................................... 17

1.7.1.

DESCRIPTION OF THE CHAMBER OPENING AND CLOSING SYSTEM ............................. 17

1.7.2.

SAFETY VALVES ...................................................................................................................... 18

1.8.

TECHNICAL DATA ............................................................................................................................ 19

1.8.1.

MAIN DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS........................................................................................ 19

1.8.2.

TECHNICAL PARAMETERS..................................................................................................... 20

1.8.3.

WATER CONSUMPTION.......................................................................................................... 21

1.8.4.

EMC SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................ 21

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

3 / 22

February 2006


1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE

1.1.

INTRODUCTION

The new FVG range is composed of compact, top-loading, assembly-line-built vertical saturated steam sterilizers. The innovative and sensible design, the new intuitively usable process controller, the high-quality finish and materials give this machine a higher functional performance than any other sterilizer in the same category. are suitable for treating andsterilizers liquids (iffor the liquids are laboratories, in open or unsealed containers)FVG and models are the latest generation of small solids automatic microbiology research institutions, universities and food industries.

1.2.

FAMILY IDENTIFICATION

The FVG sterilizer family consists of the following models, which differ in terms of useful loading capacity:

1.3.



FVG1

50 liters



FVG2

75 liters



FVG3

140 liters

MACHINE IDENTIFICATION

Vertical steam sterilizers of the FVG family are identified by means of an appropriately provided identification plate, which is fixed to the body of the autoclave and bears all the key information of the machine. The markings on the plate are indelible, as prescribed by applicable product standards. Figure 1.3 shows a facsimile of the CE identification plate of the machine.

1.

Model

2.

Serial number

3.

Year of manufacture

4.

Code of notified body for 97/23/EC directive

Figure 1.3 – CE identification plate

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

4 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.4.

KEY COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE

The sterilizer (see Figure 1.4) is composed of the following main components: -

Sterilization chamber;

-

Lid and sealing system;

-

Technical area cabinet;

-

Electrical system;

-

Electrical panel;

-

Hydraulic and pneumatic system;

-

Process controller with integrated operator panel;

-

Electric compressor for gasket pressurization;

-

Steam generator;

-

Condensate heat recovery system;

-

Devices for loading/unloading the product.

WARNING! During the operation of the sterilizer, the temperature of the lid’s internal parts can reach high values. D uring the loading/unloading operations, use the suitable protection means.

Figure 1.4 - Sterilizer 1.4.1.

STERILIZATION CHAMB ER

The sterilization chamber is a pressure vessel that has a cylindrical cross-section and a vertical axis. The material to be processed is placed in this chamber. The bottom slopes toward the discharge, which is meant to collect condensation so as to drain it. The chamber is made of AISI 316Ti steel with mirror-finish internal polishing and a surface roughness Ra < 0.19 µm.

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

5 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.4.2.

LID AND SEALING SYSTEM

Lid The lid rotates horizontally and is coupled to the chamber by means of a C-shaped band. This band, under the effect of even the slightest pressure inside the chamber, prevents rotation and therefore prevents opening. The lid of the chamber is provided with a handle (Fig. 1.4.2 a) that facilitates its opening and closing, both of which are performed horizontally. During the closure maneuver, a safety lever mechanism (Fig 1.4.2 b) installed on the lid forces the operator to use both hands (Fig 1.4.2 c), avoiding any crushing of fingers.

Figure 1.4 .2.a – Handle of lid clo sure sy stem

Figure 1.4 .2.b – Safety l ever mechanism of l id closure system

Figure 1.4.2.c – Lid closure system: use of both hands required

Figure 1.4.2.d – Lid sealing system: sealing gasket

Sealing system The sealing system is constituted by a silicone rubber gasket. Tightness of the sterilization chamber when the lid is closed is achieved by introducing compressed air in the gasket seat. In this way, the gasket is pushed outward and compressed against the lid. 1.4.3.

TECHNICAL AREA CABINET

The external cabinet, made of AISI 304 stainless steel and polyurethane resin panels, is meant to enclose the hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical systems.

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

6 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.4.4.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The electrical system of the sterilizer is built in accordance with European standards EN61010-1 and EN61010-2-041. The system includes the electrical panel, all the control lines of the electrohydraulic and electropneumatic actuators of the motors, of the electronic process controller and of the steam generator. This system also connects the process controller to all the sensors and transducers (e.g. pressure switches, heat probes, et cetera) and to the devices for interfacing with the operator. Finally, it provides the primary power supply line and the corresponding protection system.

1.4.5.

ELECTRICAL PANEL

The electrical panel is located in the front part of the machine containment cabinet. This panel contains the main electrical and electronic devices for power supply, disconnection and distribution, including the main power switch. This switch, in particular, also acts as an emergency stop. 1.4.6.

HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEM

The hydraulic and pneumatic system is constituted by piping and electric valves.



NOTE

The details of the hydraulic and pneumatic system are described in the P&ID Diagram cont ained in Secti on 3 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.



NOTE

The de tails of the components related to the hydraulic and pneumatic syst em are described in the com ponent d ata shee ts c ontained in Section 6 of t he TECHNICAL MAN UAL. 1.4.7.

PROCESS CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRATED OPERATOR PANEL

The electronic process controller is constituted by a programmable logic controller (PLC), which together with specific hardware blocks and other electronic equipment provides total control of the machine and the activities related to interactive communication with the operator. The Operator Panel integrated in the electronic process controller is constituted by an LCD display with 4 rows and 20 columns and by a membrane keyboard, by means of which the operator manages the interactive communication with the machine.



NOTE

The de tails of the ele ctronic process con troller w ith i ntegra ted operator pane l are described in the corresponding data sheet contained in Section 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.

1.4.8.

ELECTRIC COMPRESSOR FOR PRESSURIZING THE GASKET

The electric compressor integrated in the machine generates the compressed air required to supply the lid gasket: an AISI 316 plenum chamber with a capacity of 2.7 liters is sufficient to ensure its correct operation. 1.4.9.

STEAM GENERATOR

The steam generator is constituted by a horizontal pressure vessel made of AISI 316 stainless steel, which is supplied with water. The water is converted into steam by means of an electric resistor inserted in the front part of the vessel. Water is loaded into the generator by means of an electric pump, which can be supplied from an external tank (if the KG 66 option is provided) or by direct connection to the mains. Use, in the steam ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

7 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION generator, water of low hardness in order to minimize scale forming (conductivity < 15 µS/cm at 25°C TOC< 500 ppb – pH: 6.0 ÷ 7.5). A check valve prevents the outflow of water from the pressure vessel toward the pump. A pressure switch senses the pressure inside the body of the generator, controls the electrical power supply of the resistors, and reports to the process controller when the pressure needed to allow feeding of the chamber is reached. An appropriately provided sensor detects the level of water reached inside the pressure vessel. In addition to the above, the steam generator is provided with the following devices correlated to the operating safety of the pressure vessel: -

Manual discharge valve;

-

Safety valve;

-

Pressure gauge for sensing the pressure of the vessel, in a position that is clearly visible to the operator;

-

Thermostat controlling the maximum temperature of the generator;

-

Minimum-level sensor, which issues a signal in case of operation without water and switches off the resistor.

1.4.10. CONDENSATE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM In order to reduce electrical consumption, on the discharge of the chamber there is a coil-type heat exchanger, which allows to reduce the temperature of the effluents to less than 100°C and to preheat the water that supplies the steam generator, ensuring an energy saving of approximately 15% of the total. It is also possible to preheat the air introduced in the chamber (if the KG41 option is provided) in order to improve product drying. 1.4.11. PRODUCT LOADING/UNLOADING DEVICES The loading/unloading system of the machine is based on the use of wire mesh or steel plate baskets provided with a folding handle (see Figure 1.4.11.b).

Figure 1.4.11.a- Loading /unloadin g operation

1.5.

Figure 1.4.11.b- Loading /unloadin g devices

MAIN ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE (OPTIONAL)

The sterilizer in its basic configuration can be fitted with a series of optional components (kits), which are listed below and are identified by means of a reference number. ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

8 / 22

February 2006




NOTE

For further information on the additional component kit the note field of each c omponent.

Kit identifier

1.5.1.

s, plea se refe r to t he documents cited in

Kit name

KG41

Enhanced internal electric air compressor

KG50

Condensate cooling unit

KG64

Condensate recovery tray with sterilizing filter (not available on FVG3)

KG65

Pre-vacuum device

KG66

Tank for supplying water to the steam generator

KG81

Process printer

KG83

Process printer

KG90

Port adapter for validation sensor

ENHANCED INTERNAL ELECTRIC AIR COMPRESSOR (KG41)

This is a higher-capacity air compressor, installed inside the cabinet of the sterilizer in order to obtain an air ballasting effect. This option also installs a sterilizing filter, in order to treat the air to be introduced in the chamber after sterilization. The polypropylene container of the filter can be disassembled and sterilized in the autoclave, and the filter has an absolute retention of 0.22 µm for liquids and 0.003 µm for gases, which 7 2 ensures a reduction of the bacterial load of Brevindimonas (Pseudomonas) of 10 /cm . Air ballasting consists in the controlled replacement of the steam that is present in the chamber at the end of sterilization with air during the load cooling/drying phase. This cooling method allows to prevent the unwanted overboiling of the fluids contained in unsealed containers. This option is also advisable if one requires effective drying of the load (glassware and non-porous solids). This oil-free piston compressor is extremely quiet and efficient.



NOTE

The de tails of the components that const itute the KG41 kit are described in t sheets co ntained in Secti on 6 of th e TECHNICAL MANU AL. 1.5.2.

he associated data

CONDENSATE COOLING UNIT (KG50)

In output from the coil-type exchanger, the temperature of the effluents is approximately 100°C. In order to cool these effluents further, it is possible to provide a compact air condensing unit, which ensures a final temperature of 60°C. This option must be provided if the condensate recovery tray (KG64) is provided: ensuring effluent temperature reduction ensures that the operator works in safety.



NOTE

The de tails of the components of the KG50 kit are de scribed in the corresponding cont ained in Secti on 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL. 1.5.3.

data she ets

CONDENSATE RECOVERY TRAY (KG64)

This option (available only for FVG1 and FVG2 models) allows to avoid the need to connect the machine to an external drainage point in order to discharge the condensate, because the condensate is transferred into a specifically provided container installed inside the technical area of the machine. The operator has to empty this container manually at the end of the cycle. The condensate recovery tray is provided with a sterilizing filter that can be disassembled and sterilized in an autoclave and ensures the treatment of gaseous effluents. The filter has an absolute retention of 0.22 µm for liquids and 0.003 µm for gases, 7 2 ensuring a reduction of the bacterial load of Brevindimonas (Pseudomonas) equal to 10 /cm . If this option is ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

9 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION provided, it is necessary to equip the machine with the condensate cooling unit (KG50): ensuring effluent temperature reduction ensures that the operator works in safety.



NOTE


data she ets

PRE-VACUUM DEVICE (KG65)

If it is necessary to treat solids having a geometry that does not allow easy air evacuation, it is essential to perform a pre-treatment that ensures effective air removal. For this purpose, it is possible to provide the machine with a membrane pump, which allows to reach a final vacuum of 300 mbar abs. In any case, this device is not intended to perform final load drying with time-controlled vacuum hold.



NOTE


data she ets

TANK FOR SUPPLYING WATER TO THE STEAM GENERATOR (KG66)

This is an external container with a capacity of 15 liters, made of high-density polyethylene, suitable to contain the demineralized water needed to allow correct operation of the autoclave without providing a direct connection to the water mains. Its capacity ensures the execution of at least one complete sterilization cycle. The tank is equipped with a minimum-level sensor for protecting the feed pump of the steam generator. This sensor is of the variable-depth type and is fixed to the lid of the tank in order to allow its quick disassembly.

WARNING! The ta nk mus t cont ain at lea st 10 liters of water in order to ensure complete execution of the steriliza tion cyc le



NOTE


data she ets

PROCESS PRINTER (KG81)

This is an alphanumeric printer, which is installed close to the operator panel and is intended to generate detailed process documentation. The printer has a 200-dpi thermal printing system, uses 57.7 mm-wide paper, and is connected to the controller by means of an RS232 serial output. The printer is connected directly to the process controller and has the primary function of documenting in real time the execution of the sterilization program in progress. The printer is also used to obtain the reports, parameters and data related to the finished sterilization cycle. The operator has to load fresh paper and remove the printed report at the end of the sterilization process. ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

10 / 22

February 2006


DEVICE

FUNCTION

Green “Power” LED

When lit, indicates that the printer is powered.

Red “ Status” LED

When lit continuously, indicates an error (insufficient or excessive head power supply or excessive head temperature); when flashing, indicates that there is no more paper left.

“ Print” butto n

Not enabled.

“ Feed” button

When pressed, causes the paper to advance.

Fig. 1.5 .5 – Thermal p rint er



NOTE


data she ets

LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83)

This is a semiautomatic device that facilitates loading and unloading of the baskets for containing materials. The kit is composed of an electric winch, which has a motorized vertical motion and a horizontal arm that can be orientated manually and is complete with a mechanical accessory for fastening the material loading baskets. The motor is controlled by means of a manual keypad with two interlocked buttons and allows the vertical movement of the arm.

WARNING! Improper use of the load lifting device can cause danger for the operator. Ab so lu tel y d o n ot use the li ft in g d evice to handle loads other than those specif icall y prepared by FEDE GARI

Fig. 1.5 .6.a – Lift ing device

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

11 / 22

February 2006


WARNING! To ensure safe and balanced lifting of the material containing baskets, it is recommended to use the FEDEGARI basket fastening accessory

Fig. 1.5 .6.b – Fastening accessor y



NOTE

The KG83 kit is available for all models but is recommended for the FVG3 model. The de tails of the components of the KG83 kit are de scribed in the corresponding cont ained in Secti on 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL. 1.5.8.

data she ets

PORT ADA PTER FOR VAL IDATION SENSOR (KG90)

On the chamber of every sterilizer of the FVG series there is a port to allow the insertion of validation heat probes in the chamber. The port is located in an easily accessible region on the side of the chamber. When it is not being used, it is kept closed by a stainless steel plug fixed by means of a clamp. A special kit for inserting up to 12 validation probes, developed by Fedegari, is available as an option.



NOTE

The de tails of the components of the KG90 kit are de scribed in the corresponding cont ained in Secti on 6 of the TECHNICAL MANUAL.

1.6.

data she ets

CONTROL AND MONITORING COMPONENTS

The sterilizer is controlled by means of a system constituted by a PLC. The PLC supervises the main actuation systems and supervises and monitors the hardware that constitutes the machine, organizing the activation of the operating sequences (phases) of the specific programmed sterilization “cycle”. Moreover, the PLC, also termed “process controller” hereinafter, manages communication with the operator by means of appropriately provided peripheral units. The machine is also provided with control/monitoring elements that complement, independently of the PLC, the tasks of the PLC as regards certain control/monitoring functions. 1.6.1.

CONTROL AND MONITORING STATIONS

The sterilizer is provided with functional assembles and elements for control/monitoring, which are arranged on the forward and front panel of the containment cabinet. The control and monitoring elements of the machine are: -

Operator panel (integrated in the electronic process controller);

-

Main switch;

-

Vacuum gauges for chamber and generator monitoring;

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

12 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION -

Manual discharge valve.

The operator, by standing in the area in front of the panel that accommodates the control/monitoring elements, is able to work easily and to access immediately any indications or messages.

Figure 1.6 .1.a – Location of the fro nt control/monito ring eleme nts

Figure 1.6.1.b – Location of the front control/monito ring ele ments

1.6.1.1. OPERATOR PANEL The Exor T-Line model TMD02R-04-B850 process controller was developed specifically to ensure the automatic operation of Fedegari’s vertical saturated steam sterilizers. The system is based on a model SCM03 PLC by SITEK, which is integrated in the panel and connected to it by means of a serial port. The panel is extremely easy to use even for personnel lacking computer skills, and it allows to start and monitor the sterilization cycle in memory. All information related to the cycle is also printed by a small thermal printer arranged to the side of the process controller.

Figure 3.6.1.1 – Operator panel 1.6.1.2. DISPLA Y The operator panel comprises a display, which is the operator’s primary visual display unit. The display is of the monochrome liquid-crystal (LCD) type and consists of 4 rows of 20 characters. The display shows the various menus, which can be selected hierarchically by the operator according to the choices made and the main commands given to the machine. In particular, the display shows the values of the parameters related to the sterilization cycle in progress and the alarm indications. 1.6.1.3. KEYPAD The operator panel comprises a keypad, which is the primary apparatus available to the operator for communicating with the machine and for giving it operating commands. The keypad is of the membrane type, with 19 keys and 1 LED indicator, which have the following functions:

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

13 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION KEY

FUNCTION START key This key allows to start the cycle chosen during preparation. This is the numeral 1 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. STOP key End of preparation, end of emergency, end of cycle. This is the numeral 2 of the numeric keypad in the edit field.

This is the numeral 3 of the numeric keypad in the edit field.

PHASE STEP key This key allows to pass from one phase to the next, when permitted by the software. This is the numeral 4 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. CYCLE STOP key This key allows to activate the emergency phase. This is the numeral 5 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. DISPLAY key This key allows to display the active alarms. This is the numeral 6 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. DOOR UNLOCK key This key allows to deflate the sealing gasket. This is the numeral 7 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. DOOR LOCK key This key allows to inflate the sealing gasket. This is the numeral 8 of the numeric keypad in the edit field. PRINT SCREEN key This key allows to produce a printout of the screen. This is the numeral 9 of the numeric keypad in the edit field.

Available

Available

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

14 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION KEY

FUNCTION CLEAR key Allows to exit from the software page, consequently returning to the previous menu. Allows to leave the EDIT field without saving the changed data. INS key This key allows to activate the cursor in the edit field. ENTER key This key allows to mute the buzzer. It also allows to transfer parameter changes to the PLC. It allows to confirm (save) the edited value in the EDIT field. If this key is kept pressed for more than 2 seconds, it allows direct enabling of the panel command menu. . Key This key allows to enter the decimal point in the EDIT field.

L (LEFT) key This key allows scrolling to the left in the EDIT fields.

R (RIGHT) key This key allows scrolling to the right in the EDIT fields.

U (UP) key This key allows upward scrolling of the software pages.

D (DOWN) key This key allows downward scrolling of the software pages.

FLT LED This LED, when lit, indicates the occurrence of an abnormal condition.

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

15 / 22

February 2006


1.6.1.4. MAIN SWITCH Operating the main switch (position “I”) located on the front panel of the sterilizer allows to activate the process controller. Subordinately, the peripheral units connected to the controller are activated; these peripherals form, together with the controller, the main hardware of the machine. By returning the switch to the “O” position, the process controller and the peripherals connected to it are deactivated.

 NOTE The

main

switch

also

acts

as

emergency st op.

Figure 1.6.1 .2 – Main swi tch 1.6.1.5. MONITORING VACUUM GAUGES The vacuum gauges installed on the machine are analog mechanical pressure indicators, suitable for displaying the pressure in the pressure vessels that are part of the sterilizer. One vacuum gauge (with an 0-5 bar abs scale) is dedicated to sensing the pressure in the sterilization chamber. The other vacuum gauge (with an 0-6 bar abs scale) indicates the pressure of the steam generator. The indicators are provided with a pressure readout scale (bar). They are capable of indicating the presence of pressure or vacuum even when the sterilizer is deactivated and the chamber is not operating. Both vacuum gauges are provided with a red notch at the maximum permissible pressure, as prescribed by standards.

Figure 1.6. 1.3 – Monitor ing v acuum gauges 1.6.1.6. MANUAL VALVE FOR CHAMBER DISCHARGE This is a membrane valve, located on the front panel of the machine and connected to the chamber of the sterilizer. Its function is to allow the operator, if automatic operation is not possible, to manually check that there really is no pressure in the chamber at the end of the sterilization process. This valve is also used to discharge any pressure that has formed inside the chamber when one wishes to reopen the lid for another load. ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

16 / 22

February 2006


WARNING! Opening t he manua l valve can cause hot s team to exit from the discharge duct rear side of the machine. Beware of the risk of sc alding.



located on the

NOTE

Turning the knob clockwise until it stops closes the duct for the free discharge of the sterilization chamber. If the knob is turned counterclockwise, the chamber can be discharged as soon as the knob moves from the closed stop position. The maximum cross-section available for discharge is provided by turning the knob counterclockwise to the stop position. Figure 1.6. 1.4 – Manual valve fo r ch amber disc harge

1.7.

SAFETY SYSTEMS

1.7.1.

DESCRIPTION OF THE CHAMBER OPENING AND CLOSING SYSTEM

Initial conditions of the system Before closing the chamber, and until the lid has reached the position provided for this purpose, the limit switch for the closed position of the lid is open and accordingly interrupts the circuit that allows to feed compressed air into the gasket seat. Accordingly, it is impossible – as explained below – to introduce pressurized fluids in the chamber. Starting the closure maneuver The lid of the autoclave is turned manually from the open position to the closed position by using both hands, thus avoiding any crushing of fingers. When the lid reaches the position intended for closure, the limit switch changes state and enables the system to send the command, allowing to introduce compressed air in the gasket seat. Closing the chamber Once the clearance of the limit switch has been obtained, ensuring the correct position of the lid, the pressure of the operator on the door locking button causes compressed air to be introduced in the gasket seat, starting the complete closure of the chamber and locking the lid. Operation of the sealing system Propelled by the compressed air, the gasket moves upward, compressing itself against the perimeter of the lid, which is accordingly raised from the inactive position and is retained by the two semicircular brackets. The compression of the gasket against the lid ensures the complete closure of the autoclave and its tightness against the action of any pressurized fluids introduced in the chamber.

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

17 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION Clearance to introduce fluid in the chamber The pressure of the air in the gasket seat is detected by a pressure switch. When this pressure reaches the preset value, the pressure switch reports to the process controller that the chamber is closed and in fully sealed conditions, enabling the start of the process cycle and the introduction of fluids in the chamber. Clearance of the process controller to introduce fluids in the chamber is controlled in fail-safe mode by a safety circuit, which checks that: -

the pressure switch reports that the lid gasket has inflated;

-

the lid is in the correct position, by means of the clearance of the limit switch.

Conditions required to start the opening maneuver Starting the opening of the autoclave requires that all the preliminary conditions specified hereinafter have been checked by the process controller: -

the process cycle must have ended;

-

the pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical safety device must both report that the pressure inside the chamber has returned to the atmospheric pressure;

-

and, if the (safety temperature) function is set, the heat probe located in the chamber must detect a temperature that is not higher than the set value, ensuring that any liquids placed to sterilize in glass containers inside the autoclave have reached a temperature below their boiling temperature at atmospheric pressure;

-

Once the process controller has enabled lid opening, the release of the air introduced in the gasket seat depends on checking that the residual pressure in the chamber is lower than 50 mbar by means of a pressure switch. This check is performed in fail-safe mode.

Release of the air introduced in the gasket seat Once the clearances described above have been obtained, the operator’s pressure on the door release button cause the discharge of the compressed air from the gasket seat. Manual opening of the autoclave After the automatic discharge of the air from the sealing gasket seat, the opening maneuver is completed manually.

Figure 1.7 .1 – Chamber opening and cl osi ng 1.7.2.

SAFETY VAL VES

To ensure total operator safety, the sterilizer is equipped with the following devices: ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

18 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION 

A safety valve meant to discharge the excess pressure that is present inside the chamber;



A safety valve that discharges the excess pressure in the independent steam generator.

Figure 1.7.2.a – Chamber safety valve

Figure 1.7.2.b – Generator safety valve

WARNING! These valves are set mechanically to the maximum allowed value. Tampering with these safety valves may cause severe damage to the machine and severe injury to the operator. The pe rson in charge of the machine is required to periodic ally check the effici ency and correct action of the safety valves. FEDEGARI declines all responsibility arising from tampering or negle ct of the overpressure sa fety syst ems. WARNING! The machine is equipped with safety valves that have been calibrated and checked by the builder at an ambient pressure of 1 abs. bar. If the machine is installed in a location with an ambient pressure that is substantially different from 1 bar, FEDEGARI recommends to explain this to the qualified personnel and/or the technicians selected to ins tall the machine. WARNING! The safety valves have to be replaced or revised and re-calibrated every two years after the starting apart from the using frequency or the working conditions as long as more restrictive rules will not occu r in the country of use.



NOTE

For further inf ormation regarding the safety valves of the chamber and of the s team genera tor, please refer to th e data shee ts c ontained i n Section 6 of th e TECHNICAL MANU AL.

1.8.

TECHNICAL DATA

1.8.1.

MAIN DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

The main dimensions of the vertical steam sterilizer, related to the FVG family, are given in the following tables: ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

19 / 22

February 2006


Dimensions and weights Au to cl ave heig ht Au to cl ave width (1) Au to cl ave depth (1) Au to cl ave width (2) Au to cl ave depth (2) Max weight of empty autoclave Max weight of full autocl ave Chamber height Chamber diameter Useful loading capacity of chamber Loading height Heat diss ipation

Unit of measure

FVG1

Au to cl ave model FVG2

FVG3

mm mm mm mm mm kg kg mm mm liters

990 650 650 1095 730 140 240 400 405 50

990 650 650 1095 730 150 270 600 405 75

1120 725 740 1300 820 175 340 700 505 140

mm Kcal/h

900 200

900 300

1010 450

(1) externa l di mensions when li d is closed (2) external dimensions when lid is open

1.8.2.

TECHNICAL PARA METERS

Functional parameters Sterilization process

using saturated steam

Process control

automatic, with PLC

Sound pressure level

< 64 dBA (Ref. EN ISO 3746)

Operating pressure

2.5 bar g

Maximum sterilization temperature

135°C

Design pressure

-1/4 bar g

Design temperature

152°C

Electrical parameters

Three-phase version with neutral

Unit of measure

Supply vol tage Frequency Power absorptio n

V

FVG1 400

Hz Kw

50 (2) 4.5

(1)

Au to cl ave mo del FVG2 400 (1)

50 (2) 6.5

FVG3 400 (1)

50 (2) 7.5

(1) available on request also in a 60- Hz versio n (2) add 0.5 kW if option K G83 is present

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

20 / 22

February 2006


Au to cl ave mo del

Unit of measure

FVG1

Supply vol tage

V

230

Frequency

Hz

50

(1)

50

(1)

3.5

(2)

3.5

(2)

Single- phase version w ith neutral

kW

Power absorption

FVG2 230

(1) also available on request in a 60- Hz versio n (2) for the sin gle-phase version, opti ons KG83 a nd KG65 a re not available and the power of the resistor of generator is reduced to 3 kW



the

NOTE

In accordance with the requirements of product standard EN 61010-1 par. 5.1.3. item (C), the power absorption i ndicated on the CE da ta plate re fers to t he model of the sterilizer in it s most complete configuration, including all the possible options provided.

Construction parameters Operator interface

keyboard and monochrome screen with 4 lines x 20 characters

Pressure sensing

piezoelectric transducer

Temperature sensing

Pt100 heat probe

Chamber closure

lid with horizontal manual rotation, with pneumatic sealing gasket

Chamber material

AISI 316Ti stainless steel

Degree of protection of operator panel

IP54 (front)

1.8.3.

WATER CONSUMPTION Consumption Deionized water for generator (consumption p er cycle)

Unit of measure

FVG1

Au to cl ave Mod el FVG2

FVG3

liters

5

8

9

This consumption refers to the maximum values in fully loaded conditions. The water to be used in the steam generator must have a low hardness, in order to minimize the forming of scale. Recommended characteristics: Conductivity < 15 µS/cm at 25°C - TOC< 500 ppb – Ph: 6.0 ÷ 7.5 1.8.4.

EMC SPECIFICATIONS

FEDEGARI autoclaves of the FVG family have been subjected to a series of tests to determine their compliance with the minimum requirements of Directive 89/336/EC related to electromagnetic compatibility. The tests that have been conducted are listed below: Noise emitted at power supply terminals

compliant with EN 55011 standard, class B g roup 1/2

Immunity to rapid pulse bursts

compliant with EN 61000-4-4 standard, Level 3 Criterion A

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

21 / 22

February 2006

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTION Immunity to electrostatic discharges (ESD)

ID no. 84499 Rev. 3

compliant with EN 61000-4-2 standard, Level 3 Criterion A

22 / 22

February 2006

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS


INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

1 / 11

July 2005



INSTALL ATION SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................3

1.1.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ACCEPTAB LE FOR USE............................................................ 3

1.2.

REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE MATERIAL S ....................................................................................... 3

1.3.

STERILIZER PLACEMENT ................................................................................................................. 3

1.4.

CONNECTION TO POWER SOURCES AND TO UTILITiES ............................................................. 5

1.4.1.

HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS..................................................................................................... 5

1.4.2.

CONNECTIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY....................................................... 5

1.5.

1.4.2.1.

400 Vac THREE-PHASE VERSION........................................................................................ 6

1.4.2.2.

230 Vac SINGLE-PHASE VERSION ...................................................................................... 7

INSTALLING THE LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (kG83)........................................................................... 7

1.5.1.

MOUNTING ON PREPARED STERILIZER............................................................................ 8

1.5.1.2.

MOUNTING ON NON-PREPARED STERILIZER................................................................... 9

1.5.2. 1.6.

MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY......................................................................................................... 8

1.5.1.1.

ELECTRICAL WIRING .............................................................................................................. 10

CHECKING THE INSTALLA TION..................................................................................................... 11

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

2 / 11

July 2005


1.

1.1.

INSTALL ATION SPECIFICATIONS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ACCEPTABL E FOR USE

The installation environment must be ventilated and adequately lit. Suitable environmental conditions for correct operation of the sterilizer and of its management system are as follows: Environmental parameters Equipment for use

indoors

Maximum altitude

2000 meters

Ambient temperature for operation

minimum 10°C - maximum 40°C

Relative humidity for operation

maximum 85% noncondensing, with T ≤ 40°C

Ambient temperature for storage

minimum 5°C - maximum 50°C

Relative humidity for storage

maximum 80% with T ≤ 40°C

Maximum mains voltage variation

+/-10% of nominal voltage +/-2% frequency

Installation category

II

Pollution degree

2

WARNING! If artificial lightin g is prov ided in the installation are a, ensure tha t the light sources comply w ith the requirements of the statutory provisions applicable in the country of use regarding operator health and safety. The sterilizer is equipped with an LCD display. Do not align and arrange the display so as to produce reflections and glare on the viewing planes of the operator.

1.2.

REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE MATERIAL S

The sterilizer is shipped in suitable containers (packing) and is wrapped in materials that are meant to protect it against external agents during shipping and during storage periods. The packing material must be removed with utmost care in order to avoid, during these operations, improper interaction with the structures and surfaces of the sterilizer. The outer cabinet of the sterilizer is painted and therefore requires adequate care to keep it free from scratches and scuffing.



NOTE

Do not discard the srcinal packing container, in order to ensure correct transport of the sterilizer if it has to be moved. 1.3.

STERILIZER PLA CEMENT

Correct placement of the sterilizer ensures the perfect functionality of the system and easy use on the part of the operator. For placement, consider that the space available around the sterilizer must be provided so as to ensure that the operator and the maintenance technicians can perform the following activities:

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

3 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 

the movements required to operate comfortably the control and monitoring devices;



all the movements needed for loading/unloading operations, including the use of any accessories;



ordinary maintenance, particularly for cleaning and purging;



extraordinary maintenance.

After placing the sterilizer, check that it is perfectly level. The sterilizer must be arranged on a flat surface and proximate to an extractor hood. In placing the sterilizer, follow strictly the information given in detail in the installation drawings and documents provided by FEDEGARI.



NOTE

For further details, please refer to Section 3 of the Technical Manual.

WARNING! In perform sterilizer installation, follow the instructions given in the installation drawing supplied by FEDEGARI, in addition to the indications g iven explicitly in th is manual. In particular, the follow ing issues must be given specia l attention:





the floor of the installation room must comply with the required load-bearing capacities, which in particular must include the additional loads that bear on the struct ure as a conseque nce of the hydraulic tests to be performe d on t he sterilize r;



all the pre cautions required by statutory provi be taken in seismic areas;



the piping and accessories for feeding and discharging the various service fluids to and from the sterilizer, as well as the lines and accessories for electrical connections to the control panel and to other components of the sterilizer, must comply wi th the pre scripti ons of the a pplicable statutory provisions .

sions and allowed by technology mus t

NOTE

An y hydr aulic tes ti ng th at needs to be perfo rmed aft er th e st erili zer has been in st alled at th e User’s premises in accordance with the statutory provisions applicable in the country of use may entail an increased load that can cause precarious stability of the structures meant to support the sterilizer. Weight and size data are available in the installation diagram.

WARNING! During installation, absolutely AVOID the forming of structural links to surfaces or bodies that are subjected to stresses or dynamic loads that srcinate externally with respect to the sterilizer. If a correla tion to struct ures subjected to such loads is prov ided in the are a where the sterilizer is meant to be installed, you should describe the associated problems to FEDEGARI before making t he purchase.

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

4 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 1.4.

CONNECTION TO POWER SOURCES AND TO UTILITIES

Connection to power sources must comply fully with the specifications given in this chapter. If you do not have the appropriate means or accessories to allow connection according to best manufacturing practice, you should contact FEDEGARI’s technical service. 1.4.1. HYDRAUL IC CONNECTIONS

Hydraulic connections to utilities are provided by means of flexible hoses. The connections provided on the rear panel of the sterilizer are: 

a 6-mm Ø compression nipple for the discharge;



a 6-mm Ø compression nipple for connection to the mains for supplying water to the generator.

If it is not possible to connect the discharge of the sterilizer to the mains, the optional kit KG64 (available only for FVG1 and FVG2 models) allows to eliminate the need to connect the sterilizer to an external drainage point in order to discharge the condensate, since the condensate is transferred into a specifically provided container installed inside the technical area of the sterilizer. If it is not possible to provide a direct connection to the water mains, optional kit KG66 is available and provides an external tank for supplying the steam generator, to be connected by means of a flexible hose to the compression nipple provided on the rear of the sterilizer.

WARNING! The conne ction of the disc harge of the sterilizer to the drain should be performe d wit h the “ ventilate d” method. F ailure to comply w ith thi s recommendation may cause any reve rse flow from the drain to contaminate and/or pollute the chamber of the sterilizer. A simple check valve is not considered an effective microbiological barrier by the international CGMP/CGLP standards. To avoid the risk of contamination of the water mains, it is furthermore recommended to install devices acting as barriers for protection against reverse flow on the supply l ine of the vacuum pump. Pe rform c onnection to ut iliti es and to the discharge trap so as to keep the pipes at atmospheric pressure. Check that all the connectors h ave the ir ow n specific data plate .

1.4.2. CONNECTIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

The sterilizer is available in two versions for connection to a 50- or 60-Hz three-phase power line or to a 50or 60-Hz single-phase power line. The instructions given below should be followed scrupulously in order to ensure that the connection of the sterilizer to the electrical power supply line is performed according to best manufacturing practice.

WARNING! Conne ction to the electrical mains must be performe d by qu alified personne l in full compliance with all the safe ty requirements prescribed by applicable statutory provis ions w ith refere nce to the installation site of the sterilizer. All the connections must be performed with the mains power fully dis connected.

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

5 / 11

July 2005


WARNING! If the ground conductor is connected poorly or not at all, this may severely compromise the operating safety of the sterilizer. FEDEGARI declines all responsibility arising from poor or failed conne ction of the ground conductor.

WARNING! The connection sterilizer to distributi the electrical mainsF requires protection systems on the of elethe ctrical pow er on panel. or safety,the theinstallation installer is of recommende d to use a magnetothermal circuit breaker that is sized appropriately according to the maximum electrical power absorption of t he sterilize r. 1.4.2.1. 400 Vac THREE-PHASE VERSION

The sterilizer 400 Vac three-phase 50 or 60Hz with neutral version is supplied complete with the power supply cable, which has the following characteristics: Length:

3 meters

Type:

Five-wire (R+S+T+N+PE) compliant with the IEC 60227 or IEC 60245 standard

Terminals:

Pin terminals

Connection of the power supply cable of the sterilizer to the electrical distribution mains is performed under the responsibility and care of the client. When performing the connection, it is recommended to follow the procedure described below: Phase

Activi ty

Wire Identifier

Symbol

Notes

1

Connection of ground conductor

Yellow/Green

PE

a)

2

Connection of neutral conductor

Blue

N

3

Connection of phase conductors

Black

R, S, T

4

Checking correct phase sequence

Black

R, S, T

b)

Note a) The connection of the ground conductor must ensure mechanical strength and correct electrical conduction over time. For this purpose, it is recommended to use adequate means for preventing loosening, such as for example split or toothed washers for connections to rigid structures or bars, and terminals that are certified for this purpose in the case of connections with loose protective conductors. Moreover, if the power supply cable is pulled accidentally, the ground conductor must be the last one to disconnect; you should provide an appropriate excess with respect to the other conductors in order to ensure compliance with this requirement. Note b) Checking the correct connection sequence of the R, S and T phases is necessary only if the sterilizer is equipped with the KG83 kit (Load lifting device), as this is the only three-phase motor that is provided in the sterilizer. In this case, the motor should be turned briefly in order to identify its direction of rotation. If the direction of rotation is incorrect, first of all completely disconnect the sterilizer from the power supply mains and then reverse two of the three phase conductors. Do not reverse the phases for any reason while mains voltage is present.

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

6 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 1.4.2.2.

230 Vac SINGLE-PHASE VERSION

The sterilizer 230 Vac single-phase 50 or 60Hz with neutral version is supplied complete with the power supply cable, which has the following characteristics: Length:

3 meters

Type:

Three-wire (PH+N+PE) compliant with the IEC 60227 or IEC 60245 standard

Terminals:

Pin terminals

Connection of the power supply cable of the sterilizer to the electrical distribution mains is performed under the responsibility and care of the client. When performing the connection, it is recommended to follow the procedure described below: Phase

Activi ty

Symbol

Notes

1

Connection of ground conductor

Wire identifier

Yellow/Green

PE

a)

2

Connection of neutral conductor

Blue

N

3

Connection of phase conductor

Brown

PH

Note a) The connection of the ground conductor must ensure mechanical strength and correct electrical conduction over time. For this purpose, it is recommended to use adequate means for preventing loosening, such as for example split or toothed washers for connections to rigid structures or bars, and terminals that are certified for this purpose in the case of connections with loose protective conductors. Moreover, if the power supply cable is pulled accidentally, the ground conductor must be the last one to disconnect; you should provide an appropriate excess with respect to the other conductors in order to ensure compliance with this requirement. 1.5.

INSTALLING THE LOAD LIFTING DEVICE (KG83)

Sterilizers of the FVG series can be equipped with a load lifting device (optional kit KG83), which is particularly useful when the load to be handled is composed of heavy items and falls within the scope of workplace safety regulations. The horizontal movement of the swinging arm of the winch is manual; vertical movement is instead provided by means of an electric motor. For safety reasons, the movement of the winch arm is stopped when the control pushbutton is released. The winch structure and the arm are made of AISI 304 stainless steel.

Fig. 1.5.a – Lift ing device

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

Fig. 1.5.b – Coupli ng accessor y

7 / 11

Fig. 1.5.c - FVG3 equipped wit h lifting device

July 2005


If the KG83 option is requested by the customer at order time, the lifting device is ready for mounting by means of 2 threaded inserts, which are spot-welded to the internal supporting frame. If the KG83 option is requested by the customer after the purchase of the sterilizer, the installation technician shall have to provide the holes in the outer wall and insert the threaded inserts. The KG83 optional kit is composed of the structure of the lifting device, complete with the electrical components and all the accessory materials needed to allow correct assembly of the kit. 1.5.1. 1.5.1.1.

MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY MOUNTING ON PREPARED STERILIZER

Remove the rear closure panel by loosening the fixing screws located at its corners (Fig. 1). From the same position, locate the appropriately provided holes in the right side of the sterilizer frame, suitable for the insertion of the coupling screws. Using these holes as a template, mark the drilling position of the side panel. Drill the panel using a Ø 9 mm bit.

Fig. 2

Loosen the 4 upper screws and the 8 lateral screws that fix the housing (1) to the frame of the lifting device (Fig. 2-3-4). Remove the housing from the supporting frame.

Fig. 1

Mate the supporting frame of the lifting device with the sterilizer body by inserting (from the inside outward) the two supplied hex head screws (2) in the appropriately provided holes located at the two inserts that are spot-welded to the supporting frame of the lifting device (Fig. 4).

Fig. 3

Insert the supplied washers (3) between the head of the screws (2) and the frame of the sterilizer and insert the supplied Teflon spacers (4) between the lateral closure panel of the sterilizer and the frame of the lifting device. Tighten fully the screws (2) (Fig. 4). Insert the two power supply cables in the technical area of the sterilizer (refer to Electrical Wiring subsection). Replace the housing on the supporting frame and fix it by means of the 4 upper screws and the 8 lateral screws (Fig. 2-3). Reassemble the rear closure panel of the sterilizer by using the fixing screws located at its corners (Fig. 1). Fig. 4

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

8 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 1.5.1.2.

MOUNTING ON NON-PREPARED STERILIZER

Remove the rear and left closure panels by loosening the fixing screws arranged at their corners (Fig. 1-2). Loosen the 4 upper screws and the 8 lateral screws that fix the housing (1) to the frame of the lifting device (Fig. 4-5-6). Remove the housing from the supporting frame (Fig. 5). Place thee lifting device next to the sterilizer and align it (Fig. 3). Using the holes in the lifting device frame as template, mark the drilling position of the sterilizer frame. Drill the frame with a Ø 9 mm bit.

Fig. 2

Fig. 1

Replace the left closure panel of the sterilizer by using the fixing screws located at its corners. Using the holes just drilled in the sterilizer frame as a template, mark the drilling position of the side panel. Drill the panel with a Ø 9 mm bit. Mate the supporting frame of the lifting device with the sterilizer body by inserting (from the inside outward) the two

Fig. 3

supplied hex provided head screws in theat appropriately holes (2) located the two inserts that are spot-welded to the supporting frame of the lifting device (Fig. 6). Insert the supplied washers (3) between the head of the screws (2) and the frame of the sterilizer and insert the supplied Teflon spacers (4) between the lateral closure panel of the sterilizer and the frame of the lifting device. Tighten fully the screws (2) (Fig. 6).

Fig. 4

Insert the two power supply cables in the technical area of the sterilizer (refer to Electrical Wiring subsection). Replace the housing on the supporting frame and fix it by means of the 4 upper screws and the 8 lateral screws (Fig. 23). Reassemble the rear closure panel of the sterilizer by using the fixing screws located at its corners (Fig. 1).

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

9 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 1.5.2.

ELECTRICAL WIRING

WARNING! Disconnect the sterilizer from the electrical power supply before accessing the inside of the electrical panel. Please note that switching off the sterilizer by means of its built-in circuit breaker does not isolate the machine complete ly from the power supply li ne. The power supply conduc tors and their input terminals are live with mains voltage even when the circuit breaker is deactivated (OFF posi tio n).

The lifting device is provided with two cables for connection to the electrical system of the sterilizer. The first cable has a polarized five-pole connector and is connected to the three-phase power supply line of the sterilizer. The second two-pole cable is connected to the single-phase, 24-V power supply line. The following procedure should be used to connect them: Remove the front closure panel of the sterilizer by loosening the fixing screws arranged at its corners (Fig. 1). Remove the closure panel of the electrical panel by loosening the 8 screws arranged on the sides (Fig. 2). Locate terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal strip X1, located in the lower region of the electrical panel (Fig. 3). Insert the two-pole conductor from the lifting device into the electrical panel by passing through the provided cable clamp (Fig. 4).

Fig.1

Fig.2

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6

Pull out the terminal strip X1 located in the electrical panel, which comprises terminals 1 and 2, and connect the respective poles of the twopole conductor from the lifting device to these terminals. Replace the terminal strip in its seat (Fig. 3). Replace the electrical panel closure panel by tightening the 8 screws arranged on the sides (Fig. 2). On the left lateral part of the electrical panel, locate the socket provided for inserting the fivepole polarized connector fitted on the cable that arrives from the lifting device. Insert the connector in the socket and operate the locking bracket (Fig. 5). Fix the cables for mutually connecting the lifting device and the sterilizer by means of suitable adhesive straps, taking care to place the straps on flat and clean surfaces (Fig. 6). Replace the front closing panel of the sterilizer and lock it to the frame by tightening the fixing screws located at its corners (Fig. 1).

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

10 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUA L SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS 1.6.

CHECKING THE INSTALLA TION

Before using the sterilizer normally, a short run-in period is needed. This consists in performing at least two complete cycles while the machine is empty. During the run-in period, check and search for any anomalies. The sterilizer can be introduced in the normal production cycle only after these checks have had a positive outcome. If anomalies in operation are detected, contact the manufacturer immediately.

CAUTION In accordance with the laws applicable in the destination Country, the connections to th e wate r, pneumatic and electrical mains must be performed according to best manufacturing practice and checked under the Use r’s responsibilit y.

CAUTION In accordance with the laws applicable in the destination Country, pressure equipment must be checked under the User’s responsibility

ID no. 84503 Rev. 2

by an assigned inspection authority.

11 / 11

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 3 – DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL

SECTION 3

DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS

ID no. 84504 Rev. 2

1/2

July 2005

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 3 – DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS

TABL E OF DRAWINGS/DIAGRAMS

DRAWING/DIAGRA M

MODEL

DOCUMENT NO.

FVG1/2

GA100018

FVG3

GA100017

FVG1/2

GM011268

FVG3

GM011122

FVG1/2

83834

FVG3

83833

FVG1/2/3

GN011254

Installation drawing

Hydraulic diagram

List of hydraulic diagram components Electrical diagram

ID no. 84504 Rev. 2

2/2

July 2005

VERTICAL AUTOCLA VE FVG1-2 PART LIST TAG

FUNCTION

DESCRIPTION

STANDARDS AND TECHNICAL DATA

CODE

-

Adapterforvalidationport

Nozzle

DN35-DN22

-

4/4

SPARE PART

GRP ASSEMB LY

M102669 - P

ID no. 8383

GM011268

P&ID CODE

PART

-

TECHNICAL MAINTENAN DATA SHEET (STC)

-

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER


PROCESS CONTROLLER

Soft ware vers io n: FC02A / FD02A

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

1 / 32

November 2004



USE ..............................................................................................................................4

1.1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 4

1.2.

SOFTWARE STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 5

1.3.

ACCESS LEVELS................................................................................................................................ 8

1.4.

OPERATING PHASES ...................................................................................................................... 10

1.4.1.

INITIAL CHECKS....................................................................................................................... 11

1.4.2.

POWER-ON............................................................................................................................... 12

1.4.2.1.

LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES ........................................................................... 12

1.4.3.

OPERATION ENABLING........................................................................................................... 12

1.4.4.

PRODUCT LOADING ................................................................................................................ 13

1.4.4.1. 1.4.5.

LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC .......................................................................................... 13 PARAMETER SETTING............................................................................................................ 14

1.4.5.1.

PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM ..................................................... 14

1.4.5.2.

GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM....................................................... 16

1.4.6.

PROGRAM START.................................................................................................................... 17

1.4.6.1.

AUXILIARY MESSAGES....................................................................................................... 18

1.4.6.2.

PROCESS CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 19

1.4.6.3.

“PHASE STEP” AND “CYCLE STOP” FUNCTIONS............................................................. 19

1.4.6.4.

ALARM MESSAGES............................................................................................................. 20

1.4.6.5.

EMERGENCY PHASE .......................................................................................................... 21

1.4.6.6.

END OF PROCESS .............................................................................................................. 21

1.4.7.

PRODUCT UNLOADING........................................................................................................... 22

1.4.8.

DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF........................................................................................... 22

1.5.

AUXIL IARY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 22

1.5.1.

PRINTING FUNCTION .............................................................................................................. 22

1.5.2.

CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME .......................................................................................... 23

1.5.3.

CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL.......................................... 23

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

2 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.5.4.

AUTODIAGNOSIS ..................................................................................................................... 24

1.5.5.

ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 24

1.5.6.

AUTOCLAVE DATA................................................................................................................... 25

1.5.7.

INITIALIZATION......................................................................................................................... 26

2.

AL ARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................27

2.1.

AL ARMS ............................................................................................................................................ 27

2.2.

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 30

2.2.1.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................................................................... 30

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

3 / 32

November 2004


1.

1.1.

USE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

All the main functions of the sterilizer are managed by a process controller, which is composed of an integrated PLC and control panel, managed by resident software structured into menus and submenus, which can be accessed only by entering appropriate passwords. The permitted access levels allow to access the menus of the software according to a preset hierarchy. The operator interacts with the machine by means of the control panel and manages the sterilization process according to nine preset programs, which can be customized according to specific parameters. The set of main activities that contribute to the treatment of the processed materials for their sterilization is termed sterilization process, or more commonly sterilization cycle or just cycle. On the sterilizer, the execution of a cycle consists in the development of a specific program on the process controller. The process controller, by means of its own operating system and of the program mentioned above, coordinates a series of actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids at the various temperatures and pressures. This provides the most correct and appropriate transfer of heat energy to the load according to the physical characteristics of the load itself. The following main activities are distinguished in the sterilization process: -

Autoclave preparation;

-

Load sterilization;

-

Cycle end.

Each one of these main activities is composed of further operating processes, which are termed simply phases. Depending on the programs selected from the menu by the operator, these phases vary in terms of the physical parameters that characterize the liquids/fluids involved in the process. The main activities listed above typically comprise the following operating steps:





Au to cl ave pr eparat io n 

Power-on and initial checks.



Enabling for operation.



Product loading.

Load sterilization Parameter setting.  



Program start.

Cycle end 

Product unloading.



Deactivation or power-off.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

4 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER For a full discussion of the individual phases, please refer to the OPERATING PHASES subsection.

CAUTION Most workplace accidents are caused by failure to comply with the most basic safety rules. An yone worki ng on th e machi ne mu st kn ow perfectl y, and ob ser ve sc ru pu lo us ly, th e safety rules given in this doc ument.

WARNING! The operator must be able to work so that the controls can be reached easily and in the ergonomically most appropriate position. Always keep the work area clear of auxiliary equipment that is not related to the sterilizer management operations. Before startup, move all unauthorize d ind ividuals away fro m th e machine.

1.2.

SOFTWARE STRUCTURE

The software that resides in the process controller is composed of two fundamental parts: •

PLC SOFTWARE

•

PANEL SOFTWARE

The PLC SOFTWARE supervises all the actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids. In particular, it allows management of: 

Machine preparation (Program start).



Cycle (Heating, sterilization, cooling, drying, atmospheric pressure balancing, cycle end, emergency, and blackout emergency phases).



Autodiagnosis (Reading of digital inputs, reading and forcing of digital outputs, sensing and calibration of temperature and pressure).



Safe opening and closure of the door (lid).



Enabling of steam generator.



Alarm activation. 

Display of system status messages.



NOTE

Ac cess t o the PLC s of tw are is n ot allow ed.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

5 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER The PANEL SOFTWARE is organized into menus and submenus according to the following structure: MAIN MENU 1

PROGRAM START Select program number: 1-9 Press numeric key

2

CHANGE PARA METERS 1.

2.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

PROGRAM PARAMETERS R1.

Minimum sterilization temperature

R2.

Sterilization temperature

R3.


R4.

Sterilization duration

R5.

Delay time for heating end – sterilization start

R6.

Temperature for closure of chamber discharge electric valve

R7.

Enable spontaneous cooling

R8.

Spontaneous cooling temperature

R9.

Enable cooling with injection of compressed air

R10.

Cooling temperature with injection of compressed air

R11.

Enable drying with injection of compressed air

R12.

Duration of drying with injection of compressed air

R13.

Timing for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge

R14.

Closure time for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge

GENERAL PARAMETERS G1.

Maximum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing

G2.

Minimum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing

G3.

Upper pressure range tolerance for steam injection control

G4.

Lower pressure range tolerance for steam injection control

G5.

Timing for control of electric valve for steam injection

G6.

Closure time for control of electric valve for steam injection

G7.

Cycle end time

G8. G9.

Enable control of final temperature for door opening Controlled final temperature

G10.

Enable steam generator

G11.

Enable printer

G12.

Printer timing

G13.

Enable automatic cycle start

G14.

Enable cycle repetition

6 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 3.

3

4

FACTORY-SET PARAMETERS 1.

Autoclave serial number

2.

Enable option K41, enhanced compressor

3.

Enable option K64, condensate recovery tray

4.

Enable option K81, printer

I/O AUTODIAGNOSIS 1. 2.

DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL OUTPUTS

3.

ANALOG INPUTS

4.

HEAT PROBE CALIBRATION

5.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 1.

2.

3.

4.

PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 1.

Password selection

2.

Password logout

3.

Change password

ALARM MANAGEMENT 1.

Display alarm list

2.

Print list

3.

Delete list

AUTOCLAVE DATA 1.

Serial number

2.

Panel software version

3.

PLC software version

4.

Number of cycles

5.

System options

LANGUAGE SELECTION 1. 2.

Italian English

3.

German

4.

French

5.

Dutch

5. INITIALIZATION 1. ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

Download of parameters from panel to PLC 7 / 32

November 2004




NOTE

Operator access to panel softw are is allowed only fo r specific access l evels, whic h are e nable d by enterin g appropr iate password s. Please refer to the ACCE SS LEVELS subs ection .

1.3.

ACCESS LEVELS

In order to protect the system and ensure a hierarchy based on reasonably determined skills, access is allowed only according to different authorization levels by first entering a code, known as password. The machine allows access according to 5 levels (from 1 to 5). From each level, it is possible to access the other levels by entering the specific password. Of the 5 access levels, the first two (1 and 2), termed “FEDEGARI DEVELOPER” and “FEDEGARI PERSONNEL” respectively, are reserved for Fedegari technicians. The other levels (3, 4 and 5), termed “USER SUPERVISOR” , “USER OPERATOR” and “STAND-BY”, respectively, are reserved to the personnel assigned to the sterilizer. The following Table describes the association between each level and its operating functions. Table 1.3 – Levels of access to operating functions ACCESS LEVEL S −

1

FEDEGARI DEVELOPER

− − − − − − − − −

2

FEDEGARI PERSONNEL

− −

Note: 10 minutes after the password has been entered, the system automatically resets itself and returns to the STAND-BY mode

− − − − −

3

USER SUPERVISOR

− −

Note:

−

In the INS function, it is not possible to change the factory-set parameters

− − −

4

OPERATING FUNCTIONS Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Direct access to menu pages (PGS) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Configuration mode (CFG) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK ) Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK ) Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK )

USER OPERATOR

Note: In the INS function, it is not possible to change the general parameters and the factory-set parameters

− − − − −

It is not possible to delete the list of alarms displayed by means of the EVT function.

−

Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK )

It is not possible to calibrate the analog inputs or to force the digital outputs by means of the autodiagnosis function. ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

8 / 32

November 2004


ACCESS LEVEL S

OPERATING FUNCTIONS

It is not possible to perform the SYSTEM INITIALIZATION operation −

5

STAND-BY

− −

PSW:

Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Access to alarm event list (EVT)

Password input (4 digits): -

This function allows to access the system functions that are available for the specific access level. If an incorrect password is entered, the panel responds by flashing the asterisks and automatically sets the lowest access level (5, Stand-by).

SYS: System information:

TIM:

-

For setting the contrast of the display.

-

For testing the LEDs of the panel.

-

For displaying the protocol used to communicate with the PLC.

-

To display the charge status of the battery of the panel.

-

To display the status of communication with the PLC.

-

To display the status of the connection to the printer.

Panel date/time: -

PGS:

Direct access to pages: -

EVT:

This function allows to enter alphanumeric values in the edit fields. The INS function is activated by pressing the “0” key on the operator panel.

Print screen function: -

ACK :

This function allows to load the software into the panel.

Insert mode: -

PRN:

This function allows to display and print the history list of the last 256 alarm events that have occurred.

Configuration mode: -

INS:

This function allows to access directly the pages of the program by entering the page number.

List of alarm events: -

CFG:

This function allows to correct the date and time of the panel.

This function allows to produce a printout of the data present in the displayed page. The function is performed by pressing the “9” key on the operator panel.

Acknowledgment function: -

This function allows to acknowledge the alarms that require an acknowledgment.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

9 / 32

November 2004


NOTE The sterilizer is suppli ed with t he following default pa ssword alrea dy set: Level 3 User Superviso r

2222

 This password enables machine management and parameter changing.

The User Supervisor can also enable the lower levels: Level 4 User Operator

1111

 This password enables machine operation. Level 5 Stand-b y

0000

 This password sets the machine to Stand-by mode.

NOTE For security reasons, the user must always disable his password (by entering the STAND-BY password, which i s 0000) when he stops us ing the machine and in any case be fore switch ing it off. The following i s an equivalent opera tion: 

Press th e “ 4” key to enter (SPE CIAL FUN CTIONS) , then



Press the “ 1” key to select t he (PASSWORD MANAGEMENT) menu, then



Press the “ 2” key to select (PASSW ORD LOGOUT), which places th e syst em in STAND- BY.

1.4.

OPERATING PHASES

Management of the generic sterilization process by the operator is organized according to the following main phases: 

Initial checks.



Power-on.



Operation enabling.



Product loading. o



Lid opening/closing logic.

Parameter setting.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

10 / 32

November 2004




o

Program parameters and changes to them.

o

General parameters and changes to them.

Program start and run. o

Auxiliary messages.

o

Process control.

o

Phase Step and Cycle Stop functions.

o

Alarm messages.

o

Emergency phase.

o

End of process.



Product unloading.



Power-off.

Sequential execution of the operating phases listed above leads to complete processing of the product.

1.4.1.

INITIAL CHECKS

Lighting of work area Check that the work area in the regions where operations are performed is adequately lit (with natural light If possible), so as to allow immediate identification of the control and monitoring devices of the machine.

Checking connections and initial conditions of the machine Check that the machine is connected to the electric power supply line. Check the connection of the water circuit of the machine to the supply tank. Check the level of the demineralized water inside the tank. Check the connection of the minimum-level sensor for the water in the tank. Check that the discharge of the machine is correctly connected to a conveyance system that is suitable to work at temperatures close to 100 °C. Check that the manual chamber pressure venting valve is closed.

NOTE The amount of water contained in t he tank must be at lea st equal to 10 lite rs i n order t o ensure complete exe cution of t he steriliza tion cycle.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

11 / 32

November 2004


1.4.2.

POWER-ON

Power supply check Check that the main switch is engaged (in the “I” position). If it is on “O”, power the machine by moving the lever of the switch to the “I” position. Command activation and acquisition After operating the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, the display of the operator panel shows, for a few seconds, a video message in English, which specifies the version of the panel firmware and then shows the main menu, with the list of selectable operating options.

1.4.2.1.

LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES

The options provided in the main menu are selected by pressing on the keypad the key that corresponds to the number shown next to the option. The main menu is displayed automatically after the controller has been powered. Access to the other pages is allowed: 

By entering the number that corresponds to the selected option from the main menu or from another menu.

To return to the preceding menu: 

1.4.3.

Operate the CLEAR key.

OPERATION ENAB LING

Enabling the operation of the machine requires the operator to enter a password.

From the main menu: 

Press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then



Press the “1” key to select the (PASSWORD MANAGEMENT) menu, then



Press the “1” key to select (PASSWORD SELECTION), which allows to enter the PASSWORD.

NOTE For further information on password management, please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS subsection.

NOTE For secrecy reasons, the panel does not echo on the monitor the numeric characters entered. Ac co rd in gly, t he passwo rd is no t s ho wn on th e disp lay.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

12 / 32

November 2004


NOTE If the “ 0000” password or anothe r unrecognized password is entered in the PSW functio n, the system configures itself automatically at the STAND-BY level. To return to the operating conditi ons of t he machine it is necessary to enter a va lid password.

1.4.4.

PRODUCT LOADING

1. 2.

Extract the heat probe(s) from the sterilization chamber; Insert in the sterilization chamber the baskets that contain the product to be processed;

3.

Place the flexible heat probe in the upper basket so that the metallic tips are in contact with the product.

WARNING! Removing bottles in which the internal temperature is still high (above 70°C) may entail their explosion, with s evere risks fo r the integrity of n earby operators. Ac co rd in gly, to st erili ze so lu ti on s co nt ained in hermetic ally cl osed co nt ainers, select only sterilization processes t hat have a n appropriate final l oad cooling phase a nd a c ounterpressure with sterile air, ensuring safety durin g load extra ction. The safety tempera ture above which the lid cannot be opened must be set to a value < 70 °C and general parameter G8 must be activated by setting the value 1.

WARNING! Use containe rs of uniform size to sterilize thermolabile products.

WARNING! If the product is composed of containers having different dimensions, place the heat probe in the largest co ntainer .

WARNING! Make sure that the cable(s) of the heat probe(s) is(are) inserted in the chamber before closing the lid .

1.4.4.1.

LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC

Opening system Starting the autoclave opening maneuver requires the following conditions to be met: −

−

−

No process cycle is in progress; The pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical pressure switch must both indicate that the pressure inside the chamber has returned equal to the atmospheric pressure; The heat probe arranged in the chamber detects a temperature that is lower than the preset safety temperature: this occurs only if general parameter G8 is set.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

13 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER Once the clearances indicated above have been received, a clearance provided by the operator discharges the compressed air from the gasket seat. The lighting of the LED located proximate to the “7” key on the operator panel, which indicates that the lid is open, indicates that it is possible to turn the lid to extract the load.

Closure system The lid is turned manually from the open position to the closed position while keeping pressed the safety lever that releases it. When the lid has reached the position provided for closure, it releases the lid engagement lever and simultaneously prevents the lid from rotating and presses the safety limit switch. The limit switch changes state and authorizes the system to send the command to the electric valves that allow to introduce compressed air in the gasket seat of the sealing system. Once the clearance has been obtained from the limit switch and therefore the correct position of the lid is ensured, an operator command introduces compressed air in the gasket seat, starting the complete closure of the chamber and the locking of the lid. Closure of the chamber is reported by the lighting of the LED located next to the “8” key. If imperfect closure of the lid is detected while a cycle is in progress, a specific alarm message is issued and the cycle is consequently interrupted, passing to the emergency phase.

1.4.5.

PARA METER SETTING

Each program is constituted by a sequence of elementary modules termed phases. The development of the program generally consists in arranging in sequence the execution of these phases. The phases control the components of the sterilizer in order to obtain, in the sterilization chamber, pressures and temperatures that follow preset functions. The programs are supplied with a predefined structure of phases arranged in sequences that the operator can enable by means of appropriate program parameters. In addition to the program parameters, there is a series of general parameters that control activities and functions that are common to all programs. These parameters cannot be set by the operator.

1.4.5.1.

PROGRAM PARA METERS AND CHANGES TO THEM

For each program it is possible to customize the phases or change certain parameters that characterize the activity of a phase so as to allow to choose the required operating configuration. This is done by setting appropriately provided parameters known as program parameters (R1, R2,....R14). The program parameters and program names are available for display and modification by accessing the Change Parameter, Program Parameter menu from the main menu. The program parameters are listed in the table below. The meaning of the fields of the table is as follows: −

No : parameter identification number;

−

DESCRIPTION : description of the activities regulated by the parameter;

−

FUNCTION : name of the parameter;

−

MIN : minimum value that the parameter can assume;

−

DEF : default value of the parameter for every program;

−

MAX : maximum value that the parameter can assume.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

14 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER The units of measure of the parameters are degrees Celsius (°C), minutes (min.) and bars (bar).

Table 1.4.5.1. – List of program parameters PROGRAMS 1 ÷ 9 No

STRING

FUNCTION

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MIN

MAX

R1

MIN.ST. T

This is the temperature value that, when added to 0.2°C, constitutes the phase end target of the heating phase. This is also the minimum temperature allowed in the °C sterilization phase. When the 120 120 120 120 120 134 134 134 134 105 temperature in the chamber drops below this value, the display shows the “STERIL T LACK” alarm and the sterilization phase time is suspended.

R2

STERIL. T

This is the typical temperature °C reached in the chamber during 121 121 121 121 121 135 135 135 135 105 the sterilization phase.

R3

MAX. ST. T

When the temperature in the chamber during sterilization °C reaches this value, the display 122 122 122 122 122 136 136 136 136 105 shows the “EXCESS STERIL

134

135

136

The” alarm. R4

STER IL t

min Durationof sterilizationphase .

R5

ST delayt

Duration for which the temperature in the chamber must stay above the min 2 temperature of R1+0.2°C before passing from heating to the sterilization phase.

R6

T closesE6

R7

SPONT. COOLING.

Allows to activate/deactivate 0/1 the spontaneous cooling phase.

R8

T - SPONT.

°C Temperature target of the 110 110 110 110 120 110 110 120 120 spontane ous cooli ng phase.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

°C

10

10

20

20

20

10

10

15

20

0

9999

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

0

9

0

136

0

1

50

140

This is the temperature set for automatic closure of the 100 100 100 100 110 120 120 120 120 chamber discharge valve during the heating phase

0

15 / 32

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

November 2004


No

STRING

FUNCTION

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

R9

AIR COOLING

Allows to ctivatethe 0/1 activate/dea 0 phase of cooling with injection of compressed air.

0

0

R10

T - AIR

°C Temperature target of the70 air cooling phase.

70

70

R11

DRYING.

Allows to 0/1 activate/dea ctivatethe drying phase.

0

0

0

0

0

R12

DRYINGt

min Time target of the drying10 phase

10

10

10

15

R13

TIMINGt E7

Sum of the opening and sec closing time of the electric 10 valve for discharge modulation.

10

10

10

10

R14

Closure time of electric TIMING t E7 sec valve for discharge 9 OFF modulation.

9

9

9

1.4.5.2.

0

0

70

0

0

0

MAX

0

0

70

70 50

0

0

0

10

10

10

10

1

99

10

10

10

10

1

99

9

9

0

99

70

9

MIN

70 70

9

9

0

0

1

140

1

GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM

During the execution of the sterilization program, the operation of the machine is regulated not only by the program parameters but also by a series of general parameters, which control activities and functionalities that are common to every sterilization process. The table below lists the general parameters and includes a brief description of their function. The meaning of the fields of this table is as follows: −

No:

−

DESCRIPTION:

name of the parameter

−

FUNCTION:

description of the activities regulated by the parameter

−

MIN:

−

DEF:

−

MAX:

parameter identification number

minimum value that the parameter can assume default value of the parameter maximum value that the parameter can assume Table 1.4.5.2 – General p arameters

No.

DESCRIPTION

G1

MAX.ATM P

G2

MIN.ATMP

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

FUNCTION

MIN

DEF

MAX

This is the maximum value that the pressure in the chamber can bar assume during atmospheric balancing and cycle end phases in order 0.50 1.05 1.10 to enable lid opening. bar

Does not allow to open the door of the sterilization chamber is in 0.50 0,95 1.00 vacuum if the pressure is lower than G2

16 / 32

November 2004


No.

DESCRIPTION

G3

dP +TOL.E8

G4

dP-TOL.E8

FUNCTION

MIN

DEF

MAX

During heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the chamber is regulated according to the value of this parameter and of bar 0.00 0. is03 0.10 program parameter R2, from which the regulation pressure obtained. During the heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the chamber is regulated according to the value of this parameter and of bar 0. 02 0. 03 0.10 program parameter R2, from which the regulation pressure is obtained.

G5 G6

TIMING t E8

sec

The sum of the opening and closure time of the electric valve for 999 3 7 modulating steam injection.

TIMING t E8 OFF sec Theclosuretime of the electric valvefor modulating steaminjection.

0

5

999

0 10

999

G7

CYCLEEND t

sec Indicat es the duration,in seconds,of the cycleendphase .

G8

T CONTR OL

0/1

G9

OPENING T

This is the temperature (sensed by heat probe T001) above which lid °C opening is not allowed. This check is active only if parameter 0 G8 70 is set 95 to 1.

G10

STEAMGEN. D6

G11

PRINTER

G12

PRINTTIMING

sec

This parameter allows to set the printing rate of the cycle data during the execution of a sterilization program. It is active only if the printer is 5 30 9999 present in the machine and the G11 parameter is set to 1. The printing interval is a function of the phase time.

G13

AUTOMSTART

0/1

This parameter can assume only the values 0 and 1; if it is 1, it 0 0 enables the Automatic Cycle Start function.

1

G14

REPEATCYCLE

0/1

This parameter can assume only the values 0 and 1; if it is 1, it 0 0 enables a single repetition of the cycle.

1

1.4.6.

0/1

This value is to be set to 1 in order to activate control of parameter G9 0 1 0 on the heat probe.

This parameter can only assume the values 0 and 1; if it is 0, it 0 0 disables the operation of the internal steam generator of the machine.

This parameter enables printing of the data of the cycle during the 0/1 execution of the sterilization program. The value 1 is set 0only if0 the printer is installed on the machine.

1

1

PROGRAM START

The machine is provided with 9 customizable programs constituted by the same sequence of phases, to be used for sterilization of the product. These 9 programs are contained in the PROGRAM START menu, which can be selected under the MAIN MENU by means of the “1” key. The sterilizer enters the initial preparation phase, during which it performs certain checks automatically. During this phase, the program performs no actuation o the elements or components of the sterilizer. The actual start of the sterilization cycle is achieved by acting on the START key.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

17 / 32

November 2004


NOTE Al l th e pr ograms are su pp li ed wit h th e default val ue of each parameter, wh ic h is ass umed by the system if the opera tor does not change it.

WARNING! if t he machine is provided wi th a “ condensate re covery tank” (K64), when the program is selected, a message is displayed which requests confirmation that the tank has been emptied. Before continuing, the program checks the logic of the lid system, ensuring that the actions performed by the operator are compatible with the safety conditions in the chamber. During execution, the program can no longer be stopped (until the sterilization process ends), except by: 

a manual cycle stop command, by pressing the “5” key, which leads to the emergency phase;



the occurrence of an alarm (caused by a malfunction during the sterilization process) which leads to the emergency phase;



an interruption caused by a blackout, which brings the sterilizer to a phase termed “blackout emergency”, which is characterized by a suspended state that ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.

Exit from the emergency states, passing directly to the final phases of the cycle (pressure balancing and cycle end), is possible by acting on the “2” key.

NOTE It is the operator’s task to prepare sterilization programs that are compatible with the components installed on the machine and are suitable for the load to be processed. The software on the sterilizer does not allow the user to select phases and programs or functions that are not allowed by the P&ID configuration of the machine. 1.4.6.1.

AUXIL IARY MESSAGES

Auxiliary messages are short text strings shown on the display in specific screens, which report to the operator the status of the machine, of the doors and the outcome of the sterilization/test. The following table lists the auxiliary messages and the screens in which they can be displayed: Table 1.4.6.1 – Auxi liary messages AUXILIARY MESSAGES displayed in sc reens: Main menu

Prepara tio n

DOOR OPEN ! OK DOOR OPENING

READY TO START DOOR OPEN ! OK DOOR OPENING GENERATOR NOT READY AUTOMATIC START REPEAT IN PROGRESS (RP)

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

18 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.4.6.2.

PROCESS CONTROL

Once the cycle has started, the data related to the sterilization process in progress are shown on the display. The display includes and provides to the operator information according to two main classes. The first class is termed control parameters and provides useful information (characteristic data for identifying the program and its phase in progress), preset threshold values (pressure, temperature, time) and, for these last values, the extent of the values acquired and processed in real time in the sterilization chamber. The second class relates to information termed alarm messagesand auxiliary messages.

Control data The process page, during each phase, provides the operator with the following data: −

The number of the program being executed, preceded by the letter “P”;

−

The name of the phase in progress;

−

The preset threshold value (pressure, temperature or time) that is the target value of the phase in progress and starts the next phase, preceded by the flashing “=>” indicator;

−

The temperature (in degrees) detected in the sterilization chamber by the heat probe “TE”;

−

The pressure (in bar) measured by the pressure transducer “TP”;

−

The phase time “t”;

−

The sterilization time “ts”.

If the printer is present and enabled for printing, the process information listed above is shown on the display and also printed at each phase start. Then, with the printing rate set in the general parameters, the process information is printed, without including the program number, the name of the phase, and the phase target. 1.4.6.3.

“ PHASE STEP” AND “ CYCLE STOP” FUNCTIONS

During the execution of the sterilization program, until the process is ended, normal operating interaction is disabled. It is in any case possible to intervene on the process in progress by activating specific functions (PHASE STEP and STOP-CYCLE) described below.

PHASE STEP function This function is activated by pressing the “4” key. This function allows to force the transition to the next operating step, blocking the commands and actuations related to the operating phase in progress, without waiting to reach the set end-of-phase value with display and printout of the “P/S KEY OPERATED” alarm.

CYCLE STOP function This function is activated by pressing the “5” key. This allows to pass to the emergency phase with display and printout of the “CYCLE STOP KEY OPERATED” alarm. WARNING! Using the “ 5” k ey is highly dangerous for the load in the case of containe rs that are not clos ed hermetically but are protected by filters: the pressure differential would cause the liquids to boil. Ac co rd in gly, pr ess th e “ 5” key after ch eck in g th at th e press ur e in th e ch amber has reached atmospheric pressure values spontaneously and that the product temperature is lower than 70°C. ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

19 / 32

November 2004


The PHASE STEP and CYCLE STOP functions are active in all phases, except for the ones listed in the following table. Table 1.4.6.3 - Phase Step and Cycle Stop clearances PHASE

PROG.

PHASE STEP

CYCLE STOP

Preparation

all

no

No

Atmospheric pressure balancing

all

yes (*)

No

Cycle end

all

no

No

Emergency

all

no

No

Blackout emergency

all

no

No

Cooling

1-9

no

yes

(*)

It is necessary to press the “4” key to allow the forced exit of the cycle, after pressing the “5” key in the EMERGENCY phase, if the machine is unable to perform atmospheric pressure balancing.

1.4.6.4.

AL ARM MESSAGES

The sterilizer provides various alarms, which are shown on the display with a brief description and are printed in real time if the printout option is enabled by means of the general parameters (G11). The occurrence of an alarm is reported not only visually but also by activating an acoustic signal, which can be muted by pressing the ENTER key. If acknowledgment of the alarm in progress (ACK) is required, the operator must keep the ENTER key pressed for a few seconds. The alarms are termed system alarms when they involve or general safety conditions or instruments or phase alarms if they are linked to the execution of specific phases. The higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process, interrupt the cycle, causing immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a safe and suspended state. In this EMERGENCY phase, the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the pressure balancing phase and to the consequent cycle end. The following table lists the alarm messages and the associated management. Table 1.4.6.4 – Alarm messages

AL ARM DESCRIPTION

LOG

ACK

PRN ON

PRN OFF

X

X X

1.

Excessive sterilization temperature

X

2. 3.

Insufficient sterilization temperature Excessive temperature in chamber

X X

X

X X

4.

Excessive pressure in chamber

X

X

X

5.

Temperature transducer malfunction

X

X

X

6.

Pressure transducer malfunction

X

X

7.

Lack of water in generator

X

8.

Door open alarm

X

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

20 / 32

X X

X

X

X November 2004


AL ARM DESCRIPTION 9.

LOG

ACK

PRN ON

X

X

X

Door system alarm

10. Phase step button operated

X

X

11. Cycle stop button operated

X

X

12. Blackout detected

X

X

13. Printer error

X

14. Panel battery drained

X

LOG:

Logs the alarm in the history list

ACK :

Requires acknowledgment of the alarm by the operator

PRN ON:

Prints the alarm when it is activated

PRN OFF:

Prints the alarm when it is deactivated

PRN OFF

X X

WARNING! The operator must be instructed correctly and extensively regarding the meaning and important of the ala rms t hat can occur on the machine.

1.4.6.5.

EMERGENCY PHASE

The emergency phase occurs in the sterilizer when the following events occur: 

A malfunction during the sterilization process;



A restart of the machine after an interruption caused by a blackout;



An activation of the manual CYCLE STOP command.

Activation of the emergency phase closes all the valves and stops all the motors, setting the autoclave in standby mode. This suspended state ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.

WARNING! Ac ti vatio n of th e STOP key in th e Emergency ph ase all ow s to mo ve on to th e atmos pheric pressure balancing and cycle end phases. Before moving on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase, check that the pressure and temperature conditions allow the maneuver without causing damage to the load. In particular, if the load is constituted by liquids, it must be allowed to cool before pressing the STOP key.

1.4.6.6.

END OF PROCESS

Once the program has reached the last defined phase (CYCLE END), the acoustic warning is activated, and the LED arranged to the side of the STOP key starts flashing. After a preset time (phase end target) has elapsed, or by activating the STOP key, the sterilization program ends, the display shows the MAIN MENU, and if the printer is present and enabled, the final cycle data are printed .

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

21 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.4.7. 1.

PRODUCT UNLOADING Open the lid as follows:



Press the “7” key on the keypad, producing the automatic discharge of the air from the sealing gasket seat;



Check that the LED associated with the “7” key lights up;



Press the lever, which disengages the lid from the mechanical locking system;



Turn the lid horizontally until it reaches the fully open position;



Transfer the load from the chamber, removing the flexible heat probe;



Place the heat probe inside the empty sterilization chamber.

1.4.8.

DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF

The sterilizer can be stopped and switched off only by turning the main switch. Halting and power-off is achieved by returning the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, to the “O” position.

NOTE Before deactiv ating t he machin e, remember to enter the STAND- BY passw ord (000 0). An equiv alent o perati on is : 

Press th e “ 4” key to enter (SPE CIAL FUN CTIONS), then






Press the “ 2” to s elect (PAS SWORD LOGOUT), whic h places t he syst em in STANDBY.

1.5.

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

Some functions of the sterilizer are active even when a normal sterilization cycle is not being performed. These functions are typically dedicated to printing the parameters related to the sterilization cycle and to changing certain general parameters, such as the date and time, or to checking that the operator panel is functional. Not all auxiliary functions are freely usable by the operator. The key information is provided below for each of these functions. 1.5.1.

PRINTING FUNCTION

The printer with which the machine is equipped allows to print the data of the cycle. The enabling of data printing and the printing rate are preset in the general parameter page. The following information is included in the print report, in the following order: 1.

HEADING −

FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI

−

DATE AND TIME of program start

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

22 / 32

November 2004


−

SERIAL NUMBER of the autoclave

−

Space for notes

2.

PROGRAM NUMBER AND LIST OF PROGRAM PARAMETERS

3.

CYCLE DATA These data correspond to the data shown on the display and are printed at a preset rate (calculated on the phase time).

4.

5.

ALARM REPORTS: −

DATE and TIME of alarm recording

−

STATE OF ALARM detected (ON, OFF)

−

ALARM NAME

FINAL DATA −

CYCLE NUMBER (progressive cycle number)

−

CYCLE DURATION (total cycle time)

−

STERILIZATION TIME (time of exposure to correct temperatures during the sterilization phase)

−

DATE AND TIME (program end time)

−

SIGNATURE (Space for signature of operator and supervisor)

When no cycles are running, the page shown on the display can be printed by pressing the “9” key. 1.5.2.

CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME

(This option is available to the operator only at the User Supervisor level). The operator panel is provided with an internal clock, which runs constantly and is powered by a battery that keeps the date and time up-to-date even when no mains power is available. It is in any case possible, if necessary, to set or change the current date and time:

1.5.3.



From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds; the display shows the panel function menu;



Select the TIM parameter by using the R and L keys;



Press ENTER to confirm the selection; the monitor shows the fields that contain the system date and time;



Enter the chosen numeric value in the highlighted field by using the keypad;



Press ENTER to move to the next field and then repeat the above operation if necessary;



Press CLEAR to return to the main menu.

CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL

The machine is equipped with a software tool that allows to perform an online check of the functionality of the Operator Panel. ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

23 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER This check allows to verify the operation of the battery of the operator panel, of the LEDs, the status of the communication of the panel with the PLC and with the printer (if installed); this check also allows to adjust the brightness of the display. To check the operator panel: −

−

−

From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds: the panel function menu is shown on the display; Operate the R and L keys until the “SYS” function is highlighted; Press ENTER to confirm the option selected on the monitor: the autodiagnosis page of the panel is displayed;

−

Operate the U and D to select the various options;

−

Select the “DISPLAY” line; to change the brightness of the display, press the R and L keys;

−

After highlighting the line related to the battery, check the operating status of the battery;

−

−

−

1.5.4.

After highlighting the “PLC” line, check the status of the connection of the panel to the PLC by means of the corresponding message; After highlighting the “PRINTER” line, check the status of the connection of the printer to the panel by means of the corresponding message; Press CLEAR to return to the main menu.

AUTODIAGNOSIS

(This option is available to the operator only in display mode). The process controller is provided with a diagnostic tool, termed “AUTODIAGNOSIS”, which allows to check: −

The values of the parameters related to the digital input/output channels;

−

The analog inputs of the system.

The autodiagnosis function can be accessed by means of the main menu: 

press the “3” key to enter (AUTODIAGNOSIS) and then;



press the “1” key to select (DIGITAL INPUTS);



press the “2” key to select (DIGITAL OUTPUTS);



press the “3” key to select (ANALOG INPUTS);



press the “4” key to select (TEMPERATURE PROBE CALIBRATION);



press the “5” key to select (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION).

1.5.5.

AL ARM HISTORY MANA GEMENT

The alarm history can be accessed by means of the main menu: 

press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then;



press the “2” key to select the (ALARM MANAGEMENT) menu, then;



press the “1” key to select (DISPLAY LIST);



press the “2” key to select (PRINT LIST);



press the “3” key to select (DELETE LIST) – function not allowed to the operator.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

24 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER As an alternative, it is possible to access the alarm history by activating the “EVT” function from the panel function menu. This allows to display a specific page in which a keypad command can display in each instance the other previously occurred alarms, starting from the last detected alarm. The page lists, for each alarm that has occurred: −

The progressive number;

−

The “STATUS” transition type that has been affected by the detected condition: *

“ON” = alarm onset;

*

“OFF” = deactivation;

*

“ACK” = acknowledgment.

−

The description of the alarm condition that has occurred;

−

The date and time when the alarm occurred.

To display the “alarm list” page on the monitor, proceed as follows: −

Access the main menu;

−

Press ENTER (for at least two seconds): the panel function menu is displayed;

−

Select the “EVT” function by acting on the R and L keys;

−

Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected option. This displays the most recent alarm;

−

Operate the U key to display the other logged alarms.

NOTE By pressing t he “ 9” key, a ll the detecte d alarms a re printed, sta rting fro m the first di splayed alarm up to the most recent alarms. Access to the alarm list page is not allowed if no alarms have bee n lo gged in the memory area.

NOTE The maximum number of alarms that can be logged in the history is 256; if this limit is exceede d, the excess mess ages replace the oldest on es.

1.5.6.

AUTOCLAVE DATA

By pressing the “4” key from the Main Menu and then the “3” key from the Special Functions menu, the “AUTOCLAVE DATA” option is selected, giving access to the page that lists the general data of the sterilizer: Table 1.5.6. – Autoclave data

DESCRIPTION

CHARACTERISTIC

Serial number

Can be entered only by Fedegari personnel


Fixed


Fixed

Number of cycles performed by the machine

Automatic, not modifiable

Enabling/disabling of optional kit K41

Can be performed only by Fedegari personnel

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

25 / 32

November 2004


1.5.7.

DESCRIPTION

CHARACTERISTIC





INITIALIZATION

It is possible to access the menu that allows to transfer the parameters to the Process Controller by means of the main menu (this option is not available to the operator): 

press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) and then;



press the “4” to enter (INITIALIZATION);



a confirmation is requested in order to proceed with the data transfer by means of the ENTER key, then;



the flashing message INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS is displayed at the end;



the system resumes displaying the main menu.

NOTE The “INIT IALIZATION” opera tion must be performed only du ring installation. The unintentional activation of this funct ion does not compromise the functionality of the system.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

26 / 32

November 2004


2.

AL ARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1.

ALARMS

The sterilizer reports certain alarms, which are displayed with a brief description and are printed if the printer is operating correctly and the corresponding function is activated. The occurrence of an alarm is reported visually and also by activating an acoustic alarm. The alarms are defined as: 

System alarms, if they affect safety instruments or general safety conditions



Phase alarms, if they are related to the execution of specific phases



Cycle alarms, if they can occur only during a cycle in progress and are not linked to specific phases

Higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process, interrupt the cycle, with immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a safe and suspended state. Pressing the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase and to the consequent cycle end. All the alarms identify operating anomalies that can be solved spontaneously or require technical intervention. The machine described in this manual can activate the alarms listed in the following Table.

NOTE The abbrevia tions “ TE” and “ TP” that occur in the alarm message s refer to the heat probe and to the pressure transducer, respe ctively.

NOTE Some a larms require operator acknowledgment (flashing “ ACK” message ). Press t he ENTER key for at lea st 2 seconds to eliminate the “ alarm acknowledgment” message.

The meaning of the columns of the Table is as follows:

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

27 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER -

No.

-

AL ARM

-

CAUSE

-

TYPE

: type of alarm;

-

DELAY

: alarm activation delay;

-

RESULT

-

BUZ

-

PRINT ON : printout (alarm onset); PRINT OFF : printout (alarm deactivation);

-

ACK

: alarm number; : alarm message; : description of the abnormal condition detected by the controller;

: action produced by the alarm on the sterilizer; : buzzer;

: request to acknowledge the alarm.

Table 2.1 – List of alarms No.

1

2

ALA RM

CAUSE

STERIL T EXCESS

During the sterilization phase, the temperature in the chamber exceeds the maximum sterilization temperature (R3).

STERIL T L ACK

TYPE

During the sterilization phase, the temperature in the chamber drops below

DELAY

RESULT

BUZ

PRN ON

PRN OFF

Display

X

X

X

X

X

X

ACK

Phase

Display and

Phase

the minimum sterilization temperature (R1).

steril. time held

3

CHAMBER T EXCESS

The process controller detects in the chamber a temperature above the allowed limit (138°C).

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

4

CHAMBER P EXCESS

Fixed threshold of 4 bar abs is exceeded

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

TE FAULT

The process controller detects in the chamber a temperature that exceeds the measurement range of the heat probe or is receiving no signal from it.

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

TP FAULT

The process controller detects in the chamber a pressure that exceeds the measurement range of the pressure transducer or is receiving no signal from it.

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

5

6

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

28 / 32

November 2004


N

7

8

9

ALA RM

CAUSE

TYPE

DELAY

RESULT

BUZ

PRN ON

PRN OFF

GENERATOR H2O LACK

The controller receives from the minimum-level sensor the signal that indicates lack of water in the steam generator. Note: this alarm is enabled only if the steam generator is active (parameter G10 =1)

System

60

Display

X

X

X

DOOR OPEN

While a cycle is in progress, the process controller detects imperfect closure of the lid (lack of signal from inflated-gasket pressure switch).

Cycle

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

DOOR SYSTEM AL ARM

The process controller detects an operating anomaly on the inputs (limit switches and pressure switches of the door system).

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

X

X

10 P/S KEY OPERATED

Displayed and printed during the execution of a

Display and

Cycle

cycle after activating the PHASE STEP function.

ACK

Phase end

11

CYCLE STOP KEY OPERATED

Displayed and printed during the execution of a cycle after the activation of the CYCLE STOP function.

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

12

BLACKOUT DETECTED

Displayed and printed, when a cycle is restarted, following a blackout.

Cycle

Display and B.O. EMERG.

X

X

13

PRINTER ERROR

The printer is not available even though option K81=1 and G11=1.

System

Display

X

14

PANEL BATTER DRAINED

Activation battery is drained orif missing. This alarm is activated before the battery is completely drained.

System

Display

X

10

X

X

WARNING! The operator must be instructed correctly and extensively regarding the meaning and importance of the alarms that can occur on the machine. ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

29 / 32

November 2004

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 2.2.

TROUBLESHOOTING

This subsection provides information on finding and identifying the faults that can occur in the sterilizer (occurrence of alarms, generation of abnormal vibration and noise).

WARNING! Every intervention on the machine, includi ng access to electrically live parts and to the primary supply lines, must be performed by specialized personnel of the manufacturer FEDEGARI or by personn el author ized by FEDEGARI. 2.2.1.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

The following table lists the most frequent symptoms of malfunction that can occur during the use of the sterilizer. The possible causes and any corrective actions are given for each symptom.

Table 2.2.1 - Troublesho otin g Ref. No. AL ARM

1

DESCRIPTION

During the steriliza tion phase, the temperature inside the chamber exceeds the sterilization tempera ture plu s the steriliza tion tolerance. The display shows the alarm message “ STERIL T EXCESS” .

2

During t he sterilization phase, the temperature inside the chamber drops below t he sterilization temperature. The display shows the alarm message “ STERIL. T LACK” .

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) Malfunction of generator pressure switch.

a) Identify the fault.

b) Malfunction of heat probe or pressure transducer.

b) Identify the faulty element and replace it.

c) The heat probe or the

c) Calibrate the system on the

pressure sensor are not calibrated appropriately.

3

d) Identify the faulty element and replace it.

a) Incorrect operation of steam generator

a) Identify the malfunction of the steam generator.

b) Failure of heat probe or pressure transducer.


c) The heat probe or the pressure sensor are not calibrated appropriately.

c) Calibrate the system on the signal that arrives from the heat probe or from the transducer.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1


a) Malfunction of electric a) Repair or replace the valve for loading steam into electric valve. the chamber.

The display shows the alarm b) messag e “ EXCESS CHAMBER T” .

The cycle in pro gress is interrupted and immediate transition to the emerge ncy phase occurs.

signal that arrives from the heat probe or from the pressure transducer.

d) The sensor signal conversion module is not operating correctly.

d) The sensor signal conversion module is not operating correctly. The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a temperature that exceeds the allowed limit.

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

Failure to close of the b) Repair or replace the feed valve for feeding saturated valve. steam to the chamber.

30 / 32

November 2004


Ref. No. AL ARM

DESCRIPTION

The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a temperature that exceeds the measurement range of the heat probe. 5

PROBAB LE CAUSES

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

a) Malfunction of the heat a) Identify the faulty probe TE or of the module component by using the for converting the signal autodiagnosis functions, detected by the probe. repair it, or replace it.

The display shows the alarm message “ TE FAULT” . The cycle is interrupted and immediate tra nsition to the emergency phase occurs

The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a pressure that exceeds the measurement range of the pressure transducer. 6

a) Malfunction of the pressure transducer or of the module for converting the signal detected by the transducer.

a) Identify the faulty component by using the autodiagnosis functions, repair it, or replace it.

a) The water supply is unavailable. One probably cause can be, in addition to unavailability of the water supply, the presence of air bubbles in the pump intake duct. If so, remove pressure from the generator by opening the manual valve (remember to close it again after draining is complete). Once this operation is complete, the supply of deionized water can be restored.

a) Restore the demineralized water supply.

The display shows the alarm message “TP FAU LT”

The cycle is i nterrupted and immediate tra nsition to the emergency phase occ urs.

7

The controller receive s f rom the leve l sensor t he signal that indicates lack of w ater in the independent steam generator. The alarm message “ GENERATOR H2O LACK” is displayed .

b) Repair or replace the pump. c) Check the line for supplying water to the independent steam generator. d) Once the faulty component has been found, repair it or replace it. Replace the level sensor.

b) The water pump that supplies the independent steam generator is faulty. c) The supply valves are dirty or faulty. d) The level sensor is faulty.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

31 / 32

November 2004


Ref. No. AL ARM

DESCRIPTION

While a cycle is in progress, the process controller detects im perfe ct cl osure of the lid: 8

The display shows th e alarm message “ DOOR OPEN”.

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) Malfunction of the pressure switch that senses “high pressure” in the lid gasket. b) Lack of compressed air in lid gasket.

-

-

The display shows the mess age “ PRINTER ERROR” .

The sterilizer cannot be started because the main switc h trip s repea tedly.

b) Check the compressed air

a) The printer has been a) Disable the printer. enabled (K81=1, G11=1) but is not present on the sterilizer. b) Check the connections of the printer to the controller b) The printer is not powered. and to the electrical system. a) Internal short circuit.

a) Using the electrical diagram, find and eliminate the fault.

b) The electrical cabinet is

b) Close the electrical cabinet

open.

by operating its key.

c) Remove the reason why the resistors were running dry or with an insufficient water c) The thermostat that protects level. the resistors of the generator has tripped.

a) Fault in the regulating pressure switch. Af ter st artin g the c ycle, t he controll er does not receive b) Malfunction of the heating the clearance signal system of the independent indicating that the genera tor generator. is ready .

ID no. 84505 Rev. 1

a) Replace the pressure switch

supply circuit. Once the defective component has been found, repair it or replace it.

The cycle is i nterrupted and immediate tra nsitio n to the emergency phase occurs.

13

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

32 / 32

a) Replace the pressure switch.

b) Check the efficiency of the electrical resistors and of the electric circuits that supply power to them.

November 2004

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER


PROCESS CONTROLLER

Soft ware vers io n: FC02B / FD02B

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

1 / 33

Luglio 2005



USE ..............................................................................................................................4

1.1.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 4

1.2.

SOFTWARE STRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 5

1.3.

ACCESS LEVELS................................................................................................................................ 8

1.4.

OPERATING PHASES ...................................................................................................................... 10

1.4.1.

INITIAL CHECKS....................................................................................................................... 11

1.4.2.

POWER-ON............................................................................................................................... 12

1.4.2.1.

LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES ........................................................................... 12

1.4.3.

OPERATION ENABLING........................................................................................................... 12

1.4.4.

PRODUCT LOADING ................................................................................................................ 13

1.4.4.1. 1.4.5.

LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC .......................................................................................... 13 PARAMETER SETTING............................................................................................................ 14

1.4.5.1.

PROGRAM PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM ..................................................... 14

1.4.5.2.

GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM....................................................... 16

1.4.6.

PROGRAM START.................................................................................................................... 17

1.4.6.1.

AUXILIARY MESSAGES....................................................................................................... 18

1.4.6.2.

PROCESS CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 19

1.4.6.3.

“PHASE STEP” AND “CYCLE STOP” FUNCTIONS............................................................. 19

1.4.6.4.

ALARM MESSAGES............................................................................................................. 20

1.4.6.5.

EMERGENCY PHASE .......................................................................................................... 21

1.4.6.6.

END OF PROCESS .............................................................................................................. 21

1.4.7.

PRODUCT UNLOADING........................................................................................................... 22

1.4.8.

DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF........................................................................................... 22

1.5.

AUXIL IARY FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................. 22

1.5.1.

PRINTING FUNCTION .............................................................................................................. 22

1.5.2.

CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME .......................................................................................... 23

1.5.3.

CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL.......................................... 23

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

2 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.5.4.

AUTODIAGNOSIS ..................................................................................................................... 24

1.5.5.

ALARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT........................................................................................... 24

1.5.6.

AUTOCLAVE DATA................................................................................................................... 25

1.5.7.

INITIALIZATION......................................................................................................................... 26

2.

AL ARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................27

2.1.

AL ARMS ............................................................................................................................................ 27

2.2.

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 30

2.2.1.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................................................................... 30

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

3 / 33

Luglio 2005


1.

1.1.

USE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

All the main functions of the sterilizer are managed by a process controller, which is composed of an integrated PLC and control panel, managed by resident software structured into menus and submenus, which can be accessed only by entering appropriate passwords. The permitted access levels allow to access the menus of the software according to a preset hierarchy. The operator interacts with the machine by means of the control panel and manages the sterilization process according to nine preset programs, which can be customized according to specific parameters. The set of main activities that contribute to the treatment of the processed materials for their sterilization is termed sterilization process, or more commonly sterilization cycle or just cycle. On the sterilizer, the execution of a cycle consists in the development of a specific program on the process controller. The process controller, by means of its own operating system and of the program mentioned above, coordinates a series of actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids at the various temperatures and pressures. This provides the most correct and appropriate transfer of heat energy to the load according to the physical characteristics of the load itself. The following main activities are distinguished in the sterilization process: -

Autoclave preparation;

-

Load sterilization;

-

Cycle end.

Each one of these main activities is composed of further operating processes, which are termed simply phases. Depending on the programs selected from the menu by the operator, these phases vary in terms of the physical parameters that characterize the liquids/fluids involved in the process. The main activities listed above typically comprise the following operating steps:





Au to cl ave pr eparat io n 

Power-on and initial checks.



Enabling for operation.



Product loading.

Load sterilization Parameter setting.  



Program start.

Cycle end 

Product unloading.



Deactivation or power-off.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

4 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER For a full discussion of the individual phases, please refer to the OPERATING PHASES subsection.

CAUTION Most workplace accidents are caused by failure to comply with the most basic safety rules. An yone worki ng on th e machi ne mu st kn ow perfectl y, and ob ser ve sc ru pu lo us ly, th e safety rules given in this doc ument.

WARNING! The operator must be able to work so that the controls can be reached easily and in the ergonomically most appropriate position. Always keep the work area clear of auxiliary equipment that is not related to the sterilizer management operations. Before startup, move all unauthorize d ind ividuals away fro m th e machine.

1.2.

SOFTWARE STRUCTURE

The software that resides in the process controller is composed of two fundamental parts: •

PLC SOFTWARE

•

PANEL SOFTWARE

The PLC SOFTWARE supervises all the actions aimed at the components and elements that control the fluids. In particular, it allows management of: 

Machine preparation (Program start).



Cycle (Heating, sterilization, cooling, drying, atmospheric pressure balancing, cycle end, emergency, and blackout emergency phases).



Autodiagnosis (Reading of digital inputs, reading and forcing of digital outputs, sensing and calibration of temperature and pressure).



Safe opening and closure of the door (lid).



Enabling of steam generator.



Alarm activation. 

Display of system status messages.



NOTE

Ac cess t o the PLC s of tw are is n ot allow ed.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

5 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER The PANEL SOFTWARE is organized into menus and submenus according to the following structure: MAIN MENU 1

PROGRAM START Select program number: 1-9 Press numeric key

2

CHANGE PARA METERS 1.

2.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

PROGRAM PARAMETERS R1. R2.

Enable prevacuum Vacuum pressure

R3.

Timed vacuum duration

R4.

Minimum sterilization temperature

R5.

Sterilization temperature

R6.


R7.

Sterilization duration

R8.

Delay time for heating end – sterilization start

R9.

Temperature for closure of chamber discharge electric valve

R10.

Enable spontaneous cooling

R11.

Spontaneous cooling temperature

R12.

Enable cooling with injection of compressed air

R13.

Cooling temperature with injection of compressed air

R14.

Enable drying with injection of compressed air

R15.

Duration of drying with injection of compressed air

R16.

Timing for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge

R17.

Closure time for modulated electric valve for chamber discharge

GENERAL PARAMETERS G1.

Maximum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing

G2.

Minimum pressure for chamber atmospheric balancing

G3.

Upper pressure range tolerance for steam injection control

G4.

Lower pressure range tolerance for steam injection control

G5.

Timing for control of electric valve for steam injection

G6.

Closure time for control of electric valve for steam injection

G7.

Cycle end time

G8.

Enable control of final temperature for door opening

G9.

Controlled final temperature

G10.

Enable steam generator

G11.

Enable printer

G12.

Printer timing

G13.

Enable automatic cycle start

G14.

Enable cycle repetition 6 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 3.

3

4

FACTORY-SET PARAMETERS 1.

Autoclave serial number

2.

Enable option KG41, enhanced compressor

3.

Enable option KG64, condensate recovery tray

4.

Enable option KG65, vacuum pump

5.

Enable option KG81, printer

I/O AUTODIAGNOSIS 1. DIGITAL INPUTS 2.

DIGITAL OUTPUTS

3.

ANALOG INPUTS

4.

HEAT PROBE CALIBRATION

5.

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 1.

2.

3.

4.

PASSWORD MANAGEMENT 1.

Password selection

2.

Password logout

3.

Change password

ALARM MANAGEMENT 1.

Display alarm list

2.

Print list

3.

Delete list

AUTOCLAVE DATA 1.

Serial number

2.


3.


4.

Number of cycles

5.

System options

LANGUAGE SELECTION 1.

Italian

2.

English

3. 4.

German French

5.

Dutch

5. INITIALIZATION 1.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

Download of parameters from panel to PLC

7 / 33

Luglio 2005




NOTE

Operator access to panel softw are is allowed only fo r specific access l evels, whic h are e nable d by enterin g appropr iate password s. Please refer to the ACCE SS LEVELS subs ection .

1.3.

ACCESS LEVELS

In order to protect the system and ensure a hierarchy based on reasonably determined skills, access is allowed only according to different authorization levels by first entering a code, known as password. The machine allows access according to 5 levels (from 1 to 5). From each level, it is possible to access the other levels by entering the specific password. Of the 5 access levels, the first two (1 and 2), termed “FEDEGARI DEVELOPER” and “FEDEGARI PERSONNEL” respectively, are reserved for Fedegari technicians. The other levels (3, 4 and 5), termed “USER SUPERVISOR” , “USER OPERATOR” and “STAND-BY”, respectively, are reserved to the personnel assigned to the sterilizer. The following Table describes the association between each level and its operating functions. Table 1.3 – Levels of access to operating functions ACCESS LEVEL S −

1

FEDEGARI DEVELOPER

− − − − − − − − −

2

FEDEGARI PERSONNEL

− −

Note: 10 minutes after the password has been entered, the system automatically resets itself and returns to the STAND-BY mode

− − − − −

3

USER SUPERVISOR

− −

Note:

−

In the INS function, it is not possible to change the factory-set parameters

− − −

4

OPERATING FUNCTIONS Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Direct access to menu pages (PGS) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Configuration mode (CFG) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK ) Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK ) Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Date and time correction (TIM) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK )

USER OPERATOR

Note: In the INS function, it is not possible to change the general parameters and the factory-set parameters

− − − − −

It is not possible to delete the list of alarms displayed by means of the EVT function.

−

Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Access to alarm event list (EVT) Input of alphanumeric values in the edit fields (INS) Access to direct printout of displayed data page (PRN) Alarm acknowledgment (ACK )

It is not possible to calibrate the analog inputs or to force the digital outputs by means of the autodiagnosis function. ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

8 / 33

Luglio 2005


ACCESS LEVEL S

OPERATING FUNCTIONS

It is not possible to perform the SYSTEM INITIALIZATION operation −

5

STAND-BY

− −

PSW:

Password input (PSW) Access to system information (SYS) Access to alarm event list (EVT)

Password input (4 digits): -

This function allows to access the system functions that are available for the specific access level. If an incorrect password is entered, the panel responds by flashing the asterisks and automatically sets the lowest access level (5, Stand-by).

SYS: System information:

TIM:

-

For setting the contrast of the display.

-

For testing the LEDs of the panel.

-

For displaying the protocol used to communicate with the PLC.

-

To display the charge status of the battery of the panel.

-

To display the status of communication with the PLC.

-

To display the status of the connection to the printer.

Panel date/time: -

PGS:

Direct access to pages: -

EVT:

This function allows to enter alphanumeric values in the edit fields. The INS function is activated by pressing the “0” key on the operator panel.

Print screen function: -

ACK :

This function allows to load the software into the panel.

Insert mode: -

PRN:

This function allows to display and print the history list of the last 256 alarm events that have occurred.

Configuration mode: -

INS:

This function allows to access directly the pages of the program by entering the page number.

List of alarm events: -

CFG:

This function allows to correct the date and time of the panel.

This function allows to produce a printout of the data present in the displayed page. The function is performed by pressing the “9” key on the operator panel.

Acknowledgment function: -

This function allows to acknowledge the alarms that require an acknowledgment.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

9 / 33

Luglio 2005


NOTE The sterilizer is suppli ed with t he following default pa ssword alrea dy set: Level 3 User Superviso r

2222

 This password enables machine management and parameter changing.

The User Supervisor can also enable the lower levels: Level 4 User Operator

1111

 This password enables machine operation. Level 5 Stand-b y

0000

 This password sets the machine to Stand-by mode.

NOTE For security reasons, the user must always disable his password (by entering the STAND-BY password, which i s 0000) when he stops us ing the machine and in any case be fore switch ing it off. The following i s an equivalent opera tion: 

Press th e “ 4” key to enter (SPE CIAL FUN CTIONS) , then






Press the “ 2” key to select (PASSW ORD LOGOUT), which places th e syst em in STAND- BY.

1.4.

OPERATING PHASES

Management of the generic sterilization process by the operator is organized according to the following main phases: 

Initial checks.



Power-on.



Operation enabling.



Product loading. o



Lid opening/closing logic.

Parameter setting.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

10 / 33

Luglio 2005




o

Program parameters and changes to them.

o

General parameters and changes to them.

Program start and run. o

Auxiliary messages.

o

Process control.

o

Phase Step and Cycle Stop functions.

o

Alarm messages.

o

Emergency phase.

o

End of process.



Product unloading.



Power-off.

Sequential execution of the operating phases listed above leads to complete processing of the product.

1.4.1.

INITIAL CHECKS

Lighting of work area Check that the work area in the regions where operations are performed is adequately lit (with natural light If possible), so as to allow immediate identification of the control and monitoring devices of the machine.

Checking connections and initial conditions of the machine Check that the machine is connected to the electric power supply line. Check the connection of the water circuit of the machine to the supply tank. Check the level of the demineralized water inside the tank. Check the connection of the minimum-level sensor for the water in the tank. Check that the discharge of the machine is correctly connected to a conveyance system that is suitable to work at temperatures close to 100 °C. Check that the manual chamber pressure venting valve is closed.

NOTE The amount of water contained in t he tank must be at lea st equal to 10 lite rs i n order t o ensure complete exe cution of t he steriliza tion cycle.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

11 / 33

Luglio 2005


1.4.2.

POWER-ON

Power supply check Check that the main switch is engaged (in the “I” position). If it is on “O”, power the machine by moving the lever of the switch to the “I” position. Command activation and acquisition After operating the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, the display of the operator panel shows, for a few seconds, a video message in English, which specifies the version of the panel firmware and then shows the main menu, with the list of selectable operating options.

1.4.2.1.

LOGIC FOR ACCESSING MENU PAGES

The options provided in the main menu are selected by pressing on the keypad the key that corresponds to the number shown next to the option. The main menu is displayed automatically after the controller has been powered. Access to the other pages is allowed: 

By entering the number that corresponds to the selected option from the main menu or from another menu.

To return to the preceding menu: 

1.4.3.

Operate the CLEAR key.

OPERATION ENAB LING

Enabling the operation of the machine requires the operator to enter a password.

From the main menu: 

Press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then



Press the “1” key to select the (PASSWORD MANAGEMENT) menu, then



Press the “1” key to select (PASSWORD SELECTION), which allows to enter the PASSWORD.

NOTE For further information on password management, please refer to the ACCESS LEVELS subsection.

NOTE For secrecy reasons, the panel does not echo on the monitor the numeric characters entered. Ac co rd in gly, t he passwo rd is no t s ho wn on th e disp lay.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

12 / 33

Luglio 2005


NOTE If the “ 0000” password or anothe r unrecognized password is entered in the PSW functio n, the system configures itself automatically at the STAND-BY level. To return to the operating conditi ons of t he machine it is necessary to enter a va lid password.

1.4.4.

PRODUCT LOADING

1. 2.

Extract the heat probe(s) from the sterilization chamber; Insert in the sterilization chamber the baskets that contain the product to be processed;

3.

Place the flexible heat probe in the upper basket so that the metallic tips are in contact with the product.

WARNING! Removing bottles in which the internal temperature is still high (above 70°C) may entail their explosion, with s evere risks fo r the integrity of n earby operators. Ac co rd in gly, to st erili ze so lu ti on s co nt ained in hermetic ally cl osed co nt ainers, select only sterilization processes t hat have a n appropriate final l oad cooling phase a nd a c ounterpressure with sterile air, ensuring safety durin g load extra ction. The safety tempera ture above which the lid cannot be opened must be set to a value < 70 °C and general parameter G8 must be activated by setting the value 1.

WARNING! Use containe rs of uniform size to sterilize thermolabile products.

WARNING! If the product is composed of containers having different dimensions, place the heat probe in the largest co ntainer .

WARNING! Make sure that the cable(s) of the heat probe(s) is(are) inserted in the chamber before closing the lid .

1.4.4.1.

LID OPENING/CLOSING LOGIC

Opening system Starting the autoclave opening maneuver requires the following conditions to be met: −

−

−

No process cycle is in progress; The pressure transducer connected to the autoclave control system and the electromechanical pressure switch must both indicate that the pressure inside the chamber has returned equal to the atmospheric pressure; The heat probe arranged in the chamber detects a temperature that is lower than the preset safety temperature: this occurs only if general parameter G8 is set.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

13 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER Once the clearances indicated above have been received, a clearance provided by the operator discharges the compressed air from the gasket seat. The lighting of the LED located proximate to the “7” key on the operator panel, which indicates that the lid is open, indicates that it is possible to turn the lid to extract the load.

Closure system The lid is turned manually from the open position to the closed position while keeping pressed the safety lever that releases it. When the lid has reached the position provided for closure, it releases the lid engagement lever and simultaneously prevents the lid from rotating and presses the safety limit switch. The limit switch changes state and authorizes the system to send the command to the electric valves that allow to introduce compressed air in the gasket seat of the sealing system. Once the clearance has been obtained from the limit switch and therefore the correct position of the lid is ensured, an operator command introduces compressed air in the gasket seat, starting the complete closure of the chamber and the locking of the lid. Closure of the chamber is reported by the lighting of the LED located next to the “8” key. If imperfect closure of the lid is detected while a cycle is in progress, a specific alarm message is issued and the cycle is consequently interrupted, passing to the emergency phase.

1.4.5.

PARA METER SETTING

Each program is constituted by a sequence of elementary modules termed phases. The development of the program generally consists in arranging in sequence the execution of these phases. The phases control the components of the sterilizer in order to obtain, in the sterilization chamber, pressures and temperatures that follow preset functions. The programs are supplied with a predefined structure of phases arranged in sequences that the operator can enable by means of appropriate program parameters. In addition to the program parameters, there is a series of general parameters that control activities and functions that are common to all programs. These parameters cannot be set by the operator.

1.4.5.1.

PROGRAM PARA METERS AND CHANGES TO THEM

For each program it is possible to customize the phases or change certain parameters that characterize the activity of a phase so as to allow to choose the required operating configuration. This is done by setting appropriately provided parameters known as program parameters (R1, R2,....R14). The program parameters and program names are available for display and modification by accessing the Change Parameter, Program Parameter menu from the main menu. The program parameters are listed in the table below. The meaning of the fields of the table is as follows: − − − − − −

No : parameter identification number; DESCRIPTION : description of the activities regulated by the parameter; FUNCTION : name of the parameter; MIN : minimum value that the parameter can assume; DEF : default value of the parameter for every program; MAX : maximum value that the parameter can assume.

The units of measure of the parameters are degrees Celsius (°C), minutes (min.) and bars (bar).

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

14 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER Table 1.4.5.1. – List of program parameters PROGRAMS 1 ÷ 9 No

R1

STRING

FUNCTION

Allows to activate/deactivate PREVACUUM0/1 the prevacuum phase. Pressure target of the prevacuum phase.

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

0

0

0.3

2

R2

P vacuum

bar

R3

t vacuum

min Duration 2 phase. of the timed vacuum

R4

MIN.ST. T

R5

STERIL. T

0.3

0

1

0

0.3 .30

0.3

0.3 .3 0

2

2

2

2

0

2

0

MIN

MAX

1

0

1

0.3

0.3

0. 20

1.10

2

2

0

99

This is the temperature value that, when added to 0.2°C, constitutes the phase end target of the heating phase. This is also the minimum temperature allowed in the °C sterilization phase. When the 120 120 120 120 120 134 134 134 134 105 temperature in the chamber drops below this value, the display shows the “STERIL T LACK” alarm and the sterilization phase time is suspended. This is the typical temperature °C reached in the chamber during 121 121 121 121 121 135 135 135 135 105

134

135

the sterilization phase. When the temperature in the chamber during sterilization °C reaches this value, the display 122 122 122 122 122 136 136 136 136 105 shows the “EXCESS STERIL The” alarm.

136

R6

MAX. ST. T

R7

STER IL t

min Durationof sterilizationphase .

ST delayt

Duration for which the temperature in the chamber must stay above the min 2 temperature of R1+0.2°C before passing from heating to the sterilization phase.

R8

10

10

20

20

20

10

10

15

20

0

9999

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

0

9

0

136

0

1

50

140

This is the temperature set for automatic closure of the °C chamber discharge valve 100 100 100 100 110 120 120 120 120 during the heating phase

R9

T closesE6

R10

SPONT. COOLING.

Allows to activate/deactivate 0/1 the spontaneous cooling phase.

R11

T - SPONT.

°C Temperature target of the 110 110 110 110 120 110 110 120 120 spontane ous cooli ng phase.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

0

15 / 33

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

Luglio 2005


No

STRING

FUNCTION

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

R12

AIR COOLING

Allows to ctivatethe 0/1 activate/dea 0 phase of cooling with injection of compressed air.

0

0

R13

T - AIR

°C Temperature target of the70 air cooling phase.

70

70

R14

DRYING.

Allows to 0/1 activate/dea ctivatethe drying phase.

0

0

0

0

0

R15

DRYINGt

min Time target of the drying10 phase

10

10

10

15

R16

TIMINGt E7

Sum of the opening and sec closing time of the electric 10 valve for discharge modulation.

10

10

10

10

R17

Closure time of electric TIMING t E7 sec valve for discharge 9 OFF modulation.

9

9

9

1.4.5.2.

0

0

70

0

0

0

MAX

0

0

70

70 50

0

0

0

10

10

10

10

1

99

10

10

10

10

1

99

9

9

0

99

70

9

MIN

70 70

9

9

0

0

1

140

1

GENERAL PARAMETERS AND CHANGES TO THEM

During the execution of the sterilization program, the operation of the machine is regulated not only by the program parameters but also by a series of general parameters, which control activities and functionalities that are common to every sterilization process. The table below lists the general parameters and includes a brief description of their function. The meaning of the fields of this table is as follows: −

No:

−

DESCRIPTION:

name of the parameter

−

FUNCTION:

description of the activities regulated by the parameter

−

MIN:

−

DEF:

−

MAX:

parameter identification number

minimum value that the parameter can assume default value of the parameter maximum value that the parameter can assume Table 1.4.5.2 – General p arameters

No.

DESCRIPTION

G1

MAX.ATM P

G2

MIN.ATMP

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

FUNCTION

MIN

DEF

MAX

This is the maximum value that the pressure in the chamber can bar assume during atmospheric balancing and cycle end phases 0.50in order 1.05 1.10 to enable lid opening. bar

Does not allow to open the door of the sterilization chamber is in 0.50 0.95 1.00 vacuum if the pressure is lower than G2

16 / 33

Luglio 2005


No.

DESCRIPTION

G3

dP +TOL.E8

G4

dP-TOL.E8

FUNCTION

MIN

DEF

MAX

During heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the chamber is regulated according to the value of this parameter and of bar 0.00 0 .03 0.10 program parameter R5, from which the regulation pressure is obtained. During the heating and load sterilization phases, the pressure in the chamber is regulated according to the value of this parameter and of bar 0.02 0 .03 0.10 program parameter R5, from which the regulation pressure is obtained.

G5 G6

TIMING t E8

sec

The sum of the opening and closure time of the electric valve for 3 7 modulating steam injection.

TIMING t E8 OFF sec Theclosuretime of theelectric valvefor m odulating steam injection.

999

0

5

999

0

10

999

G7

CYCLEEND t

sec Indicat es the duration,in seconds,of the cycleendphase .

G8

T CONTR OL

0/1

G9

OPENING T

This is the temperature (sensed by heat probe T001) above which lid °C opening is not allowed. This check is active only if parameter 0 G8 is 70set to 1.

G10

STEAMGEN. D6

G11

PRINTER

G12

PRINTTIMING

sec

This parameter allows to set the printing rate of the cycle data during the execution of a sterilization program. It is active only if the printer is 5 30 9999 present in the machine and the G11 parameter is set to 1. The printing interval is a function of the phase time.

G13

AUTOMSTART

0/1

This parameter can assume only the values 0 and 1; if it is 1, it 0 0 enables the Automatic Cycle Start function.

1

G14

REPEATCYCLE

0/1

This parameter can assume only the values 0 and 1; if it is 1, it 0 0 enables a single repetition of the cycle.

1

1.4.6.

PROGRAM START

0/1

This value is to be set to 1 in order to activate control of parameter G9 0 0 on the heat probe.

This parameter can only assume the values 0 and 1; if it is 0, it 0 0 disables the operation of the internal steam generator of the machine.

This parameter enables printing of the data of the cycle during the 0/1 execution of the sterilization program. The value 1 is set 0only if 0the printer is installed on the machine.

1

95

1

1

The machine is provided with 9 customizable programs constituted by the same sequence of phases, to be used for sterilization of the product. These 9 programs are contained in the PROGRAM START menu, which can be selected under the MAIN MENU by means of the “1” key. The sterilizer enters the initial preparation phase, during which it performs certain checks automatically. During this phase, the program performs no actuation o the elements or components of the sterilizer. The actual start of the sterilization cycle is achieved by acting on the START key.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

17 / 33

Luglio 2005


NOTE Al l th e pr ograms are su pp li ed wit h th e default val ue of each parameter, wh ic h is ass umed by the system if the opera tor does not change it.

WARNING! if t he machine is provided wi th a “ condensate re covery tank” (K64), when the program is selected, a message is displayed which requests confirmation that the tank has been emptied. Before continuing, the program checks the logic of the lid system, ensuring that the actions performed by the operator are compatible with the safety conditions in the chamber. During execution, the program can no longer be stopped (until the sterilization process ends), except by: 

a manual cycle stop command, by pressing the “5” key, which leads to the emergency phase;



the occurrence of an alarm (caused by a malfunction during the sterilization process) which leads to the emergency phase;



an interruption caused by a blackout, which brings the sterilizer to a phase termed “blackout emergency”, which is characterized by a suspended state that ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.

Exit from the emergency states, passing directly to the final phases of the cycle (pressure balancing and cycle end), is possible by acting on the “2” key.

NOTE It is the operator’s task to prepare sterilization programs that are compatible with the components installed on the machine and are suitable for the load to be processed. The software on the sterilizer does not allow the user to select phases and programs or functions that are not allowed by the P&ID configuration of the machine. 1.4.6.1.

AUXIL IARY MESSAGES

Auxiliary messages are short text strings shown on the display in specific screens, which report to the operator the status of the machine, of the doors and the outcome of the sterilization/test. The following table lists the auxiliary messages and the screens in which they can be displayed: Table 1.4.6.1 – Auxi liary messages AUXILIARY MESSAGES displayed in sc reens: Main menu

Prepara tio n

DOOR OPEN ! OK DOOR OPENING

READY TO START DOOR OPEN ! OK DOOR OPENING GENERATOR NOT READY AUTOMATIC START REPEAT IN PROGRESS (RP)

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

18 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.4.6.2.

PROCESS CONTROL

Once the cycle has started, the data related to the sterilization process in progress are shown on the display. The display includes and provides to the operator information according to two main classes. The first class is termed control parameters and provides useful information (characteristic data for identifying the program and its phase in progress), preset threshold values (pressure, temperature, time) and, for these last values, the extent of the values acquired and processed in real time in the sterilization chamber. The second class relates to information termed alarm messagesand auxiliary messages.

Control data The process page, during each phase, provides the operator with the following data: −

The number of the program being executed, preceded by the letter “P”;

−

The name of the phase in progress;

−

The preset threshold value (pressure, temperature or time) that is the target value of the phase in progress and starts the next phase, preceded by the flashing “=>” indicator;

−

The temperature (in degrees) detected in the sterilization chamber by the heat probe “TE”;

−

The pressure (in bar) measured by the pressure transducer “TP”;

−

The phase time “t”;

−

The sterilization time “ts”.

If the printer is present and enabled for printing, the process information listed above is shown on the display and also printed at each phase start. Then, with the printing rate set in the general parameters, the process information is printed, without including the program number, the name of the phase, and the phase target. 1.4.6.3.

“ PHASE STEP” AND “ CYCLE STOP” FUNCTIONS

During the execution of the sterilization program, until the process is ended, normal operating interaction is disabled. It is in any case possible to intervene on the process in progress by activating specific functions (PHASE STEP and STOP-CYCLE) described below.

PHASE STEP function This function is activated by pressing the “4” key. This function allows to force the transition to the next operating step, blocking the commands and actuations related to the operating phase in progress, without waiting to reach the set end-of-phase value with display and printout of the “P/S KEY OPERATED” alarm.

CYCLE STOP function This function is activated by pressing the “5” key. This allows to pass to the emergency phase with display and printout of the “CYCLE STOP KEY OPERATED” alarm. WARNING! Using the “ 5” k ey is highly dangerous for the load in the case of containe rs that are not clos ed hermetically but are protected by filters: the pressure differential would cause the liquids to boil. Ac co rd in gly, pr ess th e “ 5” key after ch eck in g th at th e press ur e in th e ch amber has reached atmospheric pressure values spontaneously and that the product temperature is lower than 70°C. ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

19 / 33

Luglio 2005


The PHASE STEP and CYCLE STOP functions are active in all phases, except for the ones listed in the following table. Table 1.4.6.3 - Phase Step and Cycle Stop clearances PHASE

PROG.

PHASE STEP

CYCLE STOP

Preparation

all

no

No

Atmospheric pressure balancing

all

yes (*)

No

Cycle end

all

no

No

Emergency

all

no

No

Blackout emergency

all

no

No

Cooling

1-9

no

yes

(*)

It is necessary to press the “4” key to allow the forced exit of the cycle, after pressing the “5” key in the EMERGENCY phase, if the machine is unable to perform atmospheric pressure balancing.

1.4.6.4.

AL ARM MESSAGES

The sterilizer provides various alarms, which are shown on the display with a brief description and are printed in real time if the printout option is enabled by means of the general parameters (G11). The occurrence of an alarm is reported not only visually but also by activating an acoustic signal, which can be muted by pressing the ENTER key. If acknowledgment of the alarm in progress (ACK) is required, the operator must keep the ENTER key pressed for a few seconds. The alarms are termed system alarms when they involve or general safety conditions or instruments or phase alarms if they are linked to the execution of specific phases. The higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process, interrupt the cycle, causing immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a safe and suspended state. In this EMERGENCY phase, the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the pressure balancing phase and to the consequent cycle end. The following table lists the alarm messages and the associated management. Table 1.4.6.4 – Alarm messages AL ARM DESCRIPTION

LOG

ACK

PRN ON

PRN OFF

X

X X

1.

Excessive sterilization temperature

X

2. 3.

Insufficient sterilization temperature Excessive temperature in chamber

X X

X

X X

4.

Excessive pressure in chamber

X

X

X

5.

Temperature transducer malfunction

X

X

X

6.

Pressure transducer malfunction

X

X

X

7.

Lack of water in generator

X

8.

Door open alarm

X

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

20 / 33

X X

X

X Luglio 2005


AL ARM DESCRIPTION 9.

LOG

ACK

PRN ON

X

X

X

Door system alarm

10. Phase step button operated

X

X

11. Cycle stop button operated

X

X

12. Blackout detected

X

X

13. Printer error

X

14. Panel battery drained

X

LOG:

Logs the alarm in the history list

ACK :

Requires acknowledgment of the alarm by the operator

PRN ON:

Prints the alarm when it is activated

PRN OFF:

Prints the alarm when it is deactivated

PRN OFF

X X

WARNING! The operator must be instructed correctly and extensively regarding the meaning and important of the ala rms t hat can occur on the machine.

1.4.6.5.

EMERGENCY PHASE

The emergency phase occurs in the sterilizer when the following events occur: 

A malfunction during the sterilization process;



A restart of the machine after an interruption caused by a blackout;



An activation of the manual CYCLE STOP command.

Activation of the emergency phase closes all the valves and stops all the motors, setting the autoclave in standby mode. This suspended state ensures the safety of the autoclave, of the personnel and of the load.

WARNING! Ac ti vatio n of th e STOP key in th e Emergency ph ase all ow s to mo ve on to th e atmos pheric pressure balancing and cycle end phases. Before moving on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase, check that the pressure and temperature conditions allow the maneuver without causing damage to the load. In particular, if the load is constituted by liquids, it must be allowed to cool before pressing the STOP key.

1.4.6.6.

END OF PROCESS

Once the program has reached the last defined phase (CYCLE END), the acoustic warning is activated, and the LED arranged to the side of the STOP key starts flashing. After a preset time (phase end target) has elapsed, or by activating the STOP key, the sterilization program ends, the display shows the MAIN MENU, and if the printer is present and enabled, the final cycle data are printed .

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

21 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER 1.4.7.

PRODUCT UNLOADING

1.

Open the lid as follows:

1.4.8.



Press the “7” key on the keypad, producing the automatic discharge of the air from the sealing gasket seat;



Check that the LED associated with the “7” key lights up;



Press the lever, which disengages the lid from the mechanical locking system;



Turn the lid horizontally until it reaches the fully open position;



Transfer the load from the chamber, removing the flexible heat probe;



Place the heat probe inside the empty sterilization chamber.

DEACTIVATION OR POWER-OFF

The sterilizer can be stopped and switched off only by turning the main switch. Halting and power-off is achieved by returning the main switch, located on the front panel of the machine, to the “O” position.

NOTE Before deactiv ating t he machin e, remember to enter the STAND- BY passw ord (000 0). An equiv alent o perati on is : 

Press th e “ 4” key to enter (SPE CIAL FUN CTIONS), then






Press the “ 2” to s elect (PAS SWORD LOGOUT), whic h places t he syst em in STANDBY.

1.5.

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

Some functions of the sterilizer are active even when a normal sterilization cycle is not being performed. These functions are typically dedicated to printing the parameters related to the sterilization cycle and to changing certain general parameters, such as the date and time, or to checking that the operator panel is functional. Not all auxiliary functions are freely usable by the operator. The key information is provided below for each of these functions. 1.5.1.

PRINTING FUNCTION

The printer with which the machine is equipped allows to print the data of the cycle. The enabling of data printing and the printing rate are preset in the general parameter page. The following information is included in the print report, in the following order: 1.

HEADING −

FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI

−

DATE AND TIME of program start

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

22 / 33

Luglio 2005


−

SERIAL NUMBER of the autoclave

−

Space for notes

2.

PROGRAM NUMBER AND LIST OF PROGRAM PARAMETERS

3.

CYCLE DATA These data correspond to the data shown on the display and are printed at a preset rate (calculated on the phase time).

4.

5.

ALARM REPORTS: −

DATE and TIME of alarm recording

−

STATE OF ALARM detected (ON, OFF)

−

ALARM NAME

FINAL DATA −

CYCLE NUMBER (progressive cycle number)

−

CYCLE DURATION (total cycle time)

−

STERILIZATION TIME (time of exposure to correct temperatures during the sterilization phase)

−

DATE AND TIME (program end time)

−

SIGNATURE (Space for signature of operator and supervisor)

When no cycles are running, the page shown on the display can be printed by pressing the “9” key. 1.5.2.

CHANGING THE DATE AND TIME

(This option is available to the operator only at the User Supervisor level). The operator panel is provided with an internal clock, which runs constantly and is powered by a battery that keeps the date and time up-to-date even when no mains power is available. It is in any case possible, if necessary, to set or change the current date and time:

1.5.3.



From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds; the display shows the panel function menu;



Select the TIM parameter by using the R and L keys;



Press ENTER to confirm the selection; the monitor shows the fields that contain the system date and time;



Enter the chosen numeric value in the highlighted field by using the keypad;



Press ENTER to move to the next field and then repeat the above operation if necessary;



Press CLEAR to return to the main menu.

CHECKING THE FUNCTIONALITY OF THE OPERATOR PANEL

The machine is equipped with a software tool that allows to perform an online check of the functionality of the Operator Panel. ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

23 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER This check allows to verify the operation of the battery of the operator panel, of the LEDs, the status of the communication of the panel with the PLC and with the printer (if installed); this check also allows to adjust the brightness of the display. To check the operator panel: −

−

−

From the main menu, press ENTER for at least two seconds: the panel function menu is shown on the display; Operate the R and L keys until the “SYS” function is highlighted; Press ENTER to confirm the option selected on the monitor: the autodiagnosis page of the panel is displayed;

−

Operate the U and D to select the various options;

−

Select the “DISPLAY” line; to change the brightness of the display, press the R and L keys;

−

After highlighting the line related to the battery, check the operating status of the battery;

−

−

−

1.5.4.

After highlighting the “PLC” line, check the status of the connection of the panel to the PLC by means of the corresponding message; After highlighting the “PRINTER” line, check the status of the connection of the printer to the panel by means of the corresponding message; Press CLEAR to return to the main menu.

AUTODIAGNOSIS

(This option is available to the operator only in display mode). The process controller is provided with a diagnostic tool, termed “AUTODIAGNOSIS”, which allows to check: −

The values of the parameters related to the digital input/output channels;

−

The analog inputs of the system.

The autodiagnosis function can be accessed by means of the main menu: 

press the “3” key to enter (AUTODIAGNOSIS) and then;



press the “1” key to select (DIGITAL INPUTS);



press the “2” key to select (DIGITAL OUTPUTS);



press the “3” key to select (ANALOG INPUTS);



press the “4” key to select (TEMPERATURE PROBE CALIBRATION);



press the “5” key to select (PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION).

1.5.5.

AL ARM HISTORY MANAGEMENT

The alarm history can be accessed by means of the main menu: 

press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS), then;



press the “2” key to select the (ALARM MANAGEMENT) menu, then;



press the “1” key to select (DISPLAY LIST);



press the “2” key to select (PRINT LIST);



press the “3” key to select (DELETE LIST) – function not allowed to the operator.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

24 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER As an alternative, it is possible to access the alarm history by activating the “EVT” function from the panel function menu. This allows to display a specific page in which a keypad command can display in each instance the other previously occurred alarms, starting from the last detected alarm. The page lists, for each alarm that has occurred: −

The progressive number;

−

The “STATUS” transition type that has been affected by the detected condition: *

“ON” = alarm onset;

*

“OFF” = deactivation;

*

“ACK” = acknowledgment.

−

The description of the alarm condition that has occurred;

−

The date and time when the alarm occurred.

To display the “alarm list” page on the monitor, proceed as follows: −

Access the main menu;

−

Press ENTER (for at least two seconds): the panel function menu is displayed;

−

Select the “EVT” function by acting on the R and L keys;

−

Press the ENTER key to confirm the selected option. This displays the most recent alarm;

−

Operate the U key to display the other logged alarms.

NOTE By pressing t he “ 9” key, a ll the detecte d alarms a re printed, sta rting fro m the first di splayed alarm up to the most recent alarms. Access to the alarm list page is not allowed if no alarms have bee n lo gged in the memory area.

NOTE The maximum number of alarms that can be logged in the history is 256; if this limit is exceede d, the excess mess ages replace the oldest on es.

1.5.6.

AUTOCLAVE DATA

By pressing the “4” key from the Main Menu and then the “3” key from the Special Functions menu, the “AUTOCLAVE DATA” option is selected, giving access to the page that lists the general data of the sterilizer: Table 1.5.6. – Autoclave data DESCRIPTION

CHARACTERISTIC

Serial number

Can be entered only by Fedegari personnel


Fixed


Fixed

Number of cycles performed by the machine

Automatic, not modifiable

Enabling/disabling of optional kit KG41


ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

25 / 33

Luglio 2005


1.5.7.

DESCRIPTION

CHARACTERISTIC







INITIALIZATION

It is possible to access the menu that allows to transfer the parameters to the Process Controller by means of the main menu (this option is not available to the operator): 

press the “4” key to enter (SPECIAL FUNCTIONS) and then;



press the “4” to enter (INITIALIZATION);



a confirmation is requested in order to proceed with the data transfer by means of the ENTER key, then;



the flashing message INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS is displayed at the end;



the system resumes displaying the main menu.

NOTE The “INIT IALIZATION” opera tion must be performed only du ring installation. The unintentional activation of this funct ion does not compromise the functionality of the system.

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

26 / 33

Luglio 2005


2.

AL ARMS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1.

ALARMS

The sterilizer reports certain alarms, which are displayed with a brief description and are printed if the printer is operating correctly and the corresponding function is activated. The occurrence of an alarm is reported visually and also by activating an acoustic alarm. The alarms are defined as: 

System alarms, if they affect safety instruments or general safety conditions



Phase alarms, if they are related to the execution of specific phases



Cycle alarms, if they can occur only during a cycle in progress and are not linked to specific phases

Higher-level alarms, for example the alarm that indicates imperfect closure of the lid during the process, interrupt the cycle, with immediate transition to the emergency phase, during which the autoclave is kept in a safe and suspended state. Pressing the STOP key allows the operator to move on to the atmospheric pressure balancing phase and to the consequent cycle end. All the alarms identify operating anomalies that can be solved spontaneously or require technical intervention. The machine described in this manual can activate the alarms listed in the following Table.

NOTE The abbrevia tions “ TE” and “ TP” that occur in the alarm message s refer to the heat probe and to the pressure transducer, respe ctively.

NOTE Some a larms require operator acknowledgment (flashing “ ACK” message ). Press t he ENTER key for at lea st 2 seconds to eliminate the “ alarm acknowledgment” message.

The meaning of the columns of the Table is as follows:

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

27 / 33

Luglio 2005

TECHNICAL MA NUAL SECTION 4 – PROCESS CONTROLLER -

No.

-

AL ARM

-

CAUSE

-

TYPE

: type of alarm;

-

DELAY

: alarm activation delay;

-

RESULT

-

BUZ

-

PRINT ON : printout (alarm onset); PRINT OFF : printout (alarm deactivation);

-

ACK

: alarm number; : alarm message; : description of the abnormal condition detected by the controller;

: action produced by the alarm on the sterilizer; : buzzer;

: request to acknowledge the alarm.

Table 2.1 – List of alarms No.

1

2

ALA RM

CAUSE

TYPE

During the sterilization phase, the temperature in STERIL T EXCESS the chamber exceeds the maximum sterilization temperature (R6).

STERIL T LA CK

During the sterilization phase, the temperature in the chamber drops below

DELAY

RESULT

BUZ

PRN ON

PRN OFF

Display

X

X

X

X

X

X

ACK

Phase

Display and

Phase

the minimum sterilization temperature (R4).

steril. time held

3

OVERTEMPERATURE !

The process controller detects in the chamber a temperature above the allowed limit (138°C).

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

4

OVERPRESSURE !

Fixed threshold of 4 bar abs is exceeded

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

5

The process controller detects in the chamber a TE temperature that exceeds UNSERVICEABLE the measurement range of ! the heat probe or is receiving no signal from it.

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

6

The process controller detects in the chamber a TP pressure that exceeds the UNSERVICEABLE measurement range of the ! pressure transducer or is receiving no signal from it.

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

ID no. 84505 Rev. 2

28 / 33

Luglio 2005


N

7

8

9

10

ALA RM

CAUSE

TYPE

DELAY

RESULT

BUZ

PRN ON

PRN OFF

STEAM WATER LACK

The controller receives from the minimum-level sensor the signal that indicates lack of water in the steam generator. Note: this alarm is enabled only if the steam generator is active (parameter G10 =1)

System

60

Display

X

X

X

DOOR OPEN IN CYCLE !

While a cycle is in progress, the process controller detects imperfect closure of the lid (lack of signal from inflated-gasket pressure switch).

Cycle

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

DOOR SYSTEM AL ARM

The process controller detects an operating anomaly on the inputs (limit switches and pressure switches of the door system).

System

5

Display and EMERG

X

X

X

X

X

PHASE-STEP UTILIZED

MANUAL CYCLE11 STOP

12

BLACKOUT DETECTED

13 PRINTER ERROR

Displayed and printed during the execution of a

Display and

Cycle

cycle after activating the PHASE STEP function.

Phase end

Displayed and printed during the execution of a cycle after the activation of the CYCLE STOP function.

Cycle

Display and EMERG

X

X

Displayed and printed, when a cycle is restarted, following a blackout.

Cycle

Display and B.O. EMERG.

X

X

The printer is not available even though option K81=1 and G11=1.

System

Display

X

10

X

14

PANEL BATTERY LOW !

Activation battery is drained orif missing. This alarm is activated before the battery is completely drained.

System

Display

X

X

15

VACUUM PUMP AL ARM !

The controller does not receive the return signal from the pump (digital input TMPV)

System

Display

X

X

29 / 33

X

ACK


N

16

ALA RM

CAUSE

TYPE

OVERTEMPERATURE FOR VACUUM PUMP !

The process controller detects in the chamber a temperature that is higher than 100°C and it deactivates the vacuum pump until the temperature returns below this threshold (TE<100°C).

System

DELAY

RESULT

BUZ

PRN ON

Display

X

X

PRN OFF

ACK

WARNING! The operator must be instructed correctly and extensively regarding the meaning and importance of the alarms that can occur on the machine.

2.2.

TROUBLESHOOTING

This subsection provides information on finding and identifying the faults that can occur in the sterilizer (occurrence of alarms, generation of abnormal vibration and noise).

WARNING! Every intervention on the machine, includi ng access to electrically live parts and to the primary supply lines, must be performed by specialized personnel of the manufacturer FEDEGARI or by personn el author ized by FEDEGARI. 2.2.1.

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

The following table lists the most frequent symptoms of malfunction that can occur during the use of the sterilizer. The possible causes and any corrective actions are given for each symptom.

Table 2.2.1 - Troublesho otin g Ref. No. AL ARM

DESCRIPTION

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) Malfunction of generator pressure switch.

1

During t he sterilization phase, b) Malfunction of heat probe the temperature inside the or pressure transducer. chamber exceeds the c) The heat probe or the sterilization tempera ture plus the sterilization tolerance. The pressure sensor are not calibrated appropriately. display show s the ala rm message “ STERIL T EXC ESS” . d) The sensor signal conversion module is not operating correctly.

30 / 33

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

a) Identify the fault. b) Identify the faulty element and replace it. c) Calibrate the system on the signal that arrives from the heat probe or from the pressure transducer. d) Identify the faulty element and replace it.


Ref. No. AL ARM

2

DESCRIPTION

During t he sterilization phase, the temperature inside the chamber drops below t he sterilization temperature. The display shows the alarm message “ STERIL. T LACK” .

3

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

a) Incorrect operation of steam generator

a) Identify the malfunction of the steam generator.

b) Failure of heat probe or pressure transducer.


c) The heat probe or the pressure sensor are not calibrated appropriately.

c) Calibrate the system on the signal that arrives from the heat probe or from the transducer.

d) The sensor signal conversion module is not operating correctly.


The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a temperature that exceeds the allowed limit.

a) Malfunction of electric a) Repair or replace the valve for loading steam into electric valve. the chamber.

The display shows the ala rm mess age “ EXCESS CHAMBER T”.

b) Failure to close of the b) Repair or replace the feed valve for feeding saturated valve. steam to the chamber.

The cycle in pro gress is interrupted and immediate transition to the emerge ncy phase occurs. The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a temperature that exceeds the measurement range of the heat probe. 5

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) Malfunction of the heat a) Identify the faulty probe TE or of the module component by using the for converting the signal autodiagnosis functions, detected by the probe. repair it, or replace it.

The display shows the ala rm message “TE UNSERVICEAB LE” . The cycle is i nterrupted and immediate tra nsition to the emergency phase occ urs The proce ss c ontroll er dete cts, inside the chamber, a pressure that exceeds the measurement range of the pressure transducer.

6

a) Malfunction of the pressure transducer or of the module for converting the signal detected by the transducer.

The display shows the ala rm message “TP UNSERVICEAB LE” The cycle is i nterrupted and immediate tra nsition to the emergency phase occ urs.

31 / 33

a) Identify the faulty component by using the autodiagnosis functions, repair it, or replace it.


Ref. No. AL ARM

7

DESCRIPTION

The controller receive s f rom the leve l sensor t he signal that indicates lack of w ater in the independent steam generator. The alarm message “ STEAM WATER LAC K” is di splayed .

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) The water supply is unavailable. One probably cause can be, in addition to unavailability of the water supply, the presence of air bubbles in the pump intake duct. If so, remove pressure from the generator by opening the manual valve (remember to close it again after draining is complete). Once this operation is complete, the supply of deionized water can be restored.

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

a) Restore the demineralized water supply. b) Repair or replace the pump. c) Check the line for supplying water to the independent steam generator. d) Once the faulty component has been found, repair it or replace it. Replace the level sensor.

b) The water pump that supplies the independent steam generator is faulty. c) The supply valves are dirty or faulty. d) The level sensor is faulty. While a cycle is in progress, the process controll er dete cts imperfect closure of the lid:

8

The display shows the ala rm mess age “ DOOR OPEN IN CYCLE” .

a) Malfunction of the pressure switch that senses “high pressure” in the lid gasket.

a) Replace the pressure switch

b) Lack of compressed air in lid gasket.

b) Check the compressed air supply circuit. Once the defective component has been found, repair it or replace it.

a) The printer has been enabled (KG81=1, G11=1) but is not present on the sterilizer.

a) Disable the printer.

The cycle is i nterrupted and immediate tra nsition to the emergency phase occurs.

13

The display shows the mess age “ PRINTER ERROR” .

b) Check the connections of the printer to the controller b) The printer is not powered. and to the electrical system.

32 / 33


Ref. No. AL ARM

-

DESCRIPTION

The sterilizer cannot be started because the ma in sw itch tri ps repeatedly.

PROBAB LE CAUSES

a) Internal short circuit.

a) Using the electrical diagram, find and eliminate the fault.

b) The electrical cabinet is open.

b) Close the electrical cabinet by operating its key.

c) The thermostat that protects the resistors of the generator has tripped. a) Fault in the regulating pressure switch. -

Af ter st artin g t he cycle, t he controll er does not receive the cleara nce signal indi cating that the generator is ready .

POSSIBLE REMEDIES

c) Remove the reason why the resistors were running dry or with an insufficient water level.

a) Replace the pressure switch.

b) Malfunction of the heating system of the independent b) Check the efficiency of the generator. electrical resistors and of the electric circuits that supply power to them.

33 / 33

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE


MAINTENANCE

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

1/7

February 2006



ORDINARY MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................3

1.1.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES................................................................................. 4

1.1.1. 1.1.1.1. 1.1.1.2. 1.1.2.

VISUAL INSPECTION................................................................................................................. 4 PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 4 LIST OF CHECKS ................................................................................................................... 5 CLEA NING AND CHECKING ..................................................................................................... 6

1.1.2.1.

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 6

1.1.2.2.

PARTS TO BE CLEANED AND CHECKED ........................................................................... 7

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

2/7

February 2006


1.

ORDINARY MAINTENANCE

The maintenance operations described in this chapter have been defined after careful examination of the average operating conditions of the machine. If substantially different requirements occur, you should promptly contact the manufacturer. This chapter describes the preventive maintenance procedures applicable to the machine; as regards the individual components of the machine, please refer to the specific maintenance data sheets. In preparing an adequate maintenance schedule for the sterilizer, you should also consider that any periods of inactivity of the machine must be considered according to its duration. Short periods of inactivity There are no particular issues regarding periods of inactivity of less than two months. Long periods of inactivity For periods of over two months, in order to prevent sticking or early deterioration of the gaskets, treat them with silicone oil. Following particularly extended machine downtimes, it may be necessary to replace the gaskets and the seals.

CAUTION Correct and accurate maintenance allows to prevent most of the anomalies and preserve over time the performa nce of the machine in addition to facili tating its l onger durability.

WARNING! Before performing any maintenance operation on the sterilizer, unless otherwise specified, AL WAYS sh ut it down , di sen gagin g th e main sw itch and disc onnecti ng th e machine fr om th e mains ele ctric power supply and from any oth er power sources.

WARNING! AL WAYS perf or m th e per io di c maint enanc e act ivit ies li st ed in th is manual. Ac co rd in gly, periodically perform higher-level maintenance and any associated overhaul specified by FEDEGARI. In any case, never exceed 12 months or 400 cycles without performing a general check of the machine. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any faults or damage arising from partial or full non-compliance with these periods and methods. NOTE Overloads of an electric motor are almost always caused by mechanical anomalies. These anoma lies usually become appa rent by produci ng abnormal vibration and noise, which s hould always be given appropriate attention from their first occurrence. When in doubt, promptly cont act the Technic al Support Service of FEDE GARI.

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

3/7

February 2006

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE 1.1.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

This subsection lists the procedural steps recommended for correctly performing ordinary preventive maintenance to be performed on the machine. These procedures are organized by subject, and they list, in addition to any warnings, the frequency and the tools, materials and instruments to be used during maintenance. The procedures are organized according to the following subjects: 

Visual inspection



Cleaning and checking

WARNING! Perform maintenance activities only while wearing adequate clothing, suitable for the type of maintenance to be performed and at the same time capable of protecting the operator from the dange r of bruising, abrasions, and contact burns, even with j ets of fl uids at hig h tempera ture.

WARNING! Before performing any maintena nce on the sterilizer, unless otherwise s pecified, ALWAY S stop the machine, disengaging the mains switch and disconnecting the machine from the mains power supply.

WARNING! Do not perform operations youbacterial, are certain being able toagents, operatei.e., in an environment thatmaintenance is not contaminated by unless chemical, or of microbiological ONLY WHEN the previous st eriliza tion cycle performed on the sterilizer has ended successfull and the materials that constitute the load have been regularly sterilized without any leakage (breakage or opening of bottles, bags, containers or others). Maintenance activity on the sterilizer in the presence of chemical, bacterial or microbiological agents MUST BE authorized expressly by the departments in charge of the company that owns the sterilizer, and must be performed by using suitable protective equipment in accordance with the safety standards applicable in the country o f use.

y

WARNING! Some parts of the machine inside the technical area are constituted by components and surfaces where high temperatures accumulate during operation. The operator MUST AVOID strict ly any a ttempt to acce ss these pa rts with out first put ting on suit able protective clothing.

1.1.1.

VISUAL INSPECTION

Once a week, visually check the integrity of the system and of its main components as described in the following subsections. 1.1.1.1.

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS

Before performing visual inspection of the machine, check that: 

According to the work reports, the last sterilization cycle ended successfully;

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

4/7

February 2006


1.1.1.2.



The lid of the machine is open



When the lid is closed, the pressure in the chamber is equal to the atmospheric pressure and the temperature is, with a 10% tolerance, equal to the ambient temperature;



The machine is switched off and the process controller is deactivated; otherwise, deactivate the machine and take the safety steps for isolating the machine from the electric power source LIST OF CHECKS

Off-line check Accessing the technical area if necessary, check once every month the physical integrity of the components and in particular: 1. Check that the hydraulic ducts and the pneumatic lines are intact and do not have cracks or deformations, and that there is no evident dripping, leakage of liquid, or jets of fluids under pressure. Check moreover that all the plastic ducts do not touch the metallic parts because these one reach, during the working, high temperatures; 2. Check the physical integrity of the electrical lines that carry signals, power supply and commands; they must not have portions that are frayed or without insulation, or loose portions with excessively tight radii of curvature; 3. Inspect the surfaces of the internal sterilization chamber. They must be perfectly smooth and polished and must show no dents, abrasions or scuffing of any kind; 4. Inspect the outer surfaces of the panels and of the console. They must be intact in terms of shape and surface finish; 5. Check the connections to the primary supply lines and all the connectors of the machine; they must be fixed firmly to the pipes, must have no cracks or deformations, and there must be no evident dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluids under pressure, particularly on the flow control valves of the primary lines provided by the user; 6. Check the physical integrity of all the components of the system (electric valves, filters and sensors); in particular, the external containers must be intact, the identification plates must be readable, the cable guides and hermetic connectors must not have mechanical anomalies and/or losses of insulation; 7. Check the integrity of the heat probes; in particular, inspect the head of the sensor for any scale, deformation or breakage. Moreover, the sheath that lines the signal conductor must be intact upon flexing, without speckling with consequent losses of insulation; 8. Check the physical integrity of the autonomous generator and of other auxiliary systems, if provided; 9. By acting repeatedly on the emergency stop device (red mushroom-shaped button), check that the actuation of this device entails normal mechanical reactions on the part of the device and does not generate abnormal noise. The device must also be intact in its shape and coloring; 10. Check the physical integrity of the control devices: keypad, display, and vacuum gauges. The surfaces must be intact, without cracks, speckling, abrasions or breakages; in particular, the screen printing on the keys and the control buttons must be clearly legible and be unchanged in its color; 11. Check that all the warning and danger plates have been placed correctly and coupled to the supporting surface and that they are intact and have unchanged colors.

On-line check During a process cycle and during the sterilization phase, perform the following check once every month, accessing the technical area if necessary:

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

5/7

February 2006


WARNING! This check performed while the machine is active must be performed ONLY VISUALLY and with suitable personal protection means. Absolutely avoid making physical contact with any part of the machine.

1. Check that no dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluids under pressure is evident on the hydraulic lines; 2. Check that there is no hissing or abnormal conditions that reveal leaks in the pneumatic circuits of the machine; 3. Check the connections to the primary supply lines and all the connectors of the system; there must be no evident dripping, leakage of liquids or jets of fluid under pressure, particularly on the flow control valves of the primary lines provided by the user; 4. Check that the noise level of operating components such as the water pump and the electric compressor is normal and continuous without changes in intensity and/or tone. 1.1.2.

CLEA NING AND CHECKING

Normal operations for cleaning the sterilizer must be performed in accordance to what has been described in this subsection. Specific products must be used for each part to be treated. Use of unsuitable substances or tools may cause severe damage to the machine and to its components.

;

CAUTION

In Fedegari sterilizers, the parts in contact with the process fluids are made of austenitic stainless steel, which if maintaine d correctly has exce llent corros ion resistance characte risti cs. Maintenance cleaning of the internal surfaces should be performed regularly. Unless otherwise specified, never use abrasive cloths or tools. Always use gentle natural or synthetic s ponges and lint-free cloths.

WARNING! Au st eniti c st ain less st eel su rf aces, w hen in co nt act wit h ch lo rine or wit h it s co mp ou nds, may lose their resistance to corrosion and be damaged irreversibly. When using and cleaning the sterilizer, absolutely avoid the use of solutions and detergents that contain chlorine or chlorides. 1.1.2.1.

PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS

Before cleaning the machine, check that: 

According to the work reports, the last sterilization cycle ended successfully;



The lid of the machine is open



When the lid is closed, the pressure in the chamber is equal to the atmospheric pressure and the temperature is, with a 10% tolerance, equal to the ambient temperature;



The machine is switched off and the process controller is deactivated; otherwise, deactivate the machine and take the safety steps for isolating the machine from the electric power source

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

6/7

February 2006

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 5 – MAINTENANCE 1.1.2.2.

PARTS TO BE CLEA NED AND CHECKED

The parts of the sterilizer that require periodic checking and cleaning in order to ensure their correct operation and preserve the best levels of reliability and efficiency are: Lid and external cabinet Usually once every month, the lid and the external cabinet should be cleaned with a moist cloth. Product transport baskets Usually once a week, the containers must be cleaned by washing and rinsing. 1.

Wash with hot water and normally commercially available non-abrasive, non-acid detergents;

2.

Rinse with water abundantly and thoroughly.

Checking t he tightness of the compressed air system This check is to be performed monthly: 1.

Close the lid of the sterilizer;

2.

Disconnect the electric power supply of the machine by means of the main circuit breaker;

3.

Check on the dedicated pressure gauge that the amount of pressure loss in the system after 1.5 hours of machine downtime is less than 1.5/bar.

Other parts Moreover, for each of the parts listed above, it is recommended to perform the cleaning and maintenance procedures given in the specific maintenance data sheets 

Sterilization chamber



Filter in chamber



Safety valves



Heat probe



Operator interface devices



Printer



Manual valve.

ID no. 84506 Rev. 3

7/7

February 2006

PMP

PIANO MANUTENZIONI MAINTENANCE PLAN MODELLO MODEL

ID no. 86731 Rev. 1 - Page 1/2

FVG

GRUPPO ASSEMBLY

SOTTOGRUPPO SUB-ASSEMBLY

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS

D

W

Verifica efficienza: Efficiency checking:

Blocco coperchio

Sostituzione: Replacement:

Cerniera coperchio Cover hinge

Registrazione c operchio: Cover checking: Sostituzione perno di rotazione: Replacement of the rotation pin:

Dispositivo di sic urezza apertura porta Sagety device door opening

Verifica efficienza di int ervento: Checking check-up of the device: Revisione completa dispositivo: Complete check-up of the device:

Filtro in camera Filter in chamber

Pulizia filtro: Filter cleaning: Sostituzione O-ring: O-ring replacement:

0074

0075 X

0076

0077

Giornaliera

W =

X 0079 rev.1

X

X

Sostituzione:

Mensile

Monthly

rev.1

X

Manutenzione e control lo: Cleaning and checking:

Settimanale M =

0078

X


Weekly

0080 X

X

Sostituzione stampante : Printer replacement

X

Trimestrale Y =

Quarterly

Annuale WR =

Yearly

rev.1

X

Sostituzione rotolo carta: Coil paper replacement:

Q =

rev.1

X

FREQUENZA -FREQUENCY

Daily

rev.1

X

X

Replacement: Controllo stampante : Printer checking:

D =

rev.1

X

X

Controllo: Checking:

Stampante Printe

rev.1

X

Verifica taratura e capacità di sfogo: Checking calibration and venting capacity: Sostituzione: Replacement:

Termoresistenza Thermal probe

SMC

WR

X

Verifica effici enza di sf ogo: Checking correct vent:

Valvola manuale Manual valve

Y

X

Cover block

Valvole di sicurezza Safetu relief valves

M Q

Quando Richiesto

When required

0081 rev.1

PMP

PIANO MANUTENZIONI MAINTENANCE PLAN GRUPPO ASSEMBLY

SOTTOGRUPPO SUB-ASSEMBLY

Valvole di ritegno singole e inserite in Valvola. gruppi distributori. Valve. Check valves stand-alone and fitted on manifolds.

ID no. 86731 Rev. 1 - Page 2/2

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY


D

W

M Q

Sostituzione piattello, O-ring, anello di centraggio e molla. Shutter, O-ring, centering ring and spring replacement.

X

Pulizia camera genera tore di vapore: Steam generator chamber cleaning:

X

Controllo e pulizia termostato: Thermostat checking and cleaning:

X

Sostituzione termostati: Thermostat replacement:

X uzione

resistenza elettrica: Heating element check and replacement:

X

FREQUENZA -FREQUENCY Giornaliera

W =

Settimanale M =

Weekly

Mensile

Monthly

0083 rev.1

Controllo, pulizia e sostit

Daily

rev.1

X

Controllo generale: General checking:

D =

0059

X


Generatore di v apore Steam generator

SMC

WR

x


Guarnizione coperchio Cover gasket

Y

Q =

Trimestrale Y =

Quarterly

Annuale WR =

Yearly

Quando Richiesto

When required

0084 rev.1

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET

SMC0074 ID no. 86676 Rev. 1 - Page 1/3

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: BLOCCO COPERCHIO FVG: COVER BLOCK

CODICE RIFERIMENTO REFERENCE CODE

COSTRUTTORE MANUFACTURER

GF170172

FEDEGARI AUTOCLA VI S.p.A .

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Blocco di s icurezz a per ape rtura coperchio Safety block for cover opening MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA

FREQUENZA

QUALIFICA MANUTENTORE

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Verifica efficienza: Efficiency checking:

FREQUENCY Mensile Monthly

OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION Operazioni effettuabili solamente da personale qualificato.


Quando necessario When necessary

Operations to be carried out by skilled personnel only.

ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS Chiave esagonale: Hex wrench:

Cacciaviti: Screwdrivers:

Chiave a brug ola: Allen wrench:

Pinza a be cco: Round nose pliers:

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off. As si cu rarsi ch e l’alimen tazion e elettr ic a e le alt re utenze si ano i nterr otte. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.

Redatto da: Written by

Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004

Verificato e approvato da: Verified and approved by:

Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/102004

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET 1.

SMC0074 ID no. 86676 Rev. 1 - Page 2/3

CONTROLLO CHECK •

•

•

•

Togliere i pannelli rimuovendo le viti (fig.1). Remove panels, after taking away the screws (fig.1). Verificare il corretto impegno del coperchio con il dispositivo di blocco coperchio; nel caso in cui il dispositivo di blocco non dovesse più manifestare la sua funzionalità sarà necessario procedere alla sostituzione della molla (1) (fig. 4). Check the correct engagement between the cover and the block device, if the block cover doesn’t work correctly, the spring has to be replaced (1) (fig. 4).

fig. 1

Verificare la presenza di gioco della leva nel blocco coperchio (2); se eccessivo, verificare l’usura della rondella (3) (fig. 4). Check the movement of the lever on the cover block (2), if excessive, verify the level of usury of the washer (3) (fig.4). Controllare con un tester il punto di commutazione del microin terruttore. Ve rificare l’apertura/ chiusura del cont atto sulla scheda di controllo (fig.2); per farlo, inserire le punte del tester nei con tatti 11/1 2 (fig .3) della scheda di con trol lo e commutare manualmente il microinterruttore. In caso di esito positivo, il tester indica una variazione di tensione; in caso contrario, verificare che non ci siano interruzioni del cavo e lettrico o sosti tuire il microint erruttore.

fig. 2

Check, with a tester, the correct commutation point of the microswitch. Verify the on/off contact on the control card (fig.2), inserting the tester points in the position 11/12 of the control card (fig.3), and push the microswitch; if the process is correct the tester shows a tension variation, otherwise check the electric cable or use a new microswitch. 2. SOSTITUZIONI REPLACEMENT •

•

•

•

Nel caso di eccessivo gioco della leva (2) del chiavistello, sostituire la rondella (3); per far questo, svitare la vite (4), sostituire la rondella (3) e alla fine rimontare il tutto (fig.4). If there is excessive movement from the lever on cover block (2), replace the washer (3) by removing the screw (4), replacing the washer (3) and reassembling the mechanism (fig. 4). Si effettua la sostituzione della molla (1) quando questa ha perso l’elasticità (fig.4). Replace the spring (1) when it loses its elasticity (fig. 4). Per rimuovere la molla guasta è necessario togliere gli occhielli dagli appositi ganci (5) con una pinza a becco (fig.4). To remove the bad spring, it is necessary to remove the eyes from its hooks (5) using one nose pliers (fig. 4). Sostituire infine con la molla nuova infilando gli occhielli nei ganci (5), ancora con l’ausilio di una pinza a becco (fig.4). Replace with a new spring and put its eyes in the hooks (5) using again one nose pliers (fig. 4).

fig. 3


•

SMC0074 ID no. 86676 Rev. 1 - Page 3/3

Verificare il corretto funzionamento della leva (2) del blocco coperchio (fig.4). Check the correct operation of the lever (2) of the block cover (fig. 4).

Sostituzione microinterruttore Microswitch replacement •

•

•

•

•

Togliere le vi ti (6) (fig. 4). Remove the screws (6) (fig.4). Scollegare il cavo elettrico (7) dalla scheda di controllo (fig. 4). Disconnect the electric cable (7) from the control card (fig.4). Rimuovere il microinterruttore (8) (fig. 4). Remove the microswitch (8) (fig.4). Sostituire il nuovo interruttore, avvitando le viti (6) e collegando il filo elettrico (7) alla scheda di cont rollo (fig. 4) . Replace the new microswitch tightening the screws (6) and connecting the electric cable (7) to the control card (fig. 4). Controllare il corretto funzionamento del nuovo microinterruttore, come sopra indicato. Check the correct work of the new microswitch, as above-mentioned.

Sostituzione gruppo completo Device replacement •

•

•

•

Togliere le vit i (6/9) (fig.4). Remove the screws (6/9) (fig. 4). Togliere il grup po. Remove the device. Sostituire il nuo vo gruppo fissandolo c on le viti (9) . Fissare il mic rointerruttore (fig. 8) con le vit i (6) (fig.4) . Replace the new device with the screws (9) and fix the microswitch (fig. 8) with the screws (6) (fig. 4). Controllare il corretto fun zioname nto di tut to il si stema di chiusura. Check the correct work of the block cover.

4

3

5 1 9 2 5 8 7

9 6 fig. 4

SMC0075


ID no. 86677 Rev. 1 - Page 1/5

APPA RECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: CERNIERA PER COPERCHIO FVG: COVER HINGE



GP750042

FEDEGARI AUTOCLA VI S.P.A.

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Sistema per la chiusura dello sterilizzatore Sterilizer closure system MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY

QUALIFICA MANUTENTORE OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION

Registrazione c operchio Cover checking

Mensile Monthly

Operazioni effettuabili solamente da personale qualificato.

Sostituzione perno di rotazione Replacement of the rotation pin



ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS

Chiave esagonale: Hex wrench:

Funzione Function Redatto da: Written by

ACP


Nome Name

MMS

Data Date

28/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/10/2004


SMC0075 ID no. 86677 Rev. 1 - Page 2/5

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off As si cu rarsi ch e l’ali mentazion e elettr ic a e le alt re utenze si ano i nt errot te. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected. 1.

REGISTRAZIONE COPERCHIO COVER CHECKING •

Ap ri re lo s teril izzator e e svit are le 4 viti ch e bloc cano i l c arter del co perch io (fi gg. 1 e 2). Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws locking the cover casing (figg. 1 and 2).

fig. 1 •

•

fig. 2

Socchiudere il coperchio. Half-close the cover. Controllare che l’asse del perno di rotazione sia allineato correttamente con l’asse dello sterilizzatore. L’allineamento è corretto se lo spazio di luce compreso fra il coperchio e il corpo dello sterilizzatore è uguale sia alla sinistra che alla destra della cerniera di rotazione (Xs ~Xd ) (fig. 3). Se non è corretto, sarà necessario allentare le quattro viti che fissano la guida perno per rotazione ce rniera a l c orpo dello sterilizza tore e, a vvitando o svitando le due vi ti d i regolazione, riportare nella corretta posizione verticale l’asse del perno di rotazione (fig. 4). Riavvitare i dadi d i fi ssaggio della guida al corpo dello sterilizza tore. Check that the axis of the rotation pin is exactly lined with the sterilizer axis. The alignment is right if the light-space between the cover and the sterilizer’s body is the same on the left and the right side of the rotation hinge (Xs~Xd) (fig. 3). If it is not correct, it will be necessary to loosen the screws jamming the pin guide for the hinge rotation to the sterilizer’s body; screwing and unscrewing the two regulation screws, bring back again the rotation pin axis in the right position (fig. 4). Rescrew the fixing nuts to the sterilizer’s body.

•

•

Al lentar e i due dadi ch e bloccan o il c op erchio. Loosen the two nuts locking the cover. Al li neare il bord o del co perch io co n qu ello della cam era dello st erili zzatore avvit ando ed allentando op port unamente i 4 grani (A,B,C,D) (fig. 5). Line up the cover’s rim with that of the sterilizer’s chamber screwing and loosening the four screws (A, B, C, D) (fig. 5).


SMC0075 ID no. 86677 Rev. 1 - Page 3/5

d

X s

X

A

B

C

D

fig. 3

fig. 5

fig. 4

- Se si avvitano i grani A e B il coperchio ruota in senso orario rispetto al piano della cerniera; se la rot azione non è suff ici ente allentare i grani C e D (fig. 6). - Putting in A and B screws, the cover rotates in clockwise direction as to the hinge level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the screws C and D (fig. 6). - Se si avvitano i gr ani C e D il co perchio ruota in senso antiorario ri spetto al piano della cerniera; se la rotazione non è sufficiente allentare i grani A e B (fig. 7). - Putting in C and D screws the cover rotates in anticlockwise direction as to the hinge level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the screws A and B. - Se si avvitano i grani A e C il coperchio ruota in senso antiorario rispetto al piano ort ogonale alla cerniera; se la rot azione non è suffi cient e allentare i gr ani B e D ( fig . 8). - Putting in A and C screws the cover rotates in anticlockwise direction as to the hinge orthogonal level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the B and D screws (fig. 8). - Se si avvitano i grani B e D il coperchio ruota in senso orario rispetto al piano ort ogonale alla cerniera; se la rot azione non è suffi cient e allentare i gr ani A e C ( fig . 9). - Putting in B and D screws, the cover rotates in clockwise direction as to the hinge orthogonal level; if the rotation is not sufficient, loosen the A and C screws (fig. 9).

A B

fig. 6

C D

fig. 7

C A

DB

fig. 8

fig. 9


SMC0075 ID no. 86677 Rev. 1 - Page 4/5

Riavvitare i due dadi di serraggio del coperchio dello sterilizzatore. Come verifica aprire 2-3 volte il coperchio dello sterilizzatore: questo deve poter ruotare senza strisciare contro il bordo s uperiore del corpo dello sterilizza tore. Rescrew the two tightening nuts of the sterilizer’s cover. To check, open 2/3 times the sterilizer’s cover: it has to be able to rotate without scratching the upper edge of the sterilizer’s body. 2. SOSTITUZIONE PERNO DI ROTAZIONE ROTATION PIN REPLACEMENT •

•

Togliere il pa nnello laterale destro rim uovendo le 4 vit i di bloc caggio (fig. 10 ). Remove the lateral panel after taking away the four locking screws (fig. 10). Ap ri re lo s ter il izzator e e svit are le 4 viti ch e bloc cano i l c arter del cop erchio (fig . 11). Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws locking the cover casing (fig. 11).

fig. 10

•

•

•

•

•

fig . 11

Togliere il carter. Remove the casing. Svitare il dado e il contro dado che bloccano il perno di rotazione del coperchio alla guida, rimuovendo anche le molle a tazza e la bussola di centraggio inferiori (fig. 12). Unscrew the nuts locking the cover’s rotation pin to the guide, removing the lower Belleville spring and the collet (fig 12). Sfilare il perno di rotazione tirando verso l’alto il coperchio, rimuovendo anche le molle a tazza e la bussola di centraggio superiori (fig .13). Unthread the rotation pin pulling the cover upwards, removing the upper Belleville spring and the collet (fig 13). Per sost ituire il perno di rotazione del coperchio, svitare il grano che lo blocca al coperchio, sfilarlo dalla sua sede, sostituirloe fissarlo con il grano (fig.14). Reinstallare il sistema sullo sterilizzatore procedendo nel senso inverso e, se occorre, sostituire le molle a tazza e le bussole. To replace the cover rotation pin, unscrew the screw, unthread the pin from its seat, replace and fix it with a screw (fig.14). Reinstall in the reverse order the system on the sterilizer and if necessary replace the Belleville springs and the collets. Per estrarre la guida perno per rotazione cerniera, svitare le 4 viti che lo fissano al corpo dello sterilizza tore e togliere la piattina di bl occo svitando l e due viti di s erraggio (fig.15 ). To pull out the pin guide for the hinge rotation, unscrew the four screws fixing it to the sterilizer’s body and remove the block wire strip unscrewing the two tightening screws (fig.15).


•

•

•

SMC0075 ID no. 86677 Rev. 1 - Page 5/5

Al lentar e le vit i d i al li neamen to verti cale del perno di ro tazion e del co perch io (fi g.16). Loosen the vertical alignment screws of the cover rotation pin (fig.16). Reinstallare il sistema sullo sterilizzatore procedendo nel senso inverso e, se occorre, sostit uire le molle a tazz a o le buss ole. Reinstall in the reverse order the system on the sterilizer and if necessary replace the Belleville springs or the collets. Nell’effettuare queste operazioni è necessario curare l’allineamento del coperchio come spiegato al punto 1. it is necessary to supervise the cover’s alignment as explained at point 1 During these actions,

fig . 13 fig. 12

fig . 14

fig . 15

fig . 16


SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 1/6

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: DISPOSITIVI DI SICUREZZA APERTURA PORTA FVG: SAFETY DEVICE DOOR OPENING

CODICE RIFERIMENTO: REFERENCE CODE:

COSTRUTTORE: MANUFACTURER: FEDEGARI A UTOCLAVI S.p.A.

GP400198

MICROPRECISION DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Dispositivo di s icurezz a che impedisce l’apertura della porta con pressione in camera. Safety device that prevents the door opening with the pressure in chamber. Utilizza una membrana in silicone con elevata resistenza alla temperatura e con grande sensibilità alla deformazione se soggetta a carichi modesti. The system uses a silicone membrane which is highly temperature-resistant and highly sensitive to deformation if subjected to small load. MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY


Verifica efficienza d’intervento: Checking the efficiency of the intervention:

Mensile Monthly


Revisione completa dispositiv o: Complete check-up of the device:

Trimestrale Quarterly

Operations to be carried out by skilled



personnel only.


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/102004


SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 2/6


1. DESCRIZIONE FUNZIONAMENTO OPERATING DESCRIPTION •

Il dispositivo installato con asse verticale sul corpo dell’apparecchio, permette l’inizio della manovra di apertura della porta solo se la differenza tra la pressione all’interno della camera e la pressi one atmosf erica è inferior e a 0.05 bar. Installed in vertical axis, this device permits the opening manoeuvre only if the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure does not exceed 0.05 bar.

•

•

Se la differenza tra la pressione all’interno della camera e la pressione atmosferica è superiore a 0.05 bar, il pistone si porta in vicinanza del microinterruttore, che attivato, interrompe l’alimentazione elettrica del sistema di apertura della o delle porte. If the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure exceeds 0.05 bar, the piston moves closer to the micro switch. If activated, this microswitch interrupts the electrical power supply of the door opening system. Per effetto della forza di gravità il pistone discende quando la differenza tra la pressione all’interno della camera e la pressione atmosferica è inferiore a 0.05 bar; allontanandosi dal microinterruttore, il pistone provoca il disinserimento, permettendo il ritorno dell’alimentazione elettrica al sistema di apertura della porta. By gravity, the piston lowers when the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure does not exceed 0.05 bar; by moving away from the microswitch, the piston disengages the switch, allowing the door opening system to be supplied with electric power again. Microinterruttor Microswitch

Pistone Piston

FUNZIONAMENTO DISPOSITIVI DI SICUREZZA SAFETY DEVICE OPERATING

Pressione Pressure

2. VERIFICA EFFICIENZA DI INTERVENTO CHECKING EFFICIENCY OF THE INTERVENTION •

Effettuare alcune manovre di chiusura e apertura della porta, e (considerando tempi di ritardo previsti) verificare sul cont rollore ele ttronic o di processo che il dispos itivo s ia effici ente. Open and close the door a few times and, considering the expected delay times, check on the device efficiency by the electronic process controller.

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET •

•

Premere il tasto 3 del quadro di controllo per accedere al menu dell’autodiagnosi. Press key 3 of the control console to enter the autodiagnose menu. Premere il tasto 1 del quadro di controll o, per visualizza re gli ingressi digitali Press key 1 of the control console to access the page displaying the digital input state.

SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 3/6

AUTODIAGNOSI 1. INGRESSI DIGITALI 2. USCITE DIGITALI

Lista ingressi Digitali List digital inputs 0: P002 Pressostato guarnizione porta; alta pressione (porta chiusa) Door gasket manostat, High pressure (closed door) 1: P005 Presso stato di s icur ezza camera Chamber safety manostat 2: Z001 Microinterruttor e chiusura p orta (fine corsa del c operchio) Closing door microswitch (end stop of the cover) 3: P004 Presso stato generatore di vapor e Steam generator manostat 4: L002 Livello minimo acqua generatore di vapore Water minimum level of the steam generator 5: P003 Pressostato guarnizione porta; bassa pressione (porta aperta) Door gasket manostat; low pressure(opened door)

•

Verificare che in assenza di pressione in camera l’ingresso digitale “ 1” sia allo “ stato 1 ” ; se è a llo “ stato 0 ” il pressosta to è guasto. Verify there is no pressure inside the chamber when the digital input “1” is to “state 1”, if instead it is to “state 0” the manostat is broken.

•

•

INGRESSI DIGITALI 0123456789ABCDEF (I.D.) 000000- - - - - - - - - - (STATE)

INGRESSI DIGITALI 0123456789ABCDEF 010000- - - - - - - - - -

Verificare l’efficienza dell’intervento del dispositivo controllando che permetta l’inizio della manovra di apertura alla condizione che la differenza fra pressione all’interno della camera e la pressione atmosferica sia inferiore a 0.05 bar. Verify the efficiency of the device intervention checking it allows the opening manoeuvre only if the difference between the pressure inside the chamber and the atmospheric pressure does not exceed 0.05 bar. Per la verifica si utilizza il vapore e sarà necessario istallare, in comunicazione con la camera interna, un manometro con scala sufficientemente valida per apprezzare lo 0.01 bar e con fondo scala non superiore a 0.5 bar. This check is carried by using It isgauge necessary install gauge connected internal chamber. Theout scale of the steam. pressure has totobe able atopressure read 0.01 bar and the top to of the the scale has not to be higher than 0.5 bar.

•

Nella camera interna, con coperchio perfettamente chiuso, occorre immettere il fluido fino a raggiungere una pressione di circa 0.2-0.5 bar. Il fluido deve poi essere scaricato lentamente, aprendo il rubinetto frontale (fig. 1). Introduce the fluid in the internal chamber, keeping the cover perfectly closed, until a pressure of approximately 0.2-0.5 bar is reached. The fluid has to be discharged slowly, opening the frontal cock (fig. 1).


SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 4/6

fig. 1 •

•

Durante la fase di scarico, l’operatore dovrà continuamente tenere sotto controllo l’ingresso digitale n° 1 e la pre ssione indi cata sul manometro. N ell’istante in cui l’ingresso d igitale passa dallo stato 1 allo stato 0, se il dispositivo è efficiente, la pressione letta non deve essere superi ore a 0.05 ba r. During the unloading phase, the operator has to check continuously the n° 1 digital input and the value on the pressure gauge. When the digital input state varies from 1 to 0, the pressure diplayed has not to be higher than 0.05 bar. This condition is satisfied when the device works correctly Qualora il valore letto durante il passaggio di stato risulti inferiore a quello ammesso, la taratura rientra nei parametri di sicurezza. Se la commutazione avviene ad una variazione di pressione superiore a 0.05 bar, una volta riportata la pressione della macchina a zero, sarà necessario smont are e re visionare il d isposi tivo agendo co me al punto 3. If during the variation of the digital input state the readout is lower than the allowed value, the valve is calibrated correctly and satisfies the safety measures. When the level commutation varies over the allowed pressure value 0.05 bar, it will be necessary (when the pressure has reached zero) to disassemble and overhaul the device, proceeding as described in subsection 3.


SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 5/6

3. REVISIONE COMPLETA DEL DISPOSITIVO DEVICE COMPLETE OVERHAUL

Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.

As si cu rarsi ch e l’ alimentazi on e elett rica e le altre ut enze si ano i nt errot te. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Svitare le viti (1) del supporto microinterruttore. Dopodiché il dispositivo può essere integralme nte smontato. Remove the microswitch support screws (1). Afterwards, the device can be fully disassembled (fig.2). Verificare lo stato fisico della membrana (2): sarà necessaria la sostituzione in presenza di forti incisioni o di elevata rigidezza dovuta ad invecchiamento (fig. 2). Check the physical condition of the membrane (2); a replacement will be necessary in case of conspicuous cuts, or rigidity due to aging (fig. 2). Verificare che l’alberino (3) non abbia incisioni sulla sua superficie tali da ostacolarne lo scorrimento assiale (fig. 2). Check the shaft (3) is not scored on its surface to the point of hindering its axial sliding (fig. 2). Verificare l’efficienza del microinterruttore (4) controllandone il funzionamento con il tester e verificando che i fissaggi dei cavi elettrici ai rispettivi morsetti siano puliti o non presentino tracce di corrosione (fig. 2). Check that the microswitch (4) is working properly using a tester and check that the couplings of the electrical cables to the respective terminals are clean and unaffected by traces of corrosion (fig. 2). Pulire tutte le parti smontate e verificare l’assenza di rotture o danneggiamenti sulle parti costituenti l’assieme. Se durante le verifiche si notano imperfezioni o usure dei particolari interessa ti, questi andra nno immediata mente sostitu iti. Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage of damage of the parts forming the assembly. In case of imperfections or wear, the affected parts have to be replaced immediately. Dopo aver effettuato la revisione e le eventuali sostituzioni e aver rimontato a perfetta regola d’arte tutte le parti componenti, occorre effettuare con cura la verifica di efficienza del disposi tivo indicata a l procedimento “ 2”. After overhauling and replacing as necessary, and after reassembling all the components to the best standards of workmanship, test carefully the correct operation of the device as described in section “2”.


1 4

3

2

fig. 2

SMC0076 ID no. 86678 Rev. 1 - Page 6/6


SMC0077 ID no. 86679 Rev. 1 - Page 1/3

APPA RECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: FILTRO IN CAMERA FVG: FILTER IN CHAMBER



GM300184 DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

FEDEGARI A UTOCLAVI S.p .A.

Filtro in camera con elemento filtrante in rete metallica. Filter in the chamber with metallic trap filtering element. MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY


Pulizia filtro : Filter cleaning:

Quotidianamente Daily

Sostituzione O-ring: O-ring replacement:

Quando ri chiesto When required

Operazioni effettuabili solamente da personale qualificato. Operations to be carried out by skilled personnel only.


Guanti Gloves


ACP

Nome Name MMS

Data Date 27/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

27/102004


SMC0077 ID no. 86679 Rev. 1 - Page 2/3

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS ATTENZIONE! WARNING!


As si cu rarsi ch e l’ alimentazi on e elettr ic a e le alt re ut enze si ano i nt errot te. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.

La camera e il filtro possono raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei. The chamber and the filter may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks. Use the suitable protection means. Non estrarre il filtro se sul fondo sono raccolti frammenti , vetri, sost anze come Agar, ecc… Rimuovere tutte le sostanze solide accuratamente ed accertarsi che, durante l’estrazione del filtro, non ne cadano nel pozzetto di scarico: queste intaserebbero e danneggerebbero le valvole dell’autoclave. Do not extract the filter if, on the bottom, fragments, glasses, substances like Agar, etc are collected. Remove carefully all the solid substances and verify during the extraction of the filter they do not fall in the drainage trap. The substances could stop or damage the autoclave’s valves.


SMC0077 ID no. 86679 Rev. 1 - Page 3/3

Pulizia filtro e sostit uzione Filter cleaning and replacement • •

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

• •

• •

Ap rire l’au to cl ave. Open the autoclave. Estrarre da lla propria sede il corpo del filtro agendo sul l’impugnatura di c ui è dotato. Remove the filter body from its housing by its handle. Liberare il filtro metallico da residui macroscopici eventualmente presenti (scaglie di vetro, frammenti organici, ecc...). Clear the metal filter from any macroscopic residues (glass splinters, organic fragments, etc...). Pulire a ccuratame nte tutti gli ori fizi della rete me tallica con l’ausili o di un getto d’aria compressa o bagno ad ultr asuoni. Clean carefully all the wire net orifices, also using, if necessary, a jet of compressed air or an ultrasound bath. Verificare l’assenz a di rotture, incrinature o danneggiame nti v ari sulle parti cos tituenti il filtro ed il corpo filt ro. Check that the parts forming the filter and its body are not broken, cracked or damaged. Controllare la condizione dell’ O- ring ed eventualme nte sosti tuirlo con u no nuovo. Check the O-ring wearing, and if necessary replace it with a new ones. Reinserire il f iltro in c amera nel proprio alloggiame nto. Replace the chamber filter back in its seat.

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0078

MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET

ID no. 86680 Rev. 1 - Page 1/4

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT

FVG: VAL VOLE DI SICUREZZA FVG: SAFETY RELIEF VALVES

CODICE RIFERIMENTO

COSTRUTTORE

REFERENCE CODE

MANUFACTURER

CJ060365 CJ060366

NUOVA COI

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Valvole di s icu rezza per camera e ge neratore di v apore Chamber and steam generator safety relief valves

MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA

FREQUENZA


PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENCY

OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION

Verifica effici enza di sf ogo:

Settimanale

Checking correct vent:

Weekly

Verifica taratura e capacità di sfogo:

Mensile

Checking calibration and venting capacity:

Monthly

Sostituzione:

Quando necessario

Replacement:

When necessary



Chiave esagonale:

Guanti:

Hex wrench:

Gloves:


Funzione

Nome

Data

Funzione

Nome

Function

Name

Date

Function

Name

Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004

ING

FAF

28/102004


Data

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0078


ID no. 86680 Rev. 1 - Page 2/4


1. VERIFICA EFFICENZA SFOGO CORRECT VENTING CHECKING •

Allentare la ghiera dell’ ottu ratore mentr e la macch ina è ad un valore di pressio ne inferiore rispetto a quello massimo di esercizio. Loosen the upper ring of the shutter while the machine pressure is lower than the maximum operating value.

•

Questa prova è necessaria per controllare che tra otturatore e sede della valvola non ci siano incollamenti o impedimenti che ne impediscono l’ape rtura. This test is necessary to check there is no jamming or obstacles between the shutter and the valve seat that could hinder opening.

2. VERIFICA TARATURA E CAPACITÀ DI SFOGO CALIBRATION AND VENTING CAPACITY CHECKING •

Elevare la pressione all’interno del recipiente (camera o generatore di vapore) fino alla pressione massima ammissibile e controllare il momento in cui la valvola comincia ad aprirsi. Verificare che la sovrapressione (o il valore di pressione) alla quale la valvola è completamente aperta non superi del 10% il valore della pressione massima ammissibile.

VALVOLA IMMISSIONE INFEED VALVE

C08

VALVOLA SICUREZZA GENERATORE SAFETY VALVE GENERETOR

Raise the pressure inside the vessel (chamber or steam generator) to the maximum allowable pressure value and then check at which point the valve begins to open. Check that the overpressure (or the pressure) at which the valve is fully open is not more than 10% above the maximum allowable pressure value. •

Durante questa prova si deve controllare che la pressione all’interno della macchina, con aperta la valvola d’immissione fluido (C08) e la valvola di sicurezza completamente aperta, non aumenti oltre il valore della pressione massima ammissibile. During this test it is also necessary to check that the pressure inside the machine, while the fluid infeed valve (C08) and the safety valve are open is fully open, does not increase beyond the maximum allowable pressure value.

•

La macchina è equipaggiata con valvole di sicurezza calibrate dal fabbricante e controllate da FEDEGARI AUTOCLA VI nella s ua off icin a ad una pressi one ambiente di 1 bar Nel caso la macchina venga istallata in località con pressione ambiente diversa da 1 bar (± 10%), FEDEGARI raccomanda che il personale qualificato e/o i tecnici autorizzati per l’istallazione della macchina, ricalibrino le valvole in relazione alla nuova pressione ambientale prima della messa in servizio. Questo accorgimento garantisce sicurezz a e corrette condizioni di u tilizzo.

VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA CAMERA SAFETY VALVE CHAMBER

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0078


ID no. 86680 Rev. 1 - Page 3/4

The machine has been equipped with safety relief valves calibrated by manufacturer and controlled by FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI in its workshop at a room pressure equal to 1 bar. If the machine should work at an external pressure different from 1 bar (± 10%), FEDEGARI recommends that qualified personnel and/or engineers authorized to install the machine itself, recalibrate valves according to new room pressure before starting to work. This device assures safety and correct operating conditions.

fig.A

fig. B

fig. C

3. SOSTITUZIONE DELLA VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA REPLACEMENT OF THE SAFETY VALVE •

Rimuovere il portello anteriore della macchina per cambiare la valvola di sicurezza del generatore (fig. B) o il portello posteriore della macchina per eventuale sostituzione la valvola di s icu rezza della camera (fig. C). Remove the front panel of the machine to replace the safety valve of the generator (fig.B) or the posterior panel of the machine to replace the safety valve of the chamber (fig.C).

ATTENZIONE! WARNING!


Assi curarsi ch e l’alimentazione elettric a e le alt re utenze siano interrott e. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.

La camera e gli elementi al suo interno possono raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei. The chamber and the elements to its inside may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks. Use the suitable protection means.

Verificare che non ci sia più pressione in camera e nei condotti Verify there is no more pressure in the chamber and in the piping

•

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0078


ID no. 86680 Rev. 1 - Page 4/4

Aprire l’attacco rapid o e sf ilare la valvola di sicu rezza; svitare poi il tubo di sfiato dalla valvola. Open the clamp and remove the safety valve; unscrew the breather pipe from the safety valve.

•

Sostituire l’anello di c entra ggio, l’O-ring e la valvola di sic sulla valvola.

urezza; avvitare il tu bo di sfiato

Replace the guide ring, the O-ring and the safety valve with new ones; screw the breather pipe on the valve. •

Fissare il tutt o con l’attacco rapido.

•

Verificare il corretto f unzioname nto della valvola di sicurezza sostit uita.

Fix with a clamp.

Verify the right working of the replaced safety valve. •

Rimontare i pannelli alla fine delle operazioni di verifica. Reassemble the panels after the controls.


SMC0079 ID no. 86681 Rev. 1 - Page 1/3

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: VALVOLA MANUALE FVG: MANUAL VALVE



GM150174


DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Valvola manuale di scarico camera Manual valve for discharging chamber MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY


Controlli: Checking:

Quotidianamente Daily





ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS Cacciaviti: Screwdrivers:

Chiave esagonale Hex wrench:

Chiavi a brugola: Allen wrench:

Guanti: Gloves:


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ACP

MMS

06/11/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

06/11/2004


SMC0079 ID no. 86681 Rev. 1 - Page 2/3

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS 1. CONTROLLO DELLA VALVOLA MANUALE MANUAL VALVE CHECK •

•

Il controllo deve essere effettuato quotidianamente. Carry out the check daily. La macchina deve essere accesa e il controllore di processo attivato. The machine has to be switched on and the process controller has to be activated.

•

•

Eseguire il test al termine di un ci clo d i “ TEST VUOTO CAMERA” . At the end of a cycle, start a “VACUUM CHAMBER” test. Duran te la fase di “ tenuta vuoto” o “ tenuta pressione”, aprire leggerme nte la valvola e verificare che si abbia una variazione di pressione in camera. During the “vacuum seal” or the “pressure seal” phases, open sligthly the valve and check there is a pressure variation in the chamber.

ATTENZIONE! WARNING!


As si cuthat rar sithe chelectric e l’ali mentazi elettr a eother le alt re uten zeare siano i nt errot te. Check power one supply andicthe services disconnected.

2. MANUTENZIONE O SOSTITUZIONE DELLA VALVOLA MANUA LE MANUAL VALVE MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT •

•

Se a causa di perdite o di un non corretto funzionamento della valvola sarà necessario procedere alla sostituzione di uno o più eleme nti c he compongono il rubinetto. In case of losses or of bad functioning of the valve, it will be necessary to replace one or more elements forming the cock. Rimuovere lo sportello anteriore svitando le quattro viti di fis saggio (fig. 1) . Remove the front door unscrewing the four locking screws (fig. 1).

fig. 1


•

•

•

SMC0079 ID no. 86681 Rev. 1 - Page 3/3

Per sostituire le parti usurate o guaste, sarà necessario smontare la valvola come in fig. 2. To replace worn or broken parts, it will be necessary to disassemble the valve as in fig. 2. Sostituire le parti usurate. Replace the worn parts. Verificare il corretto fu nziona mento come indi cato al punto 1. Check the right operation as indicated at point 1.

fig. 2

SMC0080


ID no. 86682 Rev. 1 - Page 1/5

APPA RECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: TERMORESISTENZA FVG: THERMAL PROBE



PM600045


DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA Termoresistenza

Pt100 4 FILI Ø 4.8 3m

Thermal probe Pt100 4 WIRES Ø 4.8 3m MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA FREQUENZA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FREQUENCY Manutenzione e controll i: Cleaning and checking:

Settimanale Weekly



QUALIFICA MANUTENTORE OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION Operazioni effettuabili solamente da personale qualificato. Operations to be carried out by skilled personnel only.

ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS Cacciaviti: Screwdrivers:

Chiave esagonale: Hex wrench:

Guanti: Gloves:


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/102004


SMC0080 ID no. 86682 Rev. 1 - Page 2/5

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS ATTENZIONE! WARNING! Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off. As si cu rar si ch e l’ alimentazi on e elett ri ca e le altre uten ze siano i nt err ot te. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected.

La camera e gli elementi al suo interno possono raggiungere temperature elevate. Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei. The chamber and the elements inside may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks. Use the suitable protection means. 1. MANUTENZIONE E CONTROLLO DELLA TERMORESISTENZA MAINTENANCE AND CHECK OF THE THERMAL PROBE •

•

•

•

•

2.

Estrarre la termoresistenza dall’interno della camera. Extract the thermal probe from the internal of the chamber. Pulire la testa del sensore impiegando acqua in soluzione con detergenti neutri ed uno straccio di cot one. Clean the head of the sensor employing water in solution with neutral detergents and a cotton cloth. Verificare che sul rivestimento esterno non ci siano fori o intagli; in caso contrario, sostituirlo. Verify there are not holes or notching on the outer cover otherwise replace it. Pulire la guaina utilizzan do acqua in soluzione con detergenti neutri ed una spugna non abrasiva. Clean the cover using water in solution with neutral detergents and a not abrasive sponge. Verific are che non ci s iano intagli o forature sulla guaina, in ca so cont rario, sostitui re. Verify there are not holes or notching on the cover otherwise replace it.

VERIFICA DI FUNZIONAMENTO OPERATING CHECK •

•

•

•

Premere il tasto “ CLEAR” Press the key CLEAR” Premere il tasto “ D” Press the key “D” Premere il tasto “ 3” Press the key “3” Premere il tasto “ 4” Press the key “4.


SMC0080 ID no. 86682 Rev. 1 - Page 3/5

Se le operazioni sopra elencate sono state eseguite correttamente sul monitor apparirà la temperatura interna della camera dell’autoclave alla temperatura ambiente. If the listed operations have been correctly executed the inner temperature of the chamber of the autoclave to the room temperature will be displayed on the monitor. Se appare una temperatura diversa da quella della camera alla temperatura ambiente, procedere a d una calibratura dello st rumento ri volgendosi a tecnici o a servizi s pecia lizza ti. If anomalies are supposed, a new calibration of the instrument has to be done, addressing to a technician or to a specialized service. Se è visualizzato il mess aggio di err ore o lo st rumento va a fond o scala (85 0°C), è necessario verificare che arrivi i l segnale dalla te rmoresistenza a lla scheda di con trollo. If error messages are displayed or if the instrument goes to end scale (850°C) it is necessary to verify the arrival signal to the control card from the thermal probe.

Preme re il tasto “ ENTER”

per cancella re il messaggio di errore.

Press the key “ENTER” to delete the error message. Premere il tasto “ CLEAR”

per tornare al menu princip ale.

Press the key “CLEAR” to return to the main menu.

A ON ACK TE UNSERVICEABLE

1/1

SMC0080


ID no. 86682 Rev. 1 - Page 4/5

SOSTITUZIONE SONDA PROBE REPLACEMENT •

•

•

Rimuovere i pannelli laterali (fig.1). Remove lateral panels (fig.1). Scollegare il connettore PT100 dal lato inferiore della scheda controllo, (figg. 2 e 3). Disconnect PT100 connector from the inferior side of the control card (figg.2 and 3). Rimuovere le eventuali fascette che fissano il cavo della termoresistenza. Remove any ties that stop the cable of the thermal probe. fig.1

•

•

•

•

•

•

fig. 2 fig. 3 Separare il cavo della termoresistenza dal conn ettore PT100. Separate the cable of the thermal probe from the PT100 connector. Svitare il mors etto attacco rapido (fig. 4). Unscrew the clamp (fig. 4). Sfilare il tappo for ato dall’atta cco. Unthread the hollow plug from the attack. Sfilare il cavo dal t appo . Unthread the cable from the plug.

fig. 4

ATTACCO CONNECTION O-RING DISCO DISK

Estrarre la termoresistenza da l c ondotto. Extract the thermal probe from the pipeline. Verificare gli O-ring di tenuta del tappo. Per una eventua le sost ituzione, fare riferimento alla fig . 5. Check the held O-ring of the stopper, in order to replace them (fig.5).

O-RING GHIERA RING TERMORESISTENZA THERMAL PROBE

fig. 5

CLAMP


•

•

•

•

•

•

SMC0080 ID no. 86682 Rev. 1 - Page 5/5

Prendere il tappo e rimuovere il disco dalla ghiera con l’aiuto di un cacciavite o di un grimaldello. Take the stopper and remove the disc from the metal ring with a screwdriver or a picklock. Infilare la ghiera sul cavo della nuova termoresistenza, avendo cura di tenere la parte con il diametro minore verso l’esterno della macchina. Thread the metal ring on the cable of the new thermal probe holding the smaller diameter part towards the external side of the machine. Infilare nuovo O-ring. Threadilthe new O-ring. Infilare il disco sul c avo e incastrarlo nella ghiera . Thread the disc on the cable embedding it in the metal ring. Inserire il disco di centraggio nell’attacco e fissarlo con il mors Insert the stopper in the attack fixing it with the clamp.

etto.

Inserire all’estremità del cavo i capocorda e avvitare sul connettore PT100 (fig. 6). Insert to the extremity of the cable the cable terminal and then screw it on the PT100 connector (fig.6).

fig. 6 •

•

•

•

Reinserire il c onnettore nella scheda di cont rollo. Reinsert the connector in the control card. Infilare in camera la termoresistenza attraverso il condotto, avendo l’accortezza di non graffiarla o danneggiarla. Thread into the chamber the thermal probe through the piping, not scratching or damaging it. Fissare con delle fascette il filo della termoresistenz a all’interno della macchina. Fix with some ties the thermal probe cable to the machine internal. Rimontare i pannelli esterni della macchina. Reassemble the external panels of the machine.

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0081


ID no. 86683 Rev. 1 - Page 1/4

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT

FVG: STAMAPANTE FVG: PRINTER

CODICE RIFERIMENTO

COSTRUTTORE

REFERENCE CODE

MANUFACTURER

CE020017

Custom

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Stampante CUSTOM FT190-S3 Printer CUSTOM FT190-S3

MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA

FREQUENZA


PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENCY

OPERATOR’S QUALIFICATION

Controllo s tampante :

Giornaliero

Printer checking:

Daily

Sostituzione rotolo c arta:

Quando necessario

Coil paper replacement:

When necessary

Sostituzione stampante :

Quando necessario

Printer replacement:

When necessary



Chiave esagonale:

Cacciaviti:

Hex wrench:

Screwdrivers:


Funzione

Nome

Data

Function

Name

Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004


Funzione

Nome

Function

Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/102004

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0081


ID no. 86683 Rev. 1 - Page 2/4


1.

CONTROLLO STAMPANTE PRINTER CHECK

•

La carta nella stampante deve risultare ben allineata. The paper in the printer has to be lined up

•

Il rotolo di alimentazione deve avere una quantità di carta sufficiente per poter ultimare la stampa relativa ad un ciclo di sterilizzazione. The feeding coil has to dispose of a sufficient amount of paper in order to complete the relative print of a sterilization cycle.

•

Rimuovere con uno spazzolino o con dell’aria compressa (a bassa pressione) la polvere di carta che può depositarsi all’interno della stampante e togliere i residui grossolani di carta che potrebbero esserci all’interno della stampante . Remove with a small brush or compressed air (low pressure) the paper powder that can be collected inside the printer and remove possible residuals of paper.

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0081


ID no. 86683 Rev. 1 - Page 3/4

2. SOSTITUZIONE ROTOLO CARTA ESAURITO O INCEPPATO. EXAUSTED OR JAMMED COIL PAPER REPLACEMENT

SE LA CARTA NON È SUFFICIENTE O SE È INCEPPATA È NECESSARIO: IF THE PAPER IS NOT ENOUGH OR IF IT IS JAMMED: •

Ap rire il portello di accesso alla stampante. Open the front panel.

•

Premere il pulsante (PUSH) sul supporto basculante del meccanismo di caricamento carta. Press the key (PUSH) on the balancing support of the paper loading mechanism.

•

Se il rotolo di carta è; ssolo da sostituire, il nuovo, tagliare rotolo diin carta supporto basculante e si deve rimuovereposizionare la carta inceppata modo sul netto la carta del rotolo e rimuovere la carta inceppata o danneggiata. If the coil has only to be replaced, put the new coil of paper on the balancing support; if the jammed paper has to be removed, cut the paper of the coil, and remove the jammed or damaged paper.

•

Introdurre il lembo iniziale della carta nel meccanismo di

stampa.

Insert the initial border of the paper into the print mechanism. •

Ripristinare il meccanismo di caricame nto carta preme ndo i l t asto PUS H. To restore the paper loading mechanism, press the key PUSH.

•

Premere il tasto FEED per creare un esubero di carta al fine di facilitare la sua introduzione nella fessura sul po rtello di accesso della stampa nte. Press the key FEED in order to create a excess of paper to make its introduction in the fissure on the front panel easier.

•

Chiudere il portello di accesso alla stampante. Close the front panel.

SCHEDA MANUTENZIONE

SMC0081


ID no. 86683 Rev. 1 - Page 4/4

3. SOSTITUZIONE STAMPANTE PRINTER REPLACEMENT •

Rimuovere il pannello front ale de lla macchina. Remove the front panel of the machine.

•

Ap rire lo sp ortello della st ampante e con l’ausilio di un cacciavite rimuovere le due viti di fissaggio, facendo attenzione a non far cadere le due staffe a L che si trovano sul retro della stampante. Open the front panel of the printer and with a screwdriver remove the two stop screws, paying attention the two L brackets on the back of printer not to fall.

•

Dopo aver tolto le due staffe a L, estrarre la stampante. After the removal of the two L brackets, extract the printer.

•

Una volta estra tta staccare i due connettori sul r etro della stampa nte e sostituir la.

posti

When the printer has been extracted completely, detach the two connectors on the back of printer and replace it. •

Rimontare la stampante eseguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte nei punti precedenti. the printer following the operations in Reassemble reverse order.

•

Verificare il corretto funzionamento della nuova stampante. Check the correct operation of the new printer.


SMC0059 ID no. 86204 Rev. 1 -- Page 1/4

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT Valvole di ritegno singole e i nserite in gruppi distributori. Check valves stand--alone and fitted on manifolds.


COSTRUTTORE MANUFACTURER FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.p.A.

MONTAGGIO MOUNTING

DN

10

16

22

35 48

su linea on line

GM350227 GM350240 GM350255 GM350218 GM350243 GM350244 GM350221 GM350223 GM350247 GM350224 GM350250 GM350251

su pompa vuoto on vacuum pump

verticale vertical

GM350241 GM350204

--

--

GM350242

GM350246

GM350245

GM350248

GM350249

--

GM350252

GM350226

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Valvola di ritegno a piattello Shutter check valve MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY

QUALIFICA MANUTENTORE OPERATOR’S QUALIFICA TION

1 -- Sostituzione piattello, O--ring, anello di centraggio e molla. Shutter, O--ring, centering ring and spring replacement.

Annuale Yearly


ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS S

S

Chiave esagonale: 27 -- 32 -- 36 -- 41 -- 46 -- 60 -- 64 -- 65 mm Hex wrench Chiavi a brugola: 6 mm Allen wrench Funzione Function Redatto da: Prepared by

IDO

Nome Name

FAP

Data Date

18/05/05

Funzione Function Verificato e approvato da: Checked and approved by

ING

Nome Name

Data Date

FAF 18/05/05


SMC0059 ID no. 86204 Rev. 1 -- Page 2/4

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS 1. OPERAZIONI PRELIM INARI PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS ATTENZIONE ! WARNING ! Prima di eseguire la manutenzione è indispensabile accertarsi che non esista pressione residua. Before starting maintenance it is essential to make sure that there is no residual pressure. ATTENZIONE ! WARNING ! La valvola può raggiungere temper ature eleva te. Prestare la massima attenzione al pericolo di scottature. Utilizzare mezzi di protezione idonei. The valve may reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the suitable protection means. 1.1. La seguente manutenzione deve essere eseguita a sterilizzatore spento. Assicurarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica e le altre utenze siano interrotte. The following maintenance must be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off. Check that the electric power supply and the other services are disconnected. 1.2. Se la valvola è singola e le condizioni dell’ impianto lo permettono, rimuoverla e posizio narla su un ido neo banco di lavoro. Nel caso in cui la valvolaè inseritain ungrup po distributore o il suo smontaggio dalla linea risultasse difficoltoso, la manutenzione può essere comunque eseguita a bordo macchina. If the valve is installed as a stand--alone component and, if allowed by the conditions of thesyste m, remove the valve and place it on a suitable workbench. If the valve is part of a manifold or if it is difficult to remove from the line, maintenance can be performed with the valve installed on the machine.

2. SOSTITUZIONE PIATTELLO, O--RING, E MOLLA VALVOLE DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35 SHUTTER, O--RING, AND SPRING DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35 VALVESREPLACEMENT 2.1. Separare la flangia (1) da lla flangia (2 ) utilizzando due ch iavi esagonali (Fig. 1). Using two hex wrenches, separate the flange (1) from the flange (2) (Fig. 1). 2.2. Togliere l’O--ring (3) e il fonde llo (4) (Fig. 1). Remove the O--ring (3) and the bottom (4) (Fig. 1). 2.3. Sfilare il piattello (5 ) e la molla (6) da lla flangia ( 1) (Fig. 1). Remove the shutter (5) and the spring (6) from the flange (1) (Fig. 1). 2.4. Togliere gli O--ring (7) da l piattello (5 ) (Fig. 1). Remove the O--rings (7) from the shutter (5) (Fig. 1). NOTA NOTE La molla (6) non è presente nelle valvole montate verticalmente. Gli O--ring (7) non sono presenti nelle valvole DN10 -- DN16 e in tutte quelle montate verticalmente. The spring (6) is not present into the vertical mounting valves. The O--rings (7) are not present into the DN10 -- DN16 valves and into all the vertical mounting valves.


SMC0059 ID no. 86204 Rev. 1 -- Page 3/4

2.5. Pulire tutte le parti smonta te e verifica re l’assenza di rotture o danneggia menti vari sulle parti costituenti l’assieme. Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage or damage to the parts that form the assembly. 2.6. Sostituire il piattel lo (5), gli O- -ring (3--7) e la molla (6) (Fig. 1). Replace the shutter (5), the O--rings (3--7) and the spring (6) (Fig. 1). 2.7. Rimontare la valvola es eguendo in senso inverso le operazion i descritte nei prec edenti punti. Reassemble the valve by performing in reverse the operations described above.

1

5

4 3 2 7 6

Figura 1 -- Manutenzione valvole DN10 -- DN16 -- DN22 -- DN35. Figure 1 -- DN10 -- DN20 -- DN26 -- DN34 valves maintenance.


SMC0059 ID no. 86204 Rev. 1 -- Page 4/4

3. SOSTITUZIONE PIATTELLO, O--RING, ANELLO DI CENTRAGGIO E MOLLA VALVOLE DN48 REPLACE THE SHUTTER, O--RING, CENTERING RING AND SPRING DN48 VALVES 3.1. Togliere il morsetto di fis saggio (1) (Fig. 2 ) Remove the fixing clamp (1) (Fig. 2). 3.2. Separare la flangia (2) d alla flangia (3) (F ig. 2). Separate the flange (2) from the flange (3) (Fig. 2). 3.3. Togliere l’anello di cen traggio (4) e l’O--ring (5) (Fig. 2). Remove the centering ring (4) and the O--ring (5) (Fig. 2). 3.4. Sfilare il piattello (6 ) e la molla (7) da lla flangia ( 3) (Fig. 2). Remove the shutter (6) and the spring (7) from the flange (3) (Fig. 2).

3.5. Togliere gli O--ring (8) da l piattello (6 ) (Fig. 1). Remove the O--rings (8) from the shutter (6) (Fig. 1). NOTA NOTE La molla (7) e gli O--ring (8) non sono presenti nella valvola montata verticalmente. The spring (7) and the O--ring (8) are not present into the vertical mounting valve. 3.6. Pulire tutte le parti smontate e verificare l’assenza di rotture o danneggiamenti vari sulle parti costituenti l’assieme. Clean all the disassembled parts and check for breakage or damage to the parts that form the assembly. 3.7. Sostituire il piattello (6), gli O- -ring (5--8), anello di centr aggio (4) e la molla (7) (Fig. 1). Replace the shutter (6), the O--rings (5--8), centering ring (4) and the spring (7) (Fig. 1). 3.8. Rimontare la valvola eseg uendo in senso inverso le operazio ni descritte nei prece denti punti. Reassemble the valve by performing in reverse the operations described above.

6

2

1 4 3

5

8 7

Figura 2 -- Manutenzione valvole DN48. Figure 2 -- Maintenance DN48 valves.

SMC0083


ID no. 86685 Rev. 1 - Page 1/5

APPA RECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: GUARNIZIONE COPERCHIO FVG: COVER GASKET



PP600264 PP600265

FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.P.A.

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Guarnizione in gomma siliconica a sezione piena Silicon rubber gasket with solid section MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY



Mensile Monthly





ATTREZZI, STRUMENTI E MATERIALI TOOLS, INSTRUMENTS AND MATERIALS Chiave a brugola: Allen wrench: Ap po si to attrezzo cu neifo rm e fo rnit o da FEDEGARI (co d. PP400070): Proper wedge-shaped tool supplied by FEDEGARI (cod. PP400070):


ACP

Nome Name

MMS

Data Date

28/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/10/2004


SMC0083 ID no. 86685 Rev. 1 - Page 2/5

OPERAZIONI OPERATIONS Le seguenti verifiche e manutenzioni devono essere eseguite a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks andmaintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off. 1.

CONTROLLO GUARNIZIONE GASKET CHECKING •

•

•

•

•

Ruotare il coperchio in posizione di apertura (fig. 1). Rotate the cover at the opening position (fig. 1). Controllare la forma e la consistenza della guarnizione (fig. 2): non deve presentare rotture, screpolature o risultare secca. Controllare la perfetta tenuta della guarnizione. Check the shape and the consistency of the gasket (fig. 2): it has not to be dry or have breaking or crazing. Check the gasket’s seal. Controllare che non ci siano particelle metalliche o di altro materiale (vetro, etc.) penetrate nella massa della guarnizion e. Check there are not metal or other material particles (glass, etc.) in the gasket’s mass. Controllare che non si manifestino fenomeni di incollaggio della guarnizione (dovuti per esempio ad uso di qualche agente chimico per la pulizia della macchina). Check there are not cases of gasket’s jamming (caused by chemical agents used to clean the machine). Se i risultati delle precede nti verific he sono negativi o in certi passare a l punto 2. If the results of the check are negative or doubtful, proceed to point 2.

fig. 1

fig. 2


SMC0083 ID no. 86685 Rev. 1 - Page 3/5

2. SOSTITUZIONE GUARNIZIONE GASKET REPLACEMENT •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Togliere il panne llo l aterale de stro rimuovendo le 4 vit i di bloccaggio (fig. 3 ). Remove the right side panel unscrewing the four locking screws (fig. 3). Ap rire lo ster il izzat or e e svit are le 4 viti ch e bloccan o il c arter del co perch io (fig. 4). Open the sterilizer and unscrew the four screws blocking the cover casing (fig. 4). Togliere il carter. Remove the casing. Mettere in pressione la guarnizione agendo sul comando manuale dell’elettrovalvola E012 (fig. 5) assicurandosi che la di citura rip ortata sia la suddetta. Get up steam the gasket operating with the hand drive of the E012 electro-valve (fig. 5) checking the exact wording. L’aria compressa presente nei condotti e nella sede della guarnizione espellerà la guarnizio ne dalla sua sede. The compressed air in the piping and in the gasket housing will discharge the gasket from its housing. Ag ir e su l co mando manuale dell’ elettr ovalvola E013 per in ter ro mp ere il fl us so dell’ aria all a guarnizione ( fig. 5) assicurandosi c he la dici tura riport ata sia la suddetta. Operate with the hand drive of the E013 electro-valve to stop the air flow to the gasket (fig. 5); check the exact wording. Estrarre com pletamente la guarnizion e dalla sua sede ( fig . 6). Pull out the gasket from its housing (fig. 6). Inserire la nuova guarnizione nella propria sede avendo cura di non danneggiarne i bordi. La guarnizione è stampata in un unico pezzo per cui rispecchia fedelmente il disegno della sede (fig. 6). Settle the new gasket in its housing without damaging the borders. The gasket is printed in one piece reflecting exactly the housing design (fig. 6). Controllare il f unzioname nto dell’ele ttrovalvola di messa in pression e. Check the functioning of getting-up steam electro-valve. Controllare la perfetta tenuta del coperchio; se la guarnizione non tiene, verificare innanzitutto che sia stata montata correttamente, che non ci sia dello sporco residuo o che non sia stata danneggiata durante la fase di montaggio. Check the cover’s seal; if it does not hold, verify the right assembling, check it is not dirty or damaged during the assembling.


fig. 3

E013

fig. 4

E012

fig. 5

SMC0083 ID no. 86685 Rev. 1 - Page 4/5


fig. 6

SMC0083 ID no. 86685 Rev. 1 - Page 5/5


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 1/8

APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT FVG: GENERATORE DI VAPORE FVG: STEAM GENERATOR



GL200070

FEDEGARI AUTOCLAVI S.P.A.

DESCRIZIONE APPARECCHIATURA EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Assieme generatore di vapore Steam generator assembly MANUTENZIONE PREVENTIVA PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FREQUENZA FREQUENCY


Controllo generale: General checking: Pulizia camera generatore di vapore: Steam generator chamber cleaning: Controllo e pulizia termostato: Thermostats checking and cleaning: Sostituzione termostati: Thermostats replacement: Controllo, pulizia e sostituzione resistenza elettrica: Heating element check, cleaning and replacement:

Mensile Monthly Quando necessario When necessary



Chiave a brugola: Allen wrench:

Guanti: Gloves:

Cacciaviti: Screwdrivers:


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ACP

MMS

28/10/2004


Funzione Function

Nome Name

Data Date

ING

FAF

28/10/2004


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 2/8


Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione al pericolo di scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione. The steam generator can reach high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the suitable protection means.

1. •

•

•

•

CONTROLLO GENERALE GENERAL CHECKING Rimuovere il portello anteriore e il portello destro dello sterilizzatore (fig. 1). Remove the front and the right panel of the sterilizer (fig. 1). Durante il funzionamento, verificare che le condotte idrauliche e le linee pneumatiche siano integre, non presentino incrinature o deformazioni; verificare inoltre l’assenza di perdite di liquidi o getti di fluidi in pressione dai raccordi del generatore di vapore (fig. 2). During the work, check that the hydraulic piping and the pneumatic lines are intact, with no cracks or deformations; verify also there are no leaks of liquids or jets of pressurized fluids from the steam generator junctions (fig. 2). Verificare l’integrità fisica della linee elettriche e l’assenza di tratti non isolati, tranciamenti o imbandi con raggi di curvatura troppo stretti. Check the physical integrity of the electric lines and verify there are not uninsulated portions, cuts or slacks with too tight radius of curvature. Verificare l’assenza di rotture, di incrinature o di danneggiamenti vari, sulle parti costituenti il generatore di forming vapore.the steam generator are not broken, cracked or damaged. Check the parts

fig. 1

fig. 2


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 3/8

Il seguente controllo e relativa manutenzione devono essere eseguiti a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.

Assicurarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica e le altre utenze siano interrotte. Check that the electric power supply and the other utilities are disconnected.

2. •

•

•

•

•

PULIZIA CAMERA GENERATORE DI VAPORE STEAM GENERATOR CHAMBER CLEANING Svuotare il generatore divapore aprendo il rubinetto discarico (fig. 3). Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock (fig.3). Togliere il morsetto di fissaggio che unisce la condotta del vapore al generatore, l’anello di centraggio e l’O-ring (fig. 4). Remove the fixing clamp connecting the steam pipe to the generator, the centering ring and the Oring (fig. 4). Procedere al lavaggio utilizzando soluzione disincrostante o acido acetico diluito (fig. 5). Wash the steam generator with a descaling solution or by diluted acetic acid (fig. 5). Rimontare l’anello di centraggio, l’O-ring e il morsetto di fissaggio. Reassemble the centering ring, the O-ring and the fixing clamp. Ad istallazione ultimata chiudere il rubinetto di scarico e riempire il generatore di vapore con acqua deionizzata. After the installation, close the drain cock and fill the steam generator with deionized water.

fig. 3

fig. 4

fig. 5


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 4/8

NOTA NOTE L’acqua deionizzata deve avere caratteristiche di conducibilità ben precise. Una minore conducibilità dell’acqua consente infatti di minimizzare le operazioni di pulizia del generatore di vapore dalle incrostazioni calcaree. Si consiglia di utilizzare acque con conducibilità di 5 µS/cm (a 25° C); è possibile utilizzare acque con conducibilità superiore comportando però un aumento della frequenza di manutenzione del generatore di vapore. Si sconsiglia decisamente l’utilizzo di acqua con conducibilità superiore a 30 µS/cm. Le seguenti informazioni possono essere così riassunte. - Conducibilità raccomandata: da 2 a 15 µS/cm, con ispezione del generatore ogni anno. - Conducibilità ammessa: fino a 30 µS/cm, con ispezione del generatore di vapore ogni sei mesi. The deionized water has to have precise conductivity characteristics. A lower conductivity reduces the cleaning operations of the steam generator from calcareous scales. We recommend to use water with a conductivity of 5 µS/cm (a 25° C); waters with a higher conductivity can be equally used but they increase the maintenance frequency of the steam generator. We recommend to avoid using water with a conductivity higher than 30 µS/cm. Informations summing up. - Recommended conductivity: 2 to 15 µS/cm, inspecting the steam generator every year. - Admitted conductivity: up to 30 µS/cm, inspecting the steam generator every six months. Il seguente controllo e relativa manutenzione devono essere eseguiti a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.

Assicurarsi che l’alimentazione elettrica e le altre utenze siano interrotte. Check that the electric power supply and the other utilities are disconnected.

3. •

CONTROLLO E PULIZIA TERMOSTATO THERMOSTATS CHECKING AND CLEANING Sfilare il bulbo del termostato dal generatore di vapore (fig. 6); verificare l’assenza di incrostazioni e se necessario pulirlo impiegando una soluzione disincrostante o acidi acetico diluito. Unthread the thermostat bulb from the steam generator (fig. 6)and check it is not scaled; if necessary, clean it with a descaling solution or diluted acetic acid.

fig. 6


•

•

•

•

SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 5/8

Immergere il bulbo del termostato di controllo della temperatura massima del generatore di vapore in un bagno termostatico a 169°C. Posizionare su ON l’interruttore generale e verificare che al raggiungimento della temperatura di ≈169°C, l’interruttore generale si riporti in OFF arrestando il funzionamento della macchina. In caso di mancato funzionamento del termostato, procedere alla sua sostituzione. Plunge the thermostat bulb which controls the maximum temperature of the steam generator in a 169 °C temperature bath. Put the main switch on ON position and check that, when the temperature reaches 169°C, the main switch is on OFF position again stopping the working. If the thermostat does not work, replace it. Sfilare il bulbo dal bagno termostatico, attendere che si raffreddi e rimontarlo sul corpo del generatore di vapore. Unthread the bulb from the temperature bath. When it cools, reassemble it on the steam generator’s body. Scollegare elettricamente il termostato. Disconnect the thermostat. Svitare le 2 viti a testa esagonale e rimuovere il termostato. Unscrew the 2 hex head cap screws and remove the thermostat. Premere con l’aiuto di un cacciavite il pulsante di ripristino interno accessibile dall’apposita feritoia. Press, with a screwdriver, the internal reset button, accessible from the proper loophole.

4. SOSTITUZIONE TERMOSTATI THERMOSTATS REPLACEMENT •

•

•

Scollegare elettricamente iI termostato. Disconnect the thermostat. Svitare le 2 viti a testa esagonale e rimuovere il termostato. Unscrew the 2 hex head cap screws and remove the thermostat. Montare un nuovo termostato seguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte in precedenza. Install a new thermostat following the operations above described in reverse order.

NOTA: NOTE: Lo sterilizzatore si blocca quando l’acqua nel generatore di vapore giunge al livello minimo. A causa delle inerzie termiche dei componenti, l’acqua residua continua però a riscaldarsi e ad evaporare surriscaldando il generatore di vapore; ciò fa intervenire il termostato che manda in blocco lo sterilizzatore. Per riprendere le normali attività dello sterilizzatore, sarà necessario riportare a livello l’acqua nel generatore di vapore e poi ripristinare il termostato come descritto sopra. The sterilizer stops working when the water arrives at a minimum level in the steam generator. Because of the thermal inertia the residual water goes on evaporating, overheating the steam generator causing the block of the machine. To restore the activities of the sterilizer, bring back to level the water in the steam generator. 5. CONTROLLO, PULIZIA E SOSTITUZIONE RESISTENZA ELETTRICA HEATING ELEMENT CHECKING, CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT Il seguente controllo e relativa manutenzione devono essere eseguiti a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 6/8

Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione. The steam generator reaches high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the suitable protection means.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Svuotare il generatore di vapore aprendo il rubinetto di scarico come in fig. 3. Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock as in fig. 3. Scollegare le connessioni elettriche delle resistenze. Disconnect the heating element connections. Svitare le 4 viti utilizzando una chiave esagonale. Unscrew the 4 screws using an hex wrench. Sfilare la resistenza e verificare l’assenza d’incrostazioni, se necessario pulirla impiegando una soluzione disincrostante o acidi acetico diluito. Sostituire in caso di danneggiamenti. Unthread the heating element and check it is not scaled: if necessary, clean with a descaling solution or diluted acetic acid. Replace if damaged. Sostituire l’O-ring pulendo accuratamente la sede. Replace the O-ring after cleaning its seat. Rimontare i componenti e ricollegare le connessioni elettriche della resistenza. Reassemble the components and reconnect the electrical connections of the heating element.

fig. 7


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 7/8

CONTROLLO, PULIZIA E SOSTITUZIONE INTERRUTTORE DI LIVELLO LEVEL SWITCH CHECKING, CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT Il seguente controllo e relativa manutenzione devono essere eseguiti a sterilizzatore spento. The following checks and maintenance have to be carried out while the sterilizer is switched off.

Il generatore di vapore raggiunge elevate temperature. Prestare la massima attenzione per pericolo scottature. Utilizzare idonei mezzi di protezione. The steam generator reaches high temperatures. Pay the utmost attention to burn risks, use the suitable protection means.

•

•

•

•

•

•

Svuotare il generatore di vapore aprendo il rubinetto di scarico come in fig. 3. Empty the steam generator opening the drain cock as in fig. 3. Scollegare le connessioni elettriche dell’interruttore di livello (fig. 8). Disconnect the electrical connections of the level switches (fig. 8). Rimuovere gli interruttori di livello dal generatore di vapore e ripulire le rispettive sedi. Remove the level switches from the steam generator and clean their seats. Smontare gli interruttori di livello come da figura 9 e verificare l’assenza di incrostazioni e se necessario pulirli impiegando soluzioni disincrostanti o acido acetico diluito. Sostituire l’interruttore di livello in caso di danneggiamenti. Disassemble the level switches as in fig. 9 and check they are not scaled and, if necessary, clean them with a descaling solution or diluted acetic acid. If damaged, replace the lever switch. Sostituire gli O-ring pulendo accuratamente le loro sedi. Replace the O-rings cleaning their seats. Rimontare i componenti eseguendo in senso inverso le operazioni descritte in precedenza. Reassemble the components following the operations above described in reverse order.

fig. 8


SMC0084 ID no. 86686 Rev. 1 - Page 8/8

fig. 9

7.

•

•

CONTROLLO FINALE FINAL CHECK Verificare che i morsetti elettrici siano ben serrati. Check that electric clamp are tightened. Verificare che le condutture idrauliche e le linee pneumatiche siano state ripristinate correttamente. Check that hydraulic piping and the pneumatic lines are correctly restored.

•

•

Alimentare elettricamente il generatore di vapore portando su ON l’interruttore generale e verificare il corretto funzionamento della resistenza e dei termostati. Supply power the steam generator putting on ON position the general switch and check the correct work of the heating elements and thermostats. Verificare l’efficienza della valvola di sicurezza e l’assenza di perdite dai raccordi e dalle guarnizioni di tenuta. Check the efficiency of the safety valve and there are not leaks from the connections and the gaskets.

4 10 L A 5 IU 1 D I 0 V 8 D N O TI IS U O GH T IN IW WS N O L O I L S ON F E S M I E D CR N A SFO RN E L O TI O A T C I D N I

H -m 8 6 7 2 ) m Om IS ( s S n N o i O IT sn A e m i C I d D l N I a in E m C o N N A R E L O T

0

2

4

+-

0 0 0 2

0 o t 0

0 0 0 1

0 o t 0

0 0 4

0 to 0

0 2 1

0 o 0 t 4

0 3

2 to 1

6

0 o t 3

3

5 . 0

0

2 . 1

2

+-

0

.8 0

1

+-

0

o t 6

to 3

2

.5 0 +-

3 . 0

9

+-

.0 2 +-

8

.1 0 +-

.1 0 +-

8

3

1

N O I T P I R C S E D N O I S I V E R

5

6 0

0

0

0

*KK 00 0318

7 0

0

0

0

. K H C

0

0

0

0

. S E D

0

0

0

0

E T A D

0

0

0

0

. V E R

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E V I S U L C X E E H T S I G IN W A R D S I H T

.) Y N A P M O C E H (T . A . p . S

D E R IS R E H T F Y S N N A A T P R M R E O H C IT E E H ,N T F N O IO N T C O I U T R A T S IZ N R O O C H T R U O A F N D E T E T I S R U W E B R T IO O R N P N Y A N C A T G U IN O W H A T I R W D

. D E C U D O R P E R Y L L A IT R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P

. S T H IG R N W O S IT

D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y D N IR A P H T M Y O N C A E O T H T

POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG 1 PM102685 2 PM102394 000 3 PM102467 000 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PM200429

* CC050150 * PP100897 * GM100094 PP600579 * CC050092 * PM102466

000 000 000

REV 00 03 00

QTY SPA 1 1 1

01 00 00 02 01 00 00

1 1 1 1 2 1 1

Classe di appartenenza :

MACHINE FO

Material

Scale

GROUP IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

DESCRIPTION

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

1:1 23/04/2004 fag

ATTACCO SONDE VALIDAZIONE DN35

DWG. NO.

GM101234

R R

L A U

to

0 0 0 4

+-

to

0 0 0 2

+-

0 0 4

to

0 0 0 1

+-

0 2 1

to

0 0 4

0 0 0 2

5 ID 1 IV H 0 D -m 8 IN 8 OT 76 S 2 I U O O) GH T IS m INIW S (m s n WS N IO sio ON T LO I A n e LS m N IC id OE Dl F N a in S IM I m ED E o CN CR N O NF A AS R RN LE E IO O LT T OA T IC

0 0 0 1

to

0 2 1

6

o t

0 3

3

to

6

5 . 0

to

3

0 3

D N I

2

.2 1

.8 0

15

.5 0 +-

3 . 0 +-

5

.2 0 +-

16

7

.1 0 +-

.1 0 +-

19

17

2 20

19 1 N IO T IP R C S E D N O I IS V E R

6

13

20 3

11 8

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P

E IV S U L C X E .) E Y H N T A S I P M G O IN C WE A H R T D .( A IS .p H . T S

0

0

0

10

14

4 9

. K H C . S E D

0

E T A D

0

. V E R

0

D E R IS R H E T F S Y N N A A R P T M O R . C E H D E T E H IE C U T F ,N D O N O R N IO P IO T E T C R A U Y R L Z I T R S L I O N A T H R T O U C A A R P N N O E E F V T D E IT E R R S U WE O R B Y T IO T R R O A P N P D Y N A IR N C A H T G T U N Y O IW N H A A IT R O WD T

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

12

000 0 0 00 000 0 0 000 0 3 00 000 0 5 00 00 000 0 0 000 0 0 000 0 0 000 0 0 000 00

7 CA031211 6 PP206064 5 GM802390 4 PM150012 000 3 PP151200 2 PP151196 1 CJ070047 000 POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG

18 *KK000281

. S T H G I R N W O S T I D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y N A P M O C E H T

CA021301 CA181061 PM150016 GM100017 CC050147 * PP100424 * PP805801 CB020030 CA021282 CA103071 CA191061 CA102051 CA191041

00 00 00 02 01 01 01 REV QTY

Classe di appartenenza : studi_temp

MACHINE FVG3

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

1:2 13/07/2004

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

mis

RUBINETTO IN FACCIATA FVG3

0

DWG. NO.

GM15

L A 5U I 1D I 0V 8D N OIT IS U GO TH I N I W WS ON L O I L S OEN F S IM E D CR N A FSO RN E L TIO O T A IC D IN

H m 8 6 7 2 ) Om IS (m s S n N io s O TI n e A m IC id D l a IN in E m C o N N A R E L TO

0

2

4

+-

0 0 0 2

0 to 0

0 0 0 1

0 to 0

0 0 4

0 o t 0

0 2 1

to 0 4

0 3

0 2 to 1

6

0 to 3

3

5 . 0

0

2 . 1

2

+-

0

.8 0

1

+-

0

to 6

o t 3

1 4

5 . 0 +-

6

.3 0 +-

.2 0

3

+-

1 . 0 +-

5

.1 0 +-

2

N O I T IP R C S E D O IN S I V E R

. K H C . S E D E T A D . V E R

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E IV S U L C X E E H T S I G N I W A R D S I H T

). Y N A P M O C E H T ( . .A .p S

S I H T Y N A P M O C E H T F O N IO T A Z I R O H T U A N E T T I R W R IO R P Y N A T U O H IT W

D E R R E F S N A R T R E H IT E N , N O IT C U R T S N

. D E C U D O R P E R

Y L L A I O T C R R A O P F N D E E V S E U R E B O Y T T O R N A N P A D C R I H G T N I Y W N A A R O D T

. S T H G I R N W O S IT D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y N A P M O C E H T

6 PP650044 04 5 CC150049 000 01 4 GM350077 000 0 2 3 GM350183 02 2 PM350269 01 1 PM350268 01 POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG REV

* * *

*KK000255

1 1 1 1 1 1 QTY SPA


MACHINE FVG

Material

Scale


Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

DESCRIPTION

1:1 25/05/2004 Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

fag

RITEGNO 1/2" GENERATORE FVG

DWG. NO.

GM350255

0 0 0 2

L A U 5 D 1 IV 0 I H 8 D m N O TI 8 6 S 7 ) I U 2 O G TH Om m IN I ISS s( W n WS N o si N O O n TI e L O I L S A m i O EN IC d F D l a S M I N I n E D E i CR C m o N N N FO A A R SN R E O LE L IT O T O A T C I D IN

0

2

4

+-

0

2 . 1

2

+-

0 to 0

0 0 0 1

0 to 0

0 0 4

0 o t 0

0 2 1

0 to 4

0 3

to 2 1

6

0 to 3

0

.8 0

1

+-

0

.5 0

0

3

to 6

5 . 0

to 3

1 4

+-

6

3 . 0 +-

.0 2

3

+-

1 . 0 +-

5

.1 0 +-

2

N O I T P I R C S E D N O I S I V E R

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

. K H C

0

0

0

0

. S E D

0

0

0

0

E T A D

0

. V E R

0

0

0

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E V I S U L C X E E H T S I G N I W A R D S I H T

S I H T Y N A P

.) Y N A P M O C E H T ( . .A p .S

D E R R E F S N A R T R E H IT E N , N O IT C U R T S N O C R O F

M O . C D E E C H T U F D O O R N P E O I R T A Y Z L I L R A IT O H R T A U P A N N D E E V E T T I S E R U R E O W B Y R T T O I O R R N A P N P Y A D N C R I A H G T T U N I Y O W N H A IT A R O W D T

. S T H IG R N W O S T I D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y N A P M O C E H T

6 PP650044 04 5 CC150049 000 01 4 GM350077 000 0 2 3 GM350183 02 2 GM350229 00 1 PM350253 00 POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG REV

* * *

*KK000255

1 1 1 1 1 1 QTY SPA


MACHINE FO

Material

Scale


Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

DESCRIPTION

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

1:1 12/03/2004 fag

RITEGNO DN10 F LANGIATO

DWG. NO.

GM350240

13 11 12 L A U

0 0 0 2

5 ID 1V 0 ID H 8 IN 8-m OT 76 S 2 I U O ) Om GH IT IS INW S (m s n WS N o ON IO nsi L IO T A e LS C I im ON D ld FE N a M in SI I m ED E o R CN CO N NF A AS R RN E E IO LO LT T OA T IC

0 0 0 4

2 +-

to

0 0 0 2

+-

0 0 4

to

0 0 0 1

+-

0 2 1

to

0 0 4

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

5 . 0

5

.2 1

0 0 0 1

0 3

D IN

to

13

.8 0

.5 0

8

+-

11

.3 0 +-

.2 0 +-

.1 0

6

+-

.1 0 +-

Orientare in b ase alla versione di autoclave 4 N O I T P I R C S E D N O I IS V E R

14

7

8

9

10

Orientare in b ase alla versione di autoclave

6 0

0

0

0

7

0

0

F A F

0

0

0

L .S M E E D

0

0

0

5 0 / 5 0 / 6 0

0

0

0


E IV S U L C X E E H T IS G IN W A R D IS H T

.) Y N A P M O C E H T ( . .A p . S

C

E T A D . V E R

1 0

D E R IS R H E T F S Y N N A A R P T M R . O E C H D E T E H IE C T U F ,N D O N O R N IO P E IO T C R T U A R Y L IZ T R S L IA O N T H O R T A U C P A R N O N E F E T D V E IT E S R R U W E O R B Y T IO T R R O A P N P Y N D N A IR A C H T G T U N O IW Y N H A A IT R O W D T

6

. K H

0

8 7

2 3

1 2

GRP395 *KK000281

3 . S T H G I R N W O S IT D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L IL W Y N A P M O C E H T

14

1

CB020030

13

2

CD020081

12

1

GM101256

11

2

CJ000100

10

1

GM802610

9

1

8

4

GM802696 gm100017

7

4

6

4

* *

5

1

PM102761

4

1

CJ060386

3

2

PP805810

2

2

CB020146

1

1

GM802421

POS QTY

6

CC050147 P100424 P

*

DWG.NO/CO


7

MACHINE FVG-2

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

8

1:2.5 06/05/2005

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

sat

GRP CARICO ARIA-VAP.-V.S.GENERATORE

0

DWG. NO.

GM250481

L A 5 IU 1 D I 0 V 8 D N O TI IS U O GH T IN IW WS N O L O I L S ON F E S M I E D CR N A SFO RN E L O TI O A T C I D N I

0 0 0 2

H -m 8 6 7 2 ) m Om S I ( s S n N o i O IT sn A e m i C I d D l N I a in E m C o N N A R E L O T

0

2

4

+-

0

2 . 1

0 o t 0

0 0 0 1

0 o t 0

2

+-

0 0 4

0 0 o t 0 1

+-

0 2 1

0 o 0 t 4

0 3

2 to 1

6

0 o t 3

3

o t 6

5 . 0

0

to 3

3

.8 0

.5 0 +-

3 . 0 +-

.0 2

4

+-

.1 0 +-

.1 0

2

+-

N IO T P I R C S E D

0

0

0

A T IN T S ID O T N E M A N R IO G G A

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

S S I E M D

0

0

0

4 0 0 2 / 0 1 / 4 1

E T A D

0

0

0

1 0

. V E R

O IN S I V E R

1

. K H C .

GRP367 I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E V I S U L C X E E H T S I G IN W A R D S I H T

IS H T Y N A P

M O C E H T F O N O I T A IZ R O H T U A .) Y N A P M O C E H (T . A . p . S

N E T T I R W R IO R P Y N A T U

O H T I W

D E R R E F S N A R T R E H IT E N , N O IT C U R T S N O C R O F

KIT KG66 . D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P

. S T H IG R N W O S IT D N E F E D Y L D L E S A U G E E L B L T L I O N W N Y A D N C IR A P H G T M IN Y O W N C A A E R O H D T T

4

1

PM801421

3 2

1 1

PP830013 CD340115

1

1

GM802616

POS QTY

*

DWG.NO/CODE SPA


MACHINE FVG 1-2-3

Material

Scale


Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

DESCRIPTION

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

1:5 17/07/2004 mis

BIDONE POMPA ACQUA POMPA FVG (KG66)

DWG. NO.

GM250478

L A U

5 ID 1 IV 0 8D

to

0 0 0 4

+-

0 0 0 1

to

0 0 0 2

+-

0 0 4

to

0 0 0 1

to

0 0 4

0 0 0 2

IN OT S I U O GH IT N I W WS ON LO I LS N OE F S IM ED R CO NF AS RN E IO LT OA T IC D N I

H -m 8 6 7 2 O )m IS m S (s Nn IO sio T n A e IC im D ld N I a in E m Co NN A R E L O T

0 2 1

0 3

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

5 . 0

2

CR001

.2 1 .8 0 +-

6

2

.5 0 +-

3

.3 0 +-

.2 0

13

5

2

+-

.1 0 +-

.1 0 +-

4 2

0

0

0

0

0

0

A N I C I F F O E T S IE H C I R O D N O C E S O T A IC F I D O M

0

0

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 1 1

F O Y T R E P O R P

E V I S U L C X E .) E Y H N T A IS P M G O N I C WE A H R T D .( IS .A H .p T S

E T A D . V E R

1 0

D E R IS R H E T F S Y N N A A R P T M R O E . C H D E T E H IE C T U F ,N D O N O R N IO P T IO C E R T A U Y R L Z I T L R S A O N IT H T O R U C A A R P N O N E F E T D V E E IT S R U R W E O R B Y T O I T R R O A P N P Y N D N A R I A C H T G T U N Y O IW N H A A T I R O W D T

CV14

7

C

IS M

0

11

10 . K H

0

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F

GRP366 KG40 FVG1-2

R005

8

. S E D

0

0

N O I T P I R C S E D N O I IS V E R

0

0

0

12

9 14

1

14

4

13

1

CA01179 CF04001

12

4

CA10207

11

4

CA18107

10

4

CC11000

9

1

PP805801

8

1

CB02003

7

1

CJ080026

6

1

CB02013

5

1

CB08000

4 3

1 1

CB02013 CB02014

2

3

CB02011

1

1

PP206082

*

P OS QT Y . S T H G I R N W O S T I D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L IL W Y N A P M O C E H T

DWG.NO/C

Classe di appartenenza : GRP DISTRIBUTORI

MACHINE FVG 1-2

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION


Des.

Treatments

Chk

pib

GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA "KG41" FVG1-2

0

DWG. NO.

GM250477

CR001 L A U

to

0 0 0 4

+-

0 0 0 1

to

0 0 0 2

+-

0 0 4

to

0 0 0 1

+-

0 2 1

to

0 0 4

0 0 0 2

5 ID 1V 0 ID H -m 8 IN 8 OT 76 S 2 I U O O) GH S m IT I INW S (m s n WS N o IO si ON T LO I A n e LS im N OE IC D ld F N a M S I I in m ED E o R CN CO N NF A AS R RN LE E IO O LT T OA T IC

0 3

D IN

to

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

5 . 0

.2 1

2

.8 0

3

13

.5 0 +-

5 2

.3 0

0 2 1

6

6

2

+-

.2 0 +-

.1 0

4

+-

.1 0 +-

12 1

2

11

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0


E V I S U L C X E .) E Y H N T A IS P M G O N I C WE A H R T D .( IS .A H .p T S

0

A N I C I F F O E T S IE H C I R O D N O C E S O T A IC IF D O M

CV14 N O I T P I R C S E D N O I IS V E R

0

. K H

0

IS M

. S E D

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 1 1

0

0 D E R IS R H E T F S Y N N A A R P T M R O E C H E T H IE T F ,N O N N IO IO T T C A U Z I R T R S O N H T O U C A R N O E F T D E IT S R U WE R B O I T R O P N N Y A N A C T G U N O IW H A T I R WD

7

GRP365 KG41 FVG3

R005 10

8 14

4

13

1

CF0

12

4

CA

11

4

CA

10

4

CC

9

C

14

E T A D . V E R

1 0

AL ' B001' . D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P D R I H T Y N A O T

. S T H G I R N W O S T I D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L IL W Y N A P M O C E H T

CA

9

1

PP8

8

1

CB0

7

1

CJ0

6 5

1 1

CB0 CB0

4

1

CB0

3

1

CB0

2

3

CB0

1

1

POS QTY

PP2

*

DWG.


MACHINE FVG3

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION


Des.

Treatments

Chk

pib

GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA " KG41" x FVG3

0

DWG. NO.

GM250476

11

12

15

6 7

10 L A U

0 0 0 2

5D I 1V 0I 8D IN

OT S I U O H GT INIW WS ON LO I LS N OE F IM SD ER CO NF AS RN E IO LT OA T IC

H -m 8 6 7 2 O) m IS m S (s Nn IO sio T n A e IC im D ld a N I in E m Co NN A R E L O T

0 0 0 1

0 0 4

0 2 1

0 3

D N I

to

0 0 0 4

to

0 0 0 2

+-

to

0 0 0 1

+-

to

0 0 4

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

5 . 0

8

2 +-

6

.2 1

7

.8 0

13

.5 0 +-

8

.3 0 +-

.2 0 +-

.1 0 +-

.1 0 +-

15 14 Orientare in base alla versione di autoclave N O I T P I R C S E D N IO IS V E R

9

5

16

7

Orientare in base alla versione di autoclave

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

6 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E V I S U L C X E

S I H T Y N A P M

.) E Y H N T A S I P M G O IN C WE A H R T D .( IS .A H .p T S

C

. V E R

0

D E R R E F S N A R T

R O F D E S U E B T O N N A C G N I W A R D

7 6 1

E T A D

0

R E H IT E N , N O I T C U R T S N O C

8

. K H . S E D

0

0

O C E H T F O N IO T A IZ R O H T U A N E T T I R W R IO R P Y N A T U O H IT W

8

2 3

. D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P

*KK000281

4

. S T H IG R N W O S IT D N E F E D

Y L L A G E L L L I W D Y N IR A H P T M Y O N C A E O H T T

GRP364

2

7 8

6

GM802610 CD020081 CB020030 CJ000098 GM101256 CJ000100 PM102761 GM802437 GM100017 * CC050147

*

01 00 00 00 02 00 00 02 000 0 3 00 000

6 PP100424 000 5 CJ060365 4 PP805801 3 PP805810 2 CB020146 000 1 GM802421 POS DWG.NO/CODE CFG

05 00 00 00 02 REV


MACHINE FVG-3

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

1:2.5

19/11/2003

DESCRIPTION

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

mis

GRP CARICO ARIA-VAP.-V.S.GENERATORE

0

DWG. NO.

GM250

L A U

0 0 0 2

5D I 1V H 0 ID -m 8 IN 8 OT 76 S 2 I U O O) H S m GT I INIW S (m s n WS N IO sio ON T LO I A n e LS m N IC id OE Dl F N a IM I in SD m E E o R CN CO N NF A AS R RN LE E IO O LT T OA T IC

0 0 0 1

0 0 4

0 2 1

D N I

to

0 0 0 4

+-

to

0 0 0 2

+-

to

0 0 0 1

+-

to

0 0 4

0 3

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

5 . 0

2

2

.2 1

.8 0

6

CR001

.5 0 +-

.3 0 +-

.2 0

5

+-

.1 0

3

+-

.1 0 +-

12

4 1

CV14

0

0

0


0

0

0

0

0

0

0

S IS E M D

0

0

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 0 1

11

0



S I H T Y N A P M


C

R O F D E S U E B T O N N A C G N I W A R D

13

13

4

CA0

12

4

CA1

11

4

CA1

10

4

CC1

8

E T A D

9

. V E R

D E R R E F S N A R T R E H IT E N , N O I T C U R T S N O C

7

R005 . K H

1 0

0

GRP361 FVG 1-2 STANDAR

10

.

0

3

N O I T P I R C S E D N IO IS V E R

AL 'B001'

9

1

PP8

8

1

CB0

7

1

CJ0

6

1

CB0

5 4

1 1

CB0 CB0

3

2

CB0

2

1

CF0

1

1

P OS QT Y . D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P



PP2

*

DW G.


MACHINE FVG GROUP

1-2

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

Material

Scale

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy) 19/11/2003

Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

1:2

mis

GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA FVG1-2

0

DWG. NO.

GM250

L A U

0 0 0 2

5D I 1V H 0 ID -m 8 IN 8 OT 76 S 2 I U O O) H S m GT I INIW S (m s n WS N IO sio ON T LO I A n e LS m N IC id OE Dl F N a IM I in SD m E E o R CN CO N NF A AS R RN LE E IO O LT T OA T IC

0 0 0 1

0 0 4

0 0 0 4

+-

0 0 0 2

+-

to

0 0 0 1

to

0 0 4

0 3

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

0 2 1

D N I

to

to

5 . 0

2

10

.2 1

.8 0 +-

.5 0

5

+-

.3 0 +-

CR001

.2 0 +-

.1 0 +-

4

.1 0 +-

12

11

0

0

A IN C I F F O E T S IE H IC R O D N O C E S O T A IC F D O M

0

3

2

CV14


2

6 9

1

R005

. K H

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

S IS E M D

C

7

.

0

0

0

0

0


S I H T Y N A P M


4 0 0 /2 1 /1 8 0

0


E T A D . V E R

1 0

8 13

D E R R E F S N A R T R E H IT E N , N O I T C U R T S N O C R O F D E S U E B T O N N A C G N I W A R D

. D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P



AL 'B001'

GRP360 FVG3 STANDAR 13

4

CA01

12

4

CA10

11

4

CA18

10

1

9

CF04

4

CC11

8

1

PP80

7

1

CB02

6

1

CJ08

5

1

CB02

4

1

CB08

3

1

CB02

2

2

CB02

1

1

PP20

POS QT Y

*

DW G.


MACHINE FVG3

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status


Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

1:2

mis

GRP COMPRESSORE ARIA FVG3

0

DWG. NO.

GM250

7

11 L A U

to

0 0 0 4

0 0 0 1

to

0 0 0 2

+-

0 0 4

to

0 0 0 1

+-

0 0 0 2

I 5D 1V H 0 ID -m 8 IN 8 OT 76 S 2 I U O O) H S m GT I I (m N I WSs n WS N IO sio ON T LO I A n e LS im ON IC D ld FE N a in S IM I m ED E o CN CR N O NF A AS R RN LE E IO O LT T OA T IC

to

0 0 4

to

0 2 1

6

o t

0 3

3

to

6

5 . 0

to

3

0 2 1

0 3

D N I

4

DALLA CAMERA

2

E006 R002

2 +-

.2 1

2

.8 0

4

3

1

3

.5 0 +-

3 . 0 +-

.2 0 +-

.1 0 +-

3

11

2

.1 0

E007

+-

3 8

2

7 4

4

0

0

0

O IC R A C S O T T E IN B U R E N O I Z I S O P A T A IC F I D O M

5 6


9

2

5

VM7

4

ALLO SCARICO

ALLO SCARICO 11 . K H

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

S is E m D

0

0

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 5 1

0

0

0

I V A L C O T U A I R A G E D E F F O Y T R E P O R P E IV S U L C X E . ) E Y H N T A IS P M G O IN C WE A H R T D .( S I .A H .p T S

D E R S I R H E T F S Y N N A A P R T M R O E . C H D E E T I C H E U T N F , D O N O R N O I P E IO T C R T U A Y R Z L I T L R S A O N IT H O R T C A U A R P N N O E E F V T D E T E I S R R U W E O Y R B T O I T R R O A P N P N D Y A N C IR A H T G T U N Y O I N H W A A IT R O W D T

SCARICO

9

1

CJ0700

8

1

GM8024

7

2

CD0200

*KK000281

6

1

E T A D . V E R

1 0

. S T H IG R N W O S IT D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y N A P M O C E H T

CJ0001

PM102

GRP256 FVG 1-2-3

C .

1

10 1

5 4

CJ0000

3 5

gm1000 5

* *

PP10042

QTY

*

DW G.NO

3

5

2 1

PM102

1

POS

CC050147 GM3502

Classe di appartenenza :studi_temp

MACHINE FVG 1-2-3

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status


Surface finish

Des.

Treatments

Chk

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

1:1.5

mis

GRUPPO SCARICO CAMERA FVG

0

DWG. NO.

GM250

AL W001 L A U I 5D 1V 0 ID 8 IN OT S I U O H GT I N I W WS ON LO I LS N OE F S IM ED R CO NF AS RN E IO LT OA T IC D N I

to

0 0 0 4

+-

to

0 0 0 2

+-

to

0 0 0 1

+-

to

0 0 4

0 3

to

0 2 1

6

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

0 0 0 2

H -m 8 6 7 2 O )m IS m S (s Nn IO sio T n A e IC im D ld N I a in E m Co NN A R E L O T

0 0 0 1

0 0 4

0 2 1

5 . 0

2

.2 1

.8 0 .5 0 +-

.3 0 +-

.2 0 +-

B001

.1 0 +-

.1 0 +-

M014

P006

0

0

0


0

0

0

0

. K H . S E D


4

8

12 Dal CV14

3 10

A (1 : 1) COLLEGAMENTI

2 7

12

6 11 C

0

0

0

IS M

0

0

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 3 0

0

0

0


S I H T Y N A P M O C

E H T F O N IO T A Z I R O H T U E A V I N S E U T L T C I X E . R W E ) R H Y N T A IO S R I P P G M O Y IN C N WE A A H T R T U D .( O H IS .A T H .p I T S W

E T A D . V E R

1 0 D E R R E F S N A R T R . E H D IT E C E U N , D N O R O I P T E C R U Y R L T L S A N IT O R C A R P O N F E D V E E S R U O E Y B T T R O A N P N D A IR C H G T N I Y WN A A R O D T

1 5 9

CR002 13

A . S T H G I R N W O S T I D N E F E D Y L L A G E L L L I W Y N A P M O C E H T

13 CB100022 12 CA011501 11 CB020124 10 CB020036 9 CB020030 8 GM100017 7 * CC050147 6 * PP100424 5 CH010039 4 CD240042 3 PM102760 2 GM802406 1 GL500205 POS DWG.NO/CODE

*KK000281 GRP352

000 0 000 0 000 0 000 000 000

CFG REV QTY

Classe di appartenenza : studi_temp

MACHINE FVG GROUP

2-3

IMPIANTO IDRAULICO

DESCRIPTION

Material

Scale

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)


Des.

mis

MONTAGGIO SERBATOIO ARIA COMPRESSA Treatments

Chk

0

DWG. NO.

GM250463

L A U 5D I 1V 0 ID 8 IN OT S I U O H GT INIW WS ON LO I LS N OE F S IM ED R CO NF AS RN E IO LT OA T IC D N I

0 0 0 2

H -m 8 6 7 2 O) m IS m S (s Nn IO sio T n A e IC im D ld a N I in E m Co NN A R E L O T

0 0 0 1

0 0 4

0 2 1

to

0 0 0 4

+-

to

0 0 0 2

+-

to

.8 0 +-

to

0 2 1

to

0 3

3

to

6

to

3

P001

.5 0

0 0 4

0 3

26

6

.2 1

0 0 o t 0 1

6

5 . 0

2

24

+-

.3 0

.2 0 .1 0

21

18

0

0

0

20

. K H

0

0

0

0

0

S IS E M D

0

0

0

4 0 0 /2 1 /1 8 0

0

0

0


S I H T Y N A P M

C .


R E H IT E N , N O I T C U R T S N O C R O F D E S U E B T O N N A C G N I W A R D

19

COLLEGARE AL DISPOSITIVO DI SICUREZZA

PA01 CARICO ACQUA DAL SERBATOIO B002

2

12 14

E

CARICO DAL SERBATOIO B001

P002

D P003

23

15

22 9

VR01

16

26

4

CA240

25

2

CA051

24 23

2 2

CA461 CA181

22

4

CA011

21

2

CA051

20

2

CA461

19

2

CA051

18

1

CA051

17

1

CC050

16

1

PP805

15

1

GM802

14

1

CB020

13

1

PM100

12

1

PM801

11

2

CB020

10

1

CJ0800

9

4

CB020

8

1

CC120

7

1

CA490

4

6

1

CD230

COLLEGARE AL GENERATORE DI VAPORE

5 4

1 1

CD120 CB020

3

1

GM802

2

1

GM802

1

1

11

PP206

POS QTY



E

26

13

R001 . D E C U D O R P E R Y L L IA T R A P N E V E R O Y T R A P

A

M002

. V E R

1 0

SCARICO SOVRAPRESSIONE POMPA

E012 E013

25

E T A D

D E R R E F S N A R T

ALLA GUARNIZIONE PORTE

D

C

7

9

0


B

17

0

C

5

.1 0 +-


DAL GRP 'E012-E013' AL GRUPPO PRESSOST

3

+-


B

1

22

+-

DAL RITEGNO 'R001' AL 'E012-E013'

9

B

+-

A

*

DWG. NO

10 Classe di appartenenza :

11

A

MACHINE FVG

Material

Scale

GROUP

Status

Date (dd/mm/yyyy)

MONTAGGI

DESCRIPTION


Des.

Treatments

Chk

fag

PIASTRA COMPONENTI FVG

0

DWG. NO.

GM802

FVG - TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 6 – COMPONENT DATA SHEETS

FVG TECHNICAL MANUAL

SECTION 6

COMPONENT DATA SHEETS

ID no. 84507 Rev. 2

1/3

July 2005


CODICE

SCHEDA TECNICA

SIMBOLO

DESCRIZIONE

COMPONENT

SYMBOL

DESCRIPTION

DATA SHEET

CODE ASSIEME

COMPONENTE

ASSEMBLY

COMPONENT

STC0001

T001

Pt100 flessibile / Flexible Pt100

PM600045

STC0026

M001

Manometro / Pressure gauge

CH010052

STC0026

M002


CH010039

STC0026

M003


CH010053

STC0026

M014

Manometro/ Pressure gauge

STC0030

P002

Pressostato / Pressure switch

GM802571

CD240004

STC0030

P003


GM802571

CD240005

CH010039

STC0045

Z001

Micro / Microswitch

GF170172

CD200033

STC0048

P005


GP400198

CD200026

STC0093

VM6

Valvola manuale / Manual valve

GM802415

CJ070001

STC0093

VM7


GM250467

CJ070001

STC0097

F007

Filtro aria sterile / Sterile air filter

STC0107

E012

Elettrovalvola aria / Electric valve for air

GM802571

CJ000015

STC0107

E013


GM802571

CJ000015

STC0109

VR01

Filtro ridutt. Aria / Air reduction unit filter

GM802571

CC120034

STC0138

-

Stampante termica / Thermal printer

CE020017

STC0153

T003

Termostato / Thermostat

CD220008

STC0157

R005

Valvola di ritegno / Check valve

STC0157

R006


CJ080026

STC0216

P006


CD240042

STC0237

VM


GM150174

CJ070047

STC0244

CR001

Rubinetto / Tap

GM250463

CB020137

STC0309

P004


CD240057

STC0362

Y001

Valvola di sicurezza / Safety valve

CJ060366

STC0362

Y002

Valvola di sicurezza / Safety valve

GM250481

CJ060365

STC0363

CV14

Elettrocompressore / Electric compressor

GM250472

CF040013

STC0364

CV14

Elettrocompressore / Electric compressor

GM250477

CF040012

STC0365

E007


GM250467

CJ000098

STC0365

E008


GM250481

CJ000100

ID no. 84507 Rev. 2

2/3

CC120035

GM250472

CJ080026

July 2005


CODICE

SCHEDA TECNICA

SIMBOLO

DESCRIZIONE

COMPONENT

SYMBOL

DESCRIPTION

DATA SHEET

STC0365

E010


STC0365

E014


STC0366

E006


STC0367

F008

Filtro aria sterile / Sterile air filter

STC0368

L005

Livello elettronico / Electronic level

STC0369

W002

Radiatore a ventola / Fan radiator

STC0370

PV01

STC0371

CODE ASSIEME

COMPONENTE

ASSEMBLY

COMPONENT

GM250481

CJ000100 CJ000100

GM250467

CJ000099 CC120130

GM250478

CD340115

Pompa per vuoto / Vacuum pump

GM802652

CF030191

Z003

Proximity / Proximity sensor

GU020200

CD200053

STC0371

Z004

Proximity / Proximity sensor

GU020200

CD200053

STC0372

CR002

Rubinetto / Tap

GM250463

CB100022

STC0373

R004


GM802571

CJ080039

STC0374

L004

Livello a galleggiante / Float level

STC0375

W001

Scambiatore / Exchanger

GL400649

STC0376

P001

Trasduttore / Transducer

GM802571

STC0378

L003


STC0379

PA01

Motopompa / Motorized pump

GM802466

STC0380

B003

Contenitore in plastica / Plastic container

GM250478

STC0381

RX02

Resistenza / Resistor

GM550096

STC0394

R001


STC0408

ME15

Motore elettrico / Electrical motor

GU020200

STC0409

W001

Scambiatore / Exchanger

GL400658

STC0423

L001


CD050024

STC0423

L002


CD050024

ID no. 84507 Rev. 2

3/3

CJ090081

CB100021

CD230037 CD050012 CF030176 CK070015

CJ080042 CF020026

July 2005

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0001 DOCS Open # 50814 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1 CODICE / CODE

COMPONENTE / COMPONENT Termoresistenze Pt100 Pt100 thermoresistance MODELLO / TYPE

PM600045 COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER

Esecuzione secondo disegno FEDEGARI Execution according to FEDEGARI drawing

FASINTERNATIONAL S.r.l.

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE/ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Classe di precisione . . . . . . . . . .1/3 DIN a 0 _C (±0.10_C + 0.0017/T) per T --65...+250 _C Coefficiente temperatura . . . 3.850 x 10 --3 x _C--1 S Elemento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pt100 Ohm a supporto ceramico S Guaina di protezion e . . . . . . . . . AISI 316 isolamento ceramico SCavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 conduttori 30 AWG Cu/Ag isolati in teflon Fep e PTFE S Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 000 mm S Tempo di risposta in acqua a 0.2 m/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . < 4.5 sec. a 63.2% FS . ax. 0.05 _C con corrente di misura 10 mA S Autoriscaldamento . . . . . . . . . . .m . . . . . . . . .--80... +250 _C (riferiti a PTFE) SLimit i di temperatura . . . . . . . . . . . .variazioni in feriori a 0.05 _C per pressione sino a 3.5 MPa S Prova di pressione S Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. .5 MPa S S

. Class accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 DIN a 0 _C (±0.10_C + 0.0017/T) per T --65...+250 _C Temperature coefficient 3.850 x 10 --3 x _C --1 Element S Pt100 Ohm ceramic support SProtective sheat AISI 316 -- ceramic insulating SCable 4 conductor 30 AWG Cu/Ag -- teflon Fep and PTFE insulation Cable S lenght 3000 mm S S

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

S

Response at 0.2 m/s time in water Auto--heating S S Temperature range SPressure test S Max pressure .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

< 4.5 sec. at 63.2% FS max. 0.05 _C with 10 mA measure current --80...+250 C (PTFE) inferior variation at 0.05 _C for 3.5 MPa pressure 3.5 MPa .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_

DIMENSIONI / DIMENSIONS (mm)

COLLEGAMENTO SONDA 4 FILI 4 WIRE PROBE CONNECTION

76

ROSSO/RED ROSSO/RED

40

ø 4.5 BIANCO/WHITE BIANCO/WHITE

ø7

ø4.8

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0026 ID no. 50814 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1 COMPONENTE / COMPONENT

CODICE / CODE

Manometro Pressure gauge MODELLO / TYPE

CH010001 CH010038 CH010039 CH010052 CH010053

COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER TE.MA. s.r.l.

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Codice Code

CH010001 CH010038 CH010039 CH010052 CH010053

Raccordo ¯

1/8”

......... .........

Scala Scale colore nero colore rosso black color red color

0 ÷2.5 bar 0 ÷12 bar 0÷1 MPa --5 ÷1 bar --1 ÷6 bar

Socket ¯

0÷30 psi ---------0 ÷10 bar -------------------

1/8”

......... ......... .....


25

40

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0030 DOCS Open # 53889 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 4 -- Page 1/1 COMPONENTE / COMPONENT

CODICE / CODE CD240005 CD240004 CD240031

Pressostato Pressure switch MODELLO / TYPE PS3--AF...--HMR

CD240049 CD240051

COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER ALCO CONTROLS

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Attacchi Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/4” ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . ./.4. ” .......... Pressione di prova . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 5. . b. . ar . . . .bar Test pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Protezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IP65 ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I.P . .6. 5 ........ Protection Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . .-.-.3. 0. ...+70 C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--30...+70 .. Materiale diaframma . . . . . . . . . . . . . .b. .r.o. .nzo ... Diaphragm material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .bronze ¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

_

¯

¯

¯

¯

Il modello PS3--WF1--HMR è approvato TÜV in accordo alla DIN 32733

TÜV approved version for PS3--WF1--HMR according to DIN 32733

Codice Code

Modello Type

Taratura Setting [bar]

CD240005 CD240004 CD240031 CD240049 CD240051

Connettore Connection

PS3--WF1--HMR PS3--WF1--HMR PS3--AF3--HMR PS3--AF3--HMR PS3--AF3--HMR

0.8÷1.1 2.7÷3 4 ÷4.3 5 ÷5.3 5 ÷5.5

CD020081


28

75 20 35

20

39 48

C

_


CODICE / CODE

Microinterruttore di posizione Position switch

CD200033

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE / MANUFACTURER

MP320--WSI 1MS27/375/200 SI

MICROPRECISION

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE/ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

......... ......... 2 . .0 . 00 mm Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I.P . . .6.7 .. Protezione Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . .--. 40 ...+130 C Forza di azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . .3. ,5 N ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

Materiali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s . .i.li.c .o . .n . .e ... .. Cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p . .o . l. i. e . .s .t .e . . r. e . Corpo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s. i.l.i.c .o . .n . .e. Membrana ¯ ¯ ¯


_

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 ... Cable lenght mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IP67 ...... Protection . Working temperature . . . . . . . . . .--40...+130 .. N Actuating force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,5 ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .silicone . ...... Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polyester .. ...... Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .silicone ...... Membrane ¯ ¯ ¯

C

_


CODICE / CODE

Microinterruttore di posizione Position switch

CD200026

MODELLO / TYPE


MP720--WSI--1G/42 SI

MICROPRECISION


......... ......... 2 . .0 . 00 mm Lunghezza cavo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I.P . . .6.7 .. Protezione Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . .--. 20 ...+130 C Forza di azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . .4. N ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

Materiali ........................... silicone Cavo ......................... polestere Corpo .................. silicone Membrana ¯ ¯ ¯


_

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 ... Cable lenght mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IP67 ...... Protection . Working temperature . . . . . . . . . .--20...+130 Actuating force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. .N ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .silicone ...... Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polyester ....... Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . silicone ... . Membrane ¯ ¯ ¯

C

_


COMPONENTE / COMPONENT

CJ070001

Valvola a sfera Ball valve MODELLO / TYPE


446

MARIANI -- fluid control --


Pressione nominale Attacchi ......... ......... ¯ ¯

40 bar

......... ..

1/4”

......... ..

Materiali

¯ ¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

40 bar 1/4”

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Material

Guarnizione sfera . . . . . . . . . . P ..T . . FE Guarnizione albero . . . . . . . . . . .P. TFE Corpo, sfera e albero . . . . . . . . . ottone cromato

¯ ¯ ¯

DIMENSIONI /

Nominal pressure Connections

DIMENSIONS

.. . Ball gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTFE ... Shaft gasket Body, ball and shaft . . . . . . brass -- chrome plated ¯ ¯ ¯

(mm)

90

41 9

1/4”

46


CODICE / CODE

Cartuccia filtro Filter cartridge

CC120035

MODELLO / TYPE


KA1V002PV3

PALL Process Filtration Limited

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE/ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EMFLON ...... .. II S Type . . . EMFLON II Tipo ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVDF .... .... Membrane S ........................ Materiale Setto PVDF S Support and drainage layers . . . . . . . . .Polypropylene Materiale strati di supporto .... Polipropilene . . . . . . . . . . .Polypropylene . S Cage, end cap and core Materiale gabbia esterna . . . . . . . . .Polipropilene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPDM ......... . O--ring S Guarnizione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . .0,2 . μm SAbsolute removal rating Potere di ritenzione assoluto . . .0,2 μm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.5 . . . bar Max. S pressure . . . . . bar Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0,05 ... m Filtering S area Superficie filtrante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.,05 m 2 7/cm2 7/cm2 .. . Bacterial S Challenge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . .0 . Challeng Batterica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Brevundimonas Brevundimonas diminuta diminuta Steam sterilized in autoclave at . . . . 140 C Sterilizzabile in autoclave a . . . . . .140 __C ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

_

¯

¯

Massima Pressione Differenziale Maximum Differential Pressure Temperatura Temperature [˚C]

Flusso Direction Diretto Forward [bar]

40

3.5


1/4” NPT

141

31.8

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0107 ID no. 54040 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1 COMPONENTE / COMPONENT

CODICE / CODE

Elettorvalvola 5 vie 5--way solenoid valve

CJ000015

MODELLO / TYPE


SYJ3243--5LOU

SMC


Pressione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ..... ÷7 bar Azionamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . .e . .l.e . .tt.r.ico Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 . .4. Vcc Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . .0. C . ..50 ¯ ¯ ¯

_

¯

Materiali Corpo ¯

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ...... . ÷7 bar Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .electrical ....... Drive Voltage 24 Vcc . Working temperature . . . . . . . . . .0...50 C ¯ ¯ ¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_

¯

Material alluminio anodizzato

........ ......... ......

Body ¯

anodized alluminium

........ ......... ......


CJ000016


CODICE / CODE

Filtro--riduttore di pressione Filter--pressure regulator

CC120034

MODELLO / TYPE


EAW100--M5

SMC


Connessioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M5 Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .0. bar . . .. 5 Pressione d’uscita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 ÷7 bar .. Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ...50 C ¯ ¯ ¯

_

¯

Materiali Corpo

Nylon 6 rinforzato fibra di vetro . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P . .o . liammide Serbatoio Grado di filtrazione . . . 5 μ m ¯

......... ......... .....

¯ ¯

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M5 ...... Connections . Max input pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 .. Output pressure ÷7 bar . Working temperature . . . . . . . . . .5...50 C ¯ ¯ ¯

_

¯

Material Body

Nylon 6 reinforced with glass fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Polyamide ..... Tank Filtration grade . . . . . . . . .5 μ m ......... ......... .....

¯

¯ ¯


26

25

40 38

25

5 . 0 5

0 3

5 . 9 0 1

28 25


CODICE / CODE

Stampante Printer

CE020017

MODELLO / TYPE


FT190--S3

CUSTOM


Metodo di stampa . . . . . . . . termica a matrice di punti Buffer di stampa . . . . . . . . .1 Kbyte Modo di scrittura ......... diritto e rovesciato Interfaccie standard . . . . .RS232 o Centronics Dim. rotolo carta .......... 58 ± 1mm x Ø50 mm max Alimentazione ............. doppia o singola 5 Vcc ± 10% Temp. di funz. .............. 0 +50 0C

¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

¯ ¯

¯

. Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thermal dot matrix Print buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .Kbyte . Print direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ormal or reverse Standard interfaces . . . . . . . . . . RS232 or Centronics Paper roll dimensions . . . . . . . 58 ± 1mm x Ø50mm max . Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . double or single 5 Vdc. ±10% Operating temperature . . . . . 0 +50 0C ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯

¯

¯

¯


119

45.5 54.5

9 1 1

5 . 3

5.5

2 1 1

5 . 3

55

65

Stampante termica da pannello FT190SP Manuale utente

www.custom.it

FT190SP

Parti della stampante

1- Meccanismo di stampa 2- Telaio 3- Bocca uscita carta 4- Etichetta caricamento carta 5- Pannello frontale 6- Vano rotolo carta 7Consolle di alimentazione 8- Connettore 9- Connettore avvolgicarta 10- Connettore interfaccia 11- Connettore tasto “Print” esterno

FT190SP

Tutti i diritti riservati. È vietata la riproduzione to tale o parziale del presente manuale in qualsiasi forma, siaessa cartacea o informatica.La Custom Engineering s.r.l. e le risorse impiegate nella realizzazione del manuale, non si assumono nessuna responsabilità derivante dall’utilizzo dello stesso, garantendo che le informazioni contenute nel manuale sono state accuratamente verificate. Ogni suggerimento riguardo ad eventuali errori riscontrati o a possibili miglioramenti sarà particolarmente apprezzato. I prodotti sono soggetti ad un continuo controllo e miglioramento, pertanto la Custom Engineering s.r.l. si riserva di modificare le informazioni contenute nel manuale senza preavviso. COD.DOMIFT190SP -

REV.1.20

Copyright 1998 Custom Engineering s.r.l. – Italy Custom Engineering Str. Berettine 2 - 43010 Fontevivo (PARMA) - Italy Tel. : +39 0521-680111 Fax : +39 0521-610701 http: www.custom.it Email : [email protected]

FT190SP

Dichiarazione "CE" di conformità Rispetto alle norme ISO /IEC Guida 22 e EN 45014

Nome del produttore:

Custom Engineering s.r.l.

Indirizzo del produttore:

Strada Berettine 2 Fontevivo (Parma) Italy

N°: DC0302698

Dichiara il prodotto: Nome prodotto: Stampante da pannello con meccanismo di stampa termico Nome tipo:

FT190SP

Modello:

FT190SP RS232 / CENTRONICS

conforme alle seguenti direttive: Direttiva Compatibilità Elettromagnetica 89/336/CEE; 92/31/CEE; 93/68/CEE In accordo con i seguenti standard: EN 55022 Classe B

Limiti e metodi di misura delle caratteristiche di radiodisturbo prodotto dagli apparecchi per la tecnologia dell'informazione.

EN 50082-1

Compatibilità Elettromagnetica 1992 Norma generica sull'immunità. Parte 2: Ambiente industriale.

EN 61000-4-2

Prove di immunità a scariche elettrostatiche. 4KV a contatto, 8KV in aria

1995

EN 61000-4-4

Prove di immunità a transitori/treni elettrici veloci.

1995

ENV 50140

Giugno 1998 FT190SP

Linee di alimentazione DC 0,5KV Campi elettromagnetici irradiati a radiofrequenza. Prova di immunità. 3V/m, 80MHz-1000MHz, 80% 1KHz AM

1995

1993

SOMMARIO

INTRODUZIONE

CONTENUTO DEL MANUALE ........................................................................ 1 CONVENZIONI UTILIZZATE NEL MANUALE ................................................. 1 INFORMAZIONI GENERALI SULLA SICUREZZA........................................... 1 DISIMBALLO DELLA STAMPANTE ................................................................. 3 CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI ..................................................................... 3 DESCRIZIONE DELLA STAMPANTE .............................................................. 4 1. INSTALLAZIONE ED UTILIZZO

1.1 CONNESSIONI ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Alimentazione ................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Avvolgicarta ...................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Pulsante Print esterno ....................................................................... 1-2 1.2 CONFIGURAZIONE ...............................................................................1-2 1.3 AUTOTEST ............................................................................................. 1-3 1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP ...........................................................................1-3 1.5 MANUTENZIONE ................................................................................... 1-4 1.5.1 Cambio rotolo carta .......................................................................... 1-4 2. INTERFACCE

2.1 SERIALE RS232 .....................................................................................2-1 2.2 PARALLELA CENTRONICS ................................................................. 2-3 2.3 OROLOGIO CALENDARIO (OPZIONE) ............................................... 2-4 2.3.1 Regolazione dell’orologio mediante tastiera.......................................2-4 3. FUNZIONI DELLA STAMPANTE

3.1 MODI DI SCRITTURA ............................................................................ 3-1 3.2 CARATTERI DI CONTROLLO ................................................................ 3-2 4. SPECIFICHE TECNICHE

4.1 SPECIFICHE TECNICHE ....................................................................... 4-1 4.2 DIMENSIONI ..........................................................................................4-2

i

FT190SP

SOMMARIO

5. SERIE DI CARATTERI

5.1 SET DI CARATTERI................... .............................................................5-1 APPENDICE A - ACCESSORI E RICAMBI

A.1 ACCESSORI ......................................................................................... A-1 A.1.1 Alimentatore .................................................................................... A-1 A.1.2 Avvolgicarta..................................................................................... A-2 A.2 RICAMBI ............................................................................................... A-3

FT190SP

ii

INTRODUZIONE

CONTENUTO DEL MANUALE

Oltre all’Introduzione, in cui sono riportate: le convenzioni utilizzate nel manuale, le informazioni generali sulla sicurezza, le modalità di disimballo della stampante e una breve descrizione della stessa con le caratteristiche principali, il manuale è organizzato nei seguenti capitoli: Capitolo 1: Contiene le informazioni necessarie per installare correttamente la stampante ed usarla in modo adeguato Capitolo 2: Contiene le specifiche delle interfacce Capitolo 3: Contiene la descrizione del set di comandi della stampante Capitolo 4: Contiene le Specifiche tecniche della stampante Capitolo 5: Contiene le serie di caratteri (font) utilizzati dalla stampante CONVENZIONI UTILIZZATE NEL MANUALE NOTA

Riporta delle informazioni o suggerimenti importanti per l’utilizzo della stampante ATTENZIONE

Le informazioni contraddistinte da questo simbolo, devono essere eseguite attentamente per non danneggiare la stampante PERICOLO

Le informazioni contraddistinte da questo simbolo, devono essere eseguite attentamente per non causare danni o lesioni all’operatore. INFORMAZIONI GENERALI SULLA SICUREZZA • • • • •

Leggete e conservate le istruzioni seguenti. Seguite tutti gli avvisi e le istruzioni indicate sulla stampante. Prima di pulire la stampante staccate il cavo di alimentazione. Per pulire la stampante utilizzate un panno umido. Non usate prodotti liquidi o aerosol. Non usate la stampante vicino all’acqua. 1

FT190SP

INTRODUZIONE

• • • •

•

• •

•

Non collocate la stampante su una superficie instabile. Essa potrebbe cadere e danneggiarsi seriamente. Utilizzate il tipo di alimentazione elettrica indicato sull’etichetta della stampante. In caso di incertezza contattate il vostro rivenditore. Collocate la stampante in modo da evitare che i cavi ad essa collegati possano essere danneggiati. Assicuratevi che la corrente massima assorbita dalla stampante non superi la corrente massima ammessa dal tipo di cavo impiegato per l’alimentazione. Non introducete oggetti all’interno della stampante in quanto essi possono o cortocircuitare o danneggiare parti che potrebbero compromettere il funzionamento della stampante. Non versate liquidi sulla stampante Non intervenite personalmente sulla stampante, eccetto che per le operazioni di ordinaria manutenzione, espressamente riportate nel manuale utente. Staccate la stampante dalla linea di alimentazione e fatela riparare da un tecnico specializzato, quando si verificano le condizioni seguenti: A. Il connettore di alimentazione è danneggiato. B. È entrato del liquido nella stampante; C. La stampante è stata esposta a pioggia o acqua; D. La stampante non funziona normalmente pur avendo eseguito le istruzioni riportate nel manuale d’uso. E. La stampante è caduta e il conten itore è stato danneggiato. F. La stampante presenta un sensibile calo nelle prestazioni. G. La stampante non funziona.

FT190SP

2

INTRODUZIONE

DISIMBALLO DELLA STAMPANTE

Rimuovete la stampante dal cartone, facendo attenzione a non danneggiare il materiale di imballaggio al fine di utilizzarlo per trasporti futuri Assicuratevi che vi siano i componenti illustrati in seguito e che essi non siano danneggiati. In caso contrario contattate il servizio di assistenza. Stampante Manuale (o Cdrom) Rotolo di carta (all’interno della stampante) Viti lunghe

(Fig.1)

NOTA

Per l’utilizzo delle viti lunghe leggere la nota al paragrafo 4.2 CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI

La FT190SP è una stampante che unisce ad un design innovativo, elevate prestazioni, affidabilità e semplicità di utilizzo. Per tali motivi essa costituisce una soluzione ottimale per tutte quelle applicazioni industriali, professionali, da laboratorio, che necessitano di un riscontro immediato dei dati su scontrino, tipici settori di applicazione sono: sistemi di pesatura, scontrini non fiscali, sicurezza, controllo e diagnosi. È dotata di un meccanismo di stampa termico a 200 dpi, che utilizza carta di 57,5 mm di larghezza in rotolo. Può stampare 24 o 40 caratteri per riga selezionabile nel setup o con comando software. La stampante FT190SP, per la sua compattezza e leggerezza, può essere installata con estrema semplicità su qualunque tipo di apparecchiatura. A bordo scheda vi sono già presenti due interfacce: seriale RS232 e parallela centronics. Per selezionare una delle due interfacce è necessario spostare alcuni jumper. Il buffer di ricezione è di 1 Kbytes. Può essere inoltre dotata di orologio calendario (Real Time Clock). 3

FT190SP

INTRODUZIONE

DESCRIZIONE DELLA STAMPANTE

La stampante FT190SP è costituita da un corpo in ABS (1) dotato di uno sportello anteriore (2), attraverso il quale si accede al rotolo carta e al meccanismo si stampa. Frontalmente è alloggiata la consolle (3), composta dai tasti PRINT, FEED e dai due led luminosi: Power e Status.

(Fig.2) •

Tasto PRINT. Quando viene azionato provoca sulla seriale la trasmissione del carattere di controllo “$0D” solo se è stato abilitato nel setup della stampante. In parallelo al tasto PRINT vi è il connettore J6 utilizzabile per la connessione di un tasto esterno (fig.1.1).

•

Tasto FEED. Premuto permette l’avanzamento manuale della carta. Se premuto brevemente, qualora sia installata l’opzione RTCK, provoca la stampa dell’ora e della data.

•

Il led POWER indica la presenza dell’alimentazione digitale della stampante.

•

Il led di STATUS indica, se lampeggiante, che la carta è finita. Se rimane acceso fisso segnala la presenza di un errore (alimentazione testina troppo bassa o troppo alta o temperatura testina troppo alta). FT190SP

4

1. INSTALLAZIONE ED UTILIZZO

1.1 CONNESSIONI

(Fig.1.1)

1.1.1 Alimentazione

La stampante FT190SP è dotata, per l’alimentazione, di un connettore standard tipo AMPMODU1 4 poli maschio (J4). I segnali sui pin del connettore di alimentazione sono i seguenti: ATTENZIONE

Rispettare le polarità dell’alimentazione

VERSIONE 5V PIN

SEGNALE

NOT E

1

GND

2 3

GND +VT: da 4.5 Vdc a 7 Vdc

(alimentazione testina)

4

+VCC: 5 Vdc ± 7%

(alimentazione scheda logica) (Tab.1.1)

1- 1

FT190SP


VERSIONE 9 - 40V PIN

SEGNALE

1

GND

2

GND

3

da 9 Vdc a 40 Vdc

4

N.C.

NOT E

(Tab.1.2)

1.1.2 Avvolgicarta

Il connettore J5 (fig.1.1) viene utilizzato per alimentare l’avvolgicarta esterno. La posizione e la funzione dei segnali è riportata in Tabella 1.3. Pin

Segnale

1 2

MOTORE + MOTORE (Tab.1.3)

1.1.3 Pulsante Print esterno

Al connettore J6 (fig.1.1) può essere collegato un tasto Print esterno. La polarità e la funzione dei segnali è riportata in Tabella 1.4. Pin

Segnale

1

PRINT

2

GND (Tab.1.4)

1.2 CONFIGURAZIONE

La FT190SP permette la configurazione dei parametri di default della stampante. Questa procedura viene attivata mantenendo premuti i tasti PRINT e FEED all’accensione con il ponticello JP2 (Fig. 2.1) presente sulla scheda della stampante aperto. FT190SP

1- 2


Ad ogni successiva pressione del tasto PRINT si ottiene la variazione del parametro e la stampa del valore corrente dello stesso. Ottenuto il valore desiderato, premendo il tasto FEED si passa al parametro successivo, e così via. La stampa di un messaggio, quando sono scorsi tutti i parametri, segnala il termine del settaggio. I parametri influenzati nella configurazione sono: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Selezione del numero di colonne (24 o 40) Modalità di scrittura (normal o reverse) Selezione della dimensione del carattere (normale, doppia larghezza, doppia altezza, espanso) Selezione del font (font 1 o font 2) Abilitazione o disabilitazione del comando CR Abilitazione o disabilitazione AUTOFEED : se la funzione è abilitata quando la stampante riceve un numero di caratteri pari al buffer di linea va a capo automaticamente Selezione della velocità di stampa in funzione dell’assorbimento Selezione dell’intensità di rosso : utilizzando carta termica bicolore è possibile impostare varie tonalità di rosso Selezione dei parametri per la comunicazione seriale o parallela Abilitazione o disabilitazione del buffer da 1Kbyte Abilitazione settaggio real time clock Abilitazione stampa dei secondi nelle funzioni del real time clock.

I settaggi eseguiti vengono salvati su EEPROM (memoria non volatile). 1.3 AUTOTEST

L’autotest si ottiene mantenendo premuto il tasto FEED all’accensione della stampante. L’esecuzione dell’autotest provoca la stampa dei dati di settaggio correnti della stampante e la stampa del set di caratteri ASCII completo. 1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP

Se all’accensione viene premuto il tasti PRINT, la stampante entra nella modalità Hexadecimal Dump. Questa funzione viene utilizzata per diagnosticare i caratteri ricevuti in seriale o in parallelo. Infatti vengono stampati come codice esadecimale ed il corrispettivo codice Ascii. 1- 3

FT190SP


1.5 MANUTENZIONE 1.5.1 Cambio rotolo carta

Per effettuare il cambio del rotolo carta procedere come segue: 1) Aprire lo sportello della stampante e premere sul supporto basculante del meccanismo di stampa dove viene riportata la dicitura PUSH; 2) Inserire l’estremità nell’imboccatura del meccanismo di stampa e posizionare il rotolo carta, rispettando il verso di rotazione indicato in figura; 3) Automaticamente la carta viene trascinata dal rullo per 3 o 4 centimetri; 4) Strappare la carta e richiudere lo sportello.

(Fig.1.2)

ATTENZIONE

Prima di inserire la carta assicurarsi che il taglio sia regolare

FT190SP

1- 4

2. INTERFACCE

(Fig.2.1)

La selezione delle interfacce RS232 o CENTRONICS avviene mediante la strip a 20 contatti: posizionando la strip nella posizione 1-2(fig.2.1) viene selezionata l’interfaccia Centronics standard, posizionando invece la strip nella posizione 2-3viene selezionata l’interfaccia RS232. 2.1 SERIALE RS232

La stampante possiede un’interfaccia seriale RS232 ed è collegata mediante un connettore a vaschetta 25 poli femmina. Nel protocollo seriale, i segnali che caratterizzano la comunicazione sono TXD, RXD e RTS se è stato selezionato il protocollo RTS/CTS, mentre se è stato selezionato il protocollo XON/XOFF i segnali sono TXD e RXD. Nella seguente tabella sono indicati i segnali presenti sul connettore: PIN

SEGNALE

DIREZIONE

DESCRIZIONE

1 2

NC TXD

Uscita

Trasmissione dati

3

RXD

Entrata

Ricezione dati

4

RTS

Uscita

Uguale al segnale DTR

7

SG

-

Segnale Massa

2- 1

FT190SP

2. INTERFACCE

PIN

SEGNALE

DIREZIONE

DESCRIZIONE

20 2 0

DTR

Uscita

23 23

GND

-

M a ssa

24 2 4

GND

-

M a ssa

25 2 5

GND

-

M a ssa

Selezionando il comando DTR/DSR, questo segnale indica quando la stampante è impegnata. SPACE indica che la stampante è pronta a ricevere dei dati, e MARK indica che la stampante è impegnata.

(Tab.2.1)

I seguenti schemi mostrano un esempio di collegamento tra la stampante ed il Personal Computer mediante un connettore 25 e 9 poli femmina.

(Fig.2.2)

(Fig.2.3)

FT190SP

2- 2

2. INTERFACCE

2.2 PARALLELA CENTRONICS

La stampante ha un’interfaccia in parallelo Centronics ed è collegata mediante un connettore a vaschetta 25 poli femmina. Nella comunicazione parallela i segnali utilizzabili sono: 1) data bus a 7 o 8 bit; 2) segnale di STROBE che indica la validità dei dati; 3) segnale di BUSY che indica la disponibilità della stampante a ricevere dati; 4) segnale di ACK di conferma lettura dati. Nella seguente tabella sono indicati i segnali presenti sul connettore: PIN

SEGNALE

DIREZIONE

1

Strobe

Entrata

2

Data bit 0

Entrata

3

Data bit 1

Entrata

4

Data bit 2

Entrata

5

Data bit 3

Entrata

6

Data bit 4

Entrata

7

Data bit 5

Entrata

8

Data bit 6

Entrata

9

Data bit 7

Entrata

10 1 0

ACK

Uscita

11 1 1

BUSY

Uscita

12 1 2

PAPER END

Uscita

13 1 3 14 14

HIGHT NC

Uscita -

15 1 5

FALT

Uscita

16 1 6

RESET

Entrata

GND

-

17-25

(Tab.2.2) 2- 3

FT190SP

2. INTERFACCE

2.3 OROLOGIO CALENDARIO (opzione)

È disponibile come opzione l’orologio calendario (Real Time Clock). La stampa e la regolazione dell’orologio sono gestite attraverso una serie di caratteri di controllo. NOTA

Per i caratteri di controllo dell’orologio vedere la descrizione del set di comandi della stampante al capitolo 3. 2.3.1 Regolazione dell’orologio mediante tastiera

È possibile regolare l’ora e la data mediante i tasti PRINT e FEED presenti sul pannello frontale della stampante. La procedura per il settaggio è la seguente: • • • •

Mantenendo premuto il tasto FEED, premere il tasto PRINT. La stampante stamperà l’ora e la data con una freccia che indicherà una cifra da variare; Ad ogni pressione del tasto PRINT si otterrà l’incremento della cifra indicata dalla freccia e la stampa aggiornata; Per selezionare un’altra cifra da variare premere nuovamente il tasto FEED. Ad ogni operazione la stampante stampa ora e data aggiornate, evidenziando con la freccia la cifra in selezione; Per terminare il settaggio, premere PRINT e FEED contemporaneamente.

FT190SP

2- 4

3. FUNZIONI DELLA STAMPANTE

3.1 MODI DI SCRITTURA

La stampante FT190SP dispone di due modi di scrittura, selezionabili tramite i caratteri di controllo: normal e reverse.

(Fig.3.1)

3- 1

FT190SP


3.2 CARATTERI DI CONTROLLO

Nella tabella comandi, sono elencati tutti i comandi per la gestione delle funzioni della stampante FT190SP. Questi comandi possono essere trasmessi alla stampante con entrambe le interfacce, seriale o parallela; se però si utilizza l’interfaccia parallela l’utente non potrà ricevere alcun tipo di risposta, poiché la suddetta interfaccia è monodirezionale. I comandi possono essere trasmessi alla stampante in qualsiasi momento, ma verranno eseguiti solo quando i caratteri trasmessi precedentemente verranno stampati o i comandi precedenti eseguiti. Quindi non vi sono comandi prioritari, ma tutti vengono eseguiti al momento in cui il buffer circolare li mette a disposizione. (Tab.3.1)

TABELLA COMANDI C o m. H E X D e s c riz io n e

C o m. AS C II

$00

S cri ttura a ca ra tte ri p i cco li

$01

S cri ttura a d op p i a la rg he zza

$02

S cri ttura a d op p i a a lte zza

$03

S cri ttura ti p o e sp a nso

$04

Ri p ri sti na sc ri ttura a ca ra tte ri p i cco li

$0A

E se g ue un li ne fe e d

(n) $ 0 B

E se g ue (n) li ne fe ed

$0D

E se g ue la sta mpa d e l b uffer d i ri g a

$0F

S e tta i l mo d o C RL F

$ 11

Mo d o g ra fi co

$12

S ta mp a l'o ra e la d a ta

$13

S e tta l'o ra e la d a ta

$14

Tra sme tte i n s e ri a le l'o ra e la d a ta

$17 $18

S ta mp a i l 1° c ara tte re p ro g ra mma b i le S ta mp a i l 2 ° c a ra tte re p ro g ra mma b i le

$19

S ta mp a i l 3 ° c a ra tte re p ro g ra mma b i le

$1A

S ta mp a i l 4° c ara tte re p ro g ra mma b i le

$1C


$1D


FT190SP

3- 2


C om. AS C II

C o m. H E X

D escriz ion e

$1 E

S tampa i l 7° carattere programmabile

$1 F

S tampa i l 8° carattere programmabile

ESC A

$1 B $4 1

E segue l'avanzamento di [n] dot li ne

ESC R

$1 B $5 2

S etta la stampa i n modo reverse

ES C N

$1 B $4 E

S etta la stampa i n modo normal

E SC @

$ 1B $ 40

Resetta la stampante

E SC D ESC T

$ 1B $ 44 $ 1B $ 54

ESC U

$ 1B $ 55

ESC S

$ 1B $ 53

Mette la data nel buffer di stampa Mette l'ora nel buffer di stampa Mette la data (mm :gg :aa) nel buffer di stampa A bili ta la stampa dei secondi

ESC X

$ 1B $ 58

S tampa in rosso

ESC x

$ 1B $ 78

S tampa in nero

ESC B

$ 1B $ 42

S etta i l font 1

ESC b

$ 1B $ 62

S etta i l font 2

ESC I

$ 1B $ 49

S elezi ona 24 colonne

ESC i

$ 1B $ 69

S elezi ona 40 colonne

(aa) E S C r

Legge all'i ndiri zzo (aa) un dato

(dd) E S C G

(aa) $1B $72 (aadd) $1B $77 (dd) $1B $47

(dd) E S C K

(dd) $1B $4B

S cri ve il valore (dd) nel'opti on register 1

(dd) E S C M

(dd) $1B $4D

S crive i l valore (dd) nel modo di stampa

ESC p

$1B $70

Trasmette i n seriale l'opti on register

ESC k

$1B $6B

Trasmette i n seriale l'opti on register 1

ESC m

$1B $6D

ESC s

$1B $73

(dd) E S C a

$1B $61

Trasmette i n seriale i l modo di stampa Trasmette i n seriale i l carattere successivo S elezi ona i l numero di dot space

E S C J (n)

$1B $4A

C arica i l carattere programmabi le

ESC W

$1B $57

S tampa li nea grafi ca a 200 dpi

ESC c

$1B $63

Gesti one della stampa dei bar code

ESC Q

$1B $51

A ttiva la sottolineatura

ESC q

$1B $71

D i satti va la sottolineatura

(aadd) E S C w

3- 3

S cri ve nell'indi rizzo (aa) i l dato (dd) S cri ve il valore (dd) nel'opti on register

FT190SP


Alla tabella segue una descrizione più articolata di ogni comando. 00H

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrittura a caratteri piccoli

ASCII Hex 00 Decimale 0

[Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato piccolo (normale) [Note] • I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa • I comandi che modificano la direzione dei caratteri sono attivi solo a inizio riga [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H [Esempio] 01H

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrittura a doppia larghezza

ASCII

-

Hex 01 Decimale 1 [Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato doppia larghezza [Note] • I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa • I comandi che modificano la direzione dei caratteri sono attivi solo a inizio riga [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] 00H, 02H, 03H, 04H [Esempio] 02H

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrittura a doppia altezza

ASCII Hex 02 Decimale 2 [Descrizione] La stampa viene eseguita in formato doppia altezza [Note] • I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa FT190SP

3- 4


[Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio]

• I comandi che modificano la direzione dei caratteri sono attivi solo a inizio riga Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali 00H, 01H, 03H, 04H

03H

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrittura tipo espanso

ASCII Hex 03 Decimale 3 [Descrizione] La stampa dei caratteri viene eseguita in modo espanso [Note] • I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa • I comandi che modificano la dimensione dei caratteri sono attivi solo a inizio riga [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] 00H, 01H, 02H, 04H [Esempio] 04H

[Nome] [Formato]

Ripristina scrittura a caratteri piccoli


Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali 00H, 01H, 02H, 03H

ASCII Hex 04 Decimale 4 [Descrizione] Torna alla scrittura con caratteri piccoli [Note] • I comandi da 00H a 09H non cancellano il buffer di stampa • I comandi che modificano la dimensione dei caratteri sono attivi solo a inizio riga

3- 5

FT190SP


0AH

[Nome] [Formato]

Esegue un line feed

[Note] [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio]

•buffer Questo comando provoca la stampa del contenuto del

ASCII Hex 0A Decimale 10 [Descrizione] Esegue un line feed equivalente a una linea di stampa

0BH

(n) 0BH

[Nome] [Formato]

Esegue (n) line feed

ASCII Hex 0B Decimale 11

[Descrizione] Esegue tanti line feed quanti ne sono specificati nel numero n [Note] • Il numero n deve essere ASCII e compreso fra 0 e 9 (quando n=0 il comando è nullo) • Questo comando cancella il buffer di linea [Default] [Riferimento] 0AH [Esempio] Se si vuole un avanzamento veloce di 5 line feed: $35 $0B (ovvero 5 e il comando $0B) 0DH

[Nome] [Formato]

Esegue la stampa del buffer di riga

ASCII Hex 0D Decimale 13 [Descrizione] Questo comando provoca la stampa del buffer di riga [Note] • Se il buffer è vuoto il comando risulta nullo FT190SP

3- 6


• Se è settata l’opzione CRLF, questo comando è ignorato e la stampa avviene solo tramite il comando $0A [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio]

0FH

0FH

[Nome] [Formato]

Setta il modo CRLF

ASCII Hex 0F Decimale 15 [Descrizione] Inibisce il comando $0D mantenendo attivo per la stampa solo il comando $0A [Note] • Per disabilitare questa opzione resettare la stampante • Questo comando cancella il buffer di linea • All’accensione il valore di default è nell’Option Register [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] 0DH [Esempio] 11H

[Nome] [Formato]

Modo grafico

ASCII Hex 11 Decimale 17 [Descrizione] Abilita la modalità grafica: una riga in modalità 24 colonne, corrisponde a 144 punti orizzontali divisi in 24 blocchi di 6 punti; una riga in modalità 40 colonne corrisponde a 240 punti orizzontali divisi in 40 blocchi di 6 punti. [Note] Per ottenere una stampa grafica inserire il comando $11 all’inizio di ogni riga. Il formato del byte nella configurazione grafica è: X

R

P6

P5

P4

P3

P2

P1

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

3- 7

FT190SP


dove: X non è utilizzato (si consiglia 0); R deve essere fisso a livello 1; P1,.P6 sono i dati dei punti grafici (1 stampa, 0 non stampa). Il bit P6 della stringa di punti trasmessa, viene stampato sulla sinistra e gli altri a seguire (P5, P4, P3, P2, P1) verso destra come raffigurato: 1° byte è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1


2° byte è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

3° byte è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

Per stampare una linea di punti occorre trasmettere: $11, n x $7F (dove n è il numero di caratteri per linea), $0D. Per stampare una linea vuota occorre trasmettere: $11, $40, $0D.

12H

[Nome] [Formato]

Stampa l’ora e la data

ASCII Hex 12 Decimale 18 [Descrizione] Esegue la stampa dell’ora e della data nel seguente formato: hh : mm gg - mm - aa Se è abilitata la stampa dei secondi, il formato sarà: hh : mm : ss gg - mm - aa [Note] • Il comando determina il reset della linea [Default] [Riferimento] 13H, 14H [Esempio] 13H

[Nome]

Setta l’ora e la data

FT190SP

3- 8


[Formato]

ASCII Hex 13 Decimale 19 [Descrizione] Questo comando setta l’ora e la data in due modi possibili: il primo setta le ore in 24h e il secondo in 12h antimeridiane o postmeridiane. Nel primo modo si trasmettono 10 caratteri ASCII dell’ora e la data seguiti da $13. Nel secondo modo si [Note]

trasmettono 10 caratteri ASCII dell’ora e la data preceduti da “A” o “P” e seguiti da $13. • E’ consigliabile inviare prima un comando $0D per svuotare il buffer di stampa


12H, 14H

Per settare le 12:45 del 19-01-93 occorre inviare: 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13 $31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33 $13 Per settare le A12:45 del 19-01-93 occorre inviare: A 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $13 $41 $31 $32 $34 $35 $31 $39 $30 $31 $39 $33 $13

14H

[Nome] [Formato]

Trasmette in seriale l’ora e la data

ASCII Hex 14 Decimale 20 [Descrizione] Trasmette ora e data sulla porta seriale in formato di 11 caratteri ASCII: ora/minuti/giorno/mese/anno + (CR) $0D [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] 12H, 13H [Esempio] 17H,...1FH 3- 9

FT190SP


[Nome] [Formato]

Stampa il 1° (...8°) carattere programmabile


BIT MAP contenuto in flash

ASCII Hex 17, ...1F Decimale 23, ...31 [Descrizione] Questo comando provoca la stampa del carattere programmabile corrispondente. [Note] 17H, 18H, 19H, 1AH, 1CH, 1DH, 1EH, 1FH

ES C A [nH ] [nL]

[Nome] [Formato]

Esegue l’avanzamento di [n] dot line

ASCII ESC Hex 1B Decimale 27

A 41 65

nH nH nH

nL nL nL

[Descrizione] Esegue l’avanzamento di [n] dot line [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio] ESC R

[Nome] [Formato]

Setta la stampante in modo reverse


R 52 82

[Descrizione] Seleziona la stampa nel modo reverse: lo scontrino esce dalla stampante con le scritte diritte e da sinistra verso destra [Note] [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] ESC N [Esempio] FT190SP

3- 10


ESC N

[Nome] [Formato]

Setta la stampa in modo normal

ASCII ESC N Hex 1B 4E Decimale 27 78 [Descrizione] Seleziona la stampa in modo normal: lo scontrino esce dalla stampante con le scritte capovolte e da destra verso sinistra [Note] [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] ESC R [Esempio]

ESC @

[Nome] [Formato]

Resetta la stampante

ASCII

ESC

Hex 1B Decimale 27

@ 40 64

[Descrizione] Cancella tutti i dati nel buffer di stampa e resetta il modo della stampante riportandolo a quello attivo al momento dell’accensione [Note] • Uguale al reset hardware • Trasmesso il comando bisogna attendere 1,5 secondi prima di riavere la stampante attiva [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio] Puo’ essere utile all’accensione per evitare l’invio di caratteri fasulli durante l’inizializzazione da parte del dispositivo master

3- 11

FT190SP


ESC D

[Nome] [Formato]

Mette la data nel buffer di stampa

[Note]

•abbastanza La data viene stampata in 8 caratteri: nelviene casostampata non ci sia spazio nel buffer, essa non • Non azzera il buffer di linea

ASCII ESC D Hex 1B 44 Decimale 27 68 [Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer la data dell’orologio calendario montato a bordo della stampante: il formato è gg - mm - aa.


ESC T, ESC U

Se si vuole scrivere: DATA: 11-09-93 TEST OK si trametterà DATA: $1b $44 TEST OK $0D per stampare solo la data $1B $44 $0D”

ESC T

[Nome] [Formato]

Mette l’ora nel buffer di stampa

ASCII ESC T Hex 1B 54 Decimale 27 84 [Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer l’ora dell’orologio calendario montato a bordo della stampante: il formato è hh:mm [Note] • L’ora viene stampata in 5 caratteri e, se sono abilitati i secondi, in 8 caratteri: nel caso non ci sia abbastanza spazio nel buffer, essa non viene stampata • Non azzera il buffer di linea [Default] [Riferimento] ESC D, ESC U, ESC S [Esempio] Se si vuole scrivere: ORA: 16:45 TEST OK si trametterà ORA: $1b $54 TEST OK $0D per stampare solo la data $1B $54 $0D

FT190SP

3- 12


ESC U

[Nome] [Formato]

Mette la data (mm - gg - aa) nel buffer di stampa

[Note]

• La data viene stampata in 8 caratteri: nel caso non ci sia abbastanza spazio nel buffer, essa non viene stampata • Non azzera il buffer di linea

ASCII ESC U Hex 1B 55 Decimale 27 85 [Descrizione] Inserisce nel buffer la data dell’orologio calendario montato a bordo della stampante in formato americano mm-gg-aa


ESC D, ESC T

Se si vuole scrivere: DATA: 09-11-93 TEST OK si trametterà DATA: $1b $55 TEST OK $0D per stampare solo la data $1B $55 $0D”

ESC S

[Nome] [Formato]

Abilita la stampa dei secondi

ASCII ESC S Hex 1B 53 Decimale 27 83 [Descrizione] Abilita la stampa dei secondi quando si richiede l’ora col comando ESC T [Note] [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] ESC T [Esempio] ESC X

[Nome] [Formato]

Stampa in rosso

ASCII ESC X Hex 1B 58 Decimale 27 88 [Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando la stampante si predispone per la stampa in rosso 3- 13

FT190SP


[Note] ES C x

[Nome] [Formato]

Stampa in nero

ASCII Hex

ESC 1B

x 78

27 120 comando la stampante si predi[Descrizione] Decimale Dopo la ricezione di questo spone per la stampa in nero [Note] ESC B

[Nome] [Formato]

Setta il font 1

[Note]

•sono Il fontstandard: completo$60, è stampato nell’autotest. codici$ED, non $7B, $7C, $7D, $7E,Alcuni $7F, $8D, $FA, $FF Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali

ASCII ESC B Hex 1B 42 Decimale 27 66 [Descrizione] Seleziona il primo font di caratteri


ESC b

ESC b

[Nome] [Formato]

Setta il font 2

ASCII Hex

ESC 1B

b 62

Decimale 27 98 [Descrizione] Seleziona il secondo font di caratteri [Note] • Il font completo è stampato nell’autotest. Il font contiene caratteri cirillici [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali [Riferimento] ESC B [Esempio] FT190SP

3- 14


ESC I

[Nome] [Formato]

Seleziona 24 colonne


l 49 73

[Descrizione] Dopo ricezione di questo comando stampante si predisponelaper la stampa a 24 colonne perlariga [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] ESC i [Esempio] ESC i

[Nome] [Formato]

Seleziona 40 colonne

ASCII Hex

ESC 1B

i 69

Decimale 27 105 [Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando la stampante si predispone per la stampa a 40 colonne per riga [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] ESC l [Esempio] (aa) ESC r

[Nome] [Formato]

Legge all’indirizzo (aa) un dato

ASCII aH aL ESC r Hex aH aL 1B 72 Decimale aH aL 27 114 [Descrizione] Legge una locazione di memoria (EEPROM) all’indirizzo a: aH è il nibble più significativo di a espresso in ASCII aL è il nibble meno significativo di a espresso in ASCII [Note] • Le locazioni leggibili sono 256 (dalla $00 alla $FF) 3- 15

FT190SP



(aadd) ESC w

[Nome] [Formato]

Di default tutto il banco di memoria contiene il valore $20 ESC w

Per leggere l’indirizzo $01, bisogna trasmettere in ASCII: $30 $31 $1B $72 Se l’indirizzo $01 contiene $A5, riceveremo: $41 $35

Scrive nell’indirizzo (aa) il dato (dd)

ASCII aH aL dH dL ESC w Hex aH aL dH dL 1B 77 Decimale aH aL dH dL 27 119 [Descrizione] Salva il dato d all’indirizzo a in memoria (EEPROM): aH è il nibble più significativo di a espresso in ASCII aL è il nibble meno significativo di a espresso in ASCII dH è il nibble più significativo di d espresso in ASCII dL è il nibble meno significativo di d espresso in ASCII [Note] • Le locazioni scrivibili sono 256 (dalla $00 alla $FF), i dati devono essere al massimo $FF (255) e, sia gli indirizzi che i dati, devono essere espressi in ASCII su due bytes [Default] Di default tutto il banco di memoria contiene il valore $20 [Riferimento] ESC r [Esempio] Per salvare il dato $A5 nell’indirizzo $01, si deve trasmettere: $30 $31 $41 $35 $1B $77 (dd) ESC G

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrive il valore (dd) nell’option register

ASCII dH dL ESC G Hex dH dL 1B 47 Decimale dH dL 27 71 [Descrizione] Modifica il registro di configurazione. (dd) sono due caratteri ASCII che rappresentano il codice esadecimale per la programmazione del registro. (d d ) bi t =0 b i t= 1 bit0: settaggio del real time clock disabilitato abilitato normal reverse bit1: d irezione di stampa 8 7 bit2: n umero bit in ricezione parallela bit3: s tampa dei secondi disabilitato abilitato FT190SP

3- 16


bit4:C R($0D) abilitato disabilitato bit5: selezione parametri ricezione hardware software

(dipswitch) font1 font2 1Kbyte N°colonne

bit6:s elezione del font bit7: b uffer di ricezione


• L’impostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM e assunto come default alla successiva accensione ESC K

Per inviare il byte di settaggio 00001001 ($09): $30 $39 $1B $47

(dd) ESC K

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrive il valore (dd) nell’option register 1

ASCII Hex

dH dH

dL dL

ESC K 1B 4B

dH dL 27 75 [Descrizione] Decimale Modifica il registro di configurazione. (dd) sono due caratteri ASCII che rappresentano il codice esadecimale per la programmazione del registro. ( dd)

[Note]

b it = 0

b i t= 1

bit0: numero di colonne 24 colonne 40 colonne • L’impostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM quindi verrà assunto come default alla successiva accensione

[Default] [Riferimento]

ESC G

[Esempio]

Per inviare il$30 byte$39 di settaggio $1B $47 00001001 ($09):

3- 17

FT190SP


(dd) ESC M

[Nome] [Formato]

Scrive il valore (dd) nel modo di stampa

ASCII dH dL ESC M Hex dH dL 1B 4D Decimale dH dL 27 77 [Descrizione] Setta i parametri di default del modo stampa: $00 scrittura a caratteri piccoli $01 scrittura a doppia larghezza $02 scrittura a doppia altezza $03 scrittura espansa


• L’impostazione viene memorizzata nella EEPROM Impostazione mediante tasti frontali ESC m

Per stampare a doppia altezza, si deve trasmettere: $30 $32 $1B $4D

ESC p

[Nome] [Formato]

Trasmette in seriale il registro di configurazione

ASCII

ESC p

Hex 1B 70 Decimale 27 112 [Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale il byte dell’option register [Note] • Se la stampante usa il protocollo parallelo, non verrà trasmesso nulla [Default] [Riferimento] ESC G, ESC K, ESC k [Esempio] La risposta si ha su due bytes. Ad esempio, se si riceve: $30 $39 vuol dire che la configurazione di default è 00001001 ESC k

[Nome]

Trasmette in seriale il secondo registro di configurazione

[Formato]

ASCII ESC k Hex 1B 6B Decimale 27 107 [Descrizione] Trasmette in seriale il valore del secondo registro di configurazione in formato ASCII su due caratteri rappresentanti il FT190SP

3- 18


[Note]

valore esadecimale • Se la stampante usa il protocollo parallelo, non verrà trasmesso nulla


ESC K

La risposta si ha su due bytes. Ad esempio, se si riceve: $30 $39 vuol dire che la configurazione di default è 00001001

ESC m

[Nome] [Formato]

Trasmette in seriale il modo di stampa

[Riferimento] [Esempio]

ESC B

ASCII ESC m Hex 1B 6D Decimale 27 109 [Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale la configurazione del modo di stampa [Note] • Se la stampante usa il protocollo parallelo, non verrà trasmesso nulla [Default] Impostazione nell’option register tramite i tasti frontali La risposta si ha su due bytes. Ad esempio, se si riceve: $30, $32 vuol dire che la stampa è in doppia altezza

ESC s

[Nome] [Formato]

Trasmette in seriale il carattere successivo

ASCII ESC s Hex 1B 73 Decimale 27 115 [Descrizione] Trasmette sulla seriale il successivo carattere che riceverà [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio] Se si trasmette: ESC s A l’ultimo carattere, A, non verrà stampato, ma verrà immediatamente trasmesso sulla linea seriale 3- 19

FT190SP


(dd) ESC a

[Nome] [Formato]

Seleziona il numero di dot space

ASCII (dd) ESC a Hex (dd) 1B 61 Decimale (dd) 27 97 [Descrizione] (dd) sono due caratteri ASCII che identificano un byte esadecimale e corrispondono al numero di dot line tra una riga di stampa e l’altra [Note] [Default] =0 [Riferimento] [Esempio] ESC J (n) 10*(d)

[Nome] [Formato]

Carica il carattere programmabile

ASCII Hex

ESC J 1B 4A

(n) (n)

Decimale 27 74 (n) [Descrizione] (n) corrisponde al numero di carattere ovvero da 1 a 8. Il bit map che rappresenta il carattere è contenuto nei 10 byte successivi espressi in binario. La formattazione di questi byte è la seguente: bit7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 01dddddd [Note] [Default] Gli 8 caratteri hanno all’accensine vengono caricati con con un bit map contenuto nella flash della stampante. Nel caso l’utente volesse modificare questi bit map deve eseguire un upgrade del firmware. [Riferimento] [Esempio]

Se si desidera che il simbolo del codice $1F sia #, si dovrà trasmettere ESC J 2 e di seguito i 10 byte che formano il carattere: $1B $4A $32 $52 $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $52

FT190SP

3- 20


ESC W

[Nome] [Formato]

Stampa una linea grafica a 200 dpi

ASCII ESC W HEX 1B 57 Decimale 27 87 [Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando la stampante aspetta 48 byte che corrispondono all’intera riga grafica. Infatti 48 byte per 8 bit ciascuno corrispondono a 384 dot per linea. [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio]

ESC c

[Nome] [Formato]

Gestione della stampa dei bar code

ASCII

ESC c

ni]

[codice] [altezza] [posizione] [opzio[lunghezza] [dati]

Hex 1B Decimale 27 [Descrizione] [codice ASCII] I C B e E

63 99 Tipo di bar code Interleved 2/5 Code39 CodaBar EAN8 EAN13

[altezza] Numero di dot line in unità di 1/8 di mm. [posizione] Margine dal bordo sinistro espresso in unità di 1/8 di mm. [opzioni] bit

0bit 3- 21

1bit FT190SP


bit0: check digit bit3,2: HRI bit5,4: s ize druplo

non viene stampato viene stampato 0=no 1=sopra 2=sotto 3=sopra e sotto 0=normale 1=doppio 2=triplo 3=qua-

[lunghezza massima] Interleaved 2/5 = 12 caratteri Code 39 =10caratteri CodaBar =10caratteri EAN8 =8caratteri EAN13 =13caratteri [dati] Espressi in ASCII [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] [Esempio]

ESC Q

[Nome] [Formato]

Attiva la stampa sottolineata

[Riferimento] [Esempio]

ESC q

ASCII ESC Q Hex 1B 51 Decimale 27 81 [Descrizione] Dopo la ricezione di questo comando, i caratteri vengono stampati sottolineati [Note] [Default]

FT190SP

3- 22


ESC q

[Nome] [Formato]

Disattiva la stampa sottolineata

ASCII ESC q Hex 1B 71 Decimale 27 113 [Descrizione] Annulla la stampa sottolineata [Note] [Default] [Riferimento] ESC Q [Esempio]

3- 23

FT190SP


Blank page

FT190SP

3- 24

4. SPECIFICHE TECNICHE

4.1 SPECIFICHE TECNICHE

La tabella 4.1 riporta le principali caratteristiche tecniche della stampante. (Tab.4.1)

Colonne

24 2 4

40 4 0

Normale Doppi a altezza

2x3 2x6

1x3 1x6

Doppi a larghezza

4x3

2x3

Espanso

4x6

2x6

0,125 x 0,125

0,125 x 0,125

144

24 0

Carattere (L x H mm)

Punto grafico Punti riga emulaz ione Custom

Velocità di stampa (speed/current = normal) Li nee / sec

30

30

Caratteri / sec

2 20

32 0

Feed (li nee / sec)

53

53

Buffer di linea

24 byte

40 byte

Buffer di stampa

1Kbyte

Metodo di stampa

Termi ca a matrice di punti

Matrice di carattere

16 x 2 4

8x24

Modo di scrittura

Di ri tto e rovesci ato

Set di caratteri

Normale ed esteso

D im. rotolo carta

58 +/- 1mm x Ø50 mm max

Interfaccie standard

RS232 o C entronics D oppia o si ngola 5 Vcc ± 10%

Alimentaz ione Singola 9 - 40 Vcc opzionale Assorbimenti (con alimentaz ione a 5 Volt) Selezi one "Speed/current = LOW" In stampa

3A

Stand by

100 mA

In feed

750 mA 4- 1

FT190SP

4. SPECIFICHE TECNICHE

Selezi one “Speed/current = NORMAL” In stampa

4,5 A

Stand by

100 mA

In feed

750 mA

Selezi one “Speed/current = HIGH” In stampa

6A

Stand by

100 mA

In feed

750 mA

C ondiz ioni ambientali

Temperatura di funzi onamento

0 °C - +50 °C

Umidi tà di funzi onamento

20% - 85% senza condensa

Temperatura di stoccaggi o/Umi di tà

-25°C - +70°C / 10% - 90% Real time clock Ali mentatore 9 - 40 Vcc

Opz ioni

4.2 DIMENSIONI

In figura sono riportate le dimensioni della stampante da pannelloFT190SP. Con le viti montate a bordo della stampante, lo spessore massimo del pannello è di 5 mm; utilizzando le due viti aggiuntive in dotazione la stampante può essere montata su pannelli con spessore massimo di 15 mm. Per pannelli con spessore maggiore utilizzare viti M3 più lunghe.

(Fig.4.1) FT190SP

4- 2

5. SERIE DI CARATTERI

5.1 SET DI CARATTERI

La stampante FT190SP dispone di due set di 224 caratteri ciascuno (font 1 e font 2), richiamabili da programmazione (paragrafo 1.2) o tramite i caratteri di controllo (paragrafo 3.2).

(Fig.5.1)

(Fig.5.2)

5- 1

FT190SP

APPENDICE A - ACCESSORI E RICAMBI

A.1 ACCESSORI A.1.1 Alimentatore

La figura seguente mostra l’alimentatore di produzione Custom Engineering utilizzabile per il funzionamento della stampante FT190SP. L’alimentatore è disponibile in3 modelli: - PSM05 per la versione alimentata a 5V - PSM12 e PSM24 per la versione alimentata a 9 - 40 V (Fig.A.1)

GND chassis

LED on

(Tab.A.1)

0V 5V

N L

Specifiche di ingresso

Tensione di ingresso

100 Vac to 240 Vac

Frequenza di ingresso

50 Hz to 60 Hz

Specifiche di Uscita PSM05 Tensione di Uscita Corrente di Uscita

5V Minimum

0A

Maximum

3, 6 A

Peak

5 A(1)

Short Circuit

6 A(2)

A- 1

FT190SP


Specifiche di Uscita PSM12 (per opzione 9 - 40 Vcc) Tensione di Uscita Corrente di Uscita

12 V Minimum

0A

Maximum

4A

Peak

6A

Short Circuit

6A

Specifiche di Uscita PSM24 (per opzione 9 - 40 Vcc) Tensione di Uscita Corrente di Uscita

24 V Minimum

0A

Maximum

2A

Peak

3, 5 A

Short Circuit

6A

A.1.2 Avvolgicarta

(Fig.A.2)

Alla stampante modello AV03 FT190SP può essere collegato nel connettore J5 l’avvolgicarta

Tecnical specifications:

Range of application

Universal

Paper width (max)

60 mm

Roll diameter (max)

70 mm

Pow er supply

5 - 12Vdc ± 10%

Electrical input (max) FT190SP

450 mA A- 2

(Tab.A.2)


A.2 RICAMBI (Tab.A.3)

RCT 57X50

Rotolo carta Termica

Q uant ità consigliat e per n° apparecchi acquistati N° apparecchi

<10

<50

<100

>100

Quantit à consigliate

5

30

60

90 (Fig.A.3)

A- 3

FT190SP

Thermal panel printer FT190SP User’s manual

www.custom.it

FT190SP

Printer components

1-Print mechanism 2-Case 3-Paper outfeed 4-Paper loading label 5-Front panel 6-Paper roll compartment 7-Control panel 8-Feed connector 9-Paper winder connector 10-Interface connector 11-External “print” key connector

FT190SP

All rights reserved. The reproduction of this manual, either totally or partially, in any form whatsoever, whether it be on paper or through computer processes, is strictly prohibited. Custom Engineering s.r.l. and the resource teams employed in the making of this manual will not be held responsible for any problems arising as a result of improper use of this manual, as they guarantee that the information contained in it has been subjected to careful inspection. Any suggestions regarding errors in its contents or possible improvements will, nonetheless, be greatly appreciated. The products are continuously checked and improved. For this reason Custom Engineering s.r.l. reserves the right to modify the information contained in this manual without prior notice. COD.DOMEFT190SP Copyright

REV.1.20

1998 Custom Engineering s.r.l. – Italy

Custom Engineering Str. Berettine 2 - 43010 Fontevivo (PARMA) - Italy Tel. : +39 0521-680111 Fax : +39 0521-610701 http: www.custom.it Email : [email protected]

FT190SP

"CE" Declaration of Conformity In accordance with standards ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer's name:

Custom Engineering s.r.l.

Manufacturer's address:

Strada Berettine 2 Fontevivo (Parma) Italy

N°: DC0302698

Declares that the product: Product name:

Panel printer with thermal print mechanism

Type name:

FT190SP

Model:

FT190SP RS232 / CENTRONICS

is in conformity with the following directives: Electromagnetic compatibility directives EEC/89/336; EEC/92/31; EEC/93/68 In accordance with the following standards: E CN las5s50B22

L urre oifmriatsdia onddism tuertbhaondcse ocfhm areaacste ism ticesntof information technology equipment

1995

EN 50082-1

Electromagnetic compatibility General immunity standard. Part 2: Industrial environments.

1992

EN 61000-4-2

Electrostatic discharge requirements 4KV contact discharge, 8KV air discharge

1995

EN 61000-4-4

Fast electrical transient/burst requirements.

1995

ENV 50140

June 1998 FT190SP

DC mains 0.5KV Radiated radio-frequency 1993 electromagnetic fields. Immunity tests. 3V/m, 80MHz-1000MHz, 80% 1KHz AM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS OF THE MANUAL ...................................................................... 1 CONVENTIONS USED IN THE MANUAL ..................................................... 1 GENERAL INFORMATION REGARDING SAFETY ..................................... 1 UNPACKING THE PRINTER ......................................................................... 3 GENERAL FEATURES .................................................................................. 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINTER ............................................................... 4 1. INSTALLATION AND USE

1.1 CONNECTIONS ................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Power supply ................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 Paper winder .................................................................................. 1-2 1.1.3 External print key ............................................................................ 1-2 1.2 CONFIGURATION ..................... ...................... ....................... ............. 1-2 1.3 AUTOTEST .......................................................................................... 1-3 1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP ........................................................................ 1-3 1.5 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................... 1-4 1.5.1 Changing the paper roll .................................................................. 1-4 2. INTERFACES

2.1 RS232 SERIAL ..................................... ................... ................... ......... 2-1 2.2 CENTRONICS PARALLEL .............................. ............................... ..... 2-3 2.3 CALENDAR CLOCK (OPTIONAL) ................................... ................... 2-4 2.3.1 Adjusting the clock through the keypad ......................................... 2-4 3. PRINTER FUNCTIONS

3.1 PRINT DIRECTION ............................................................................. 3-1 3.2 CONTROL CHARACTERS ..................... ..................... ...................... . 3-2 4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 4-1 4.2 DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................... 4-2

i

FT190SP

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5. CHARACTER SETS

5.1 CHARACTER SETS ............................................................................ 5-1 APPENDIX A - ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS

A.1 ACCESSORIES ................................................................................... A-1 A.1.1 Power supply ................................................................................. A-1 A.1.2 Paper winder .................................................................................. A-2 A.2 SPARE PARTS .................................................................................... A-3

FT190SP

ii

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS OF THE MANUAL

In addition to the introduction which lists: the conventions used in the manual, general information relative to safety, unpacking of the printer and a brief description of the printer itself, highlighting its main features, the manual is split up into the following chapters: Chapter 1: Containing the information required for installing and using the printer correctly Chapter 2: Containing the specifications of the interfaces Chapter 3: Containing the description of the printer command set Chapter 4: Containing the technical specifications of the printer Chapter 5: Containing the character sets (fonts) used by the printer CONVENTIONS USED IN THE MANUAL N.B.

Gives important information or suggestions relative to the use of the printer WARNING

The information marked with this symbol must be carefully heeded to safeguard against damaging the printer DANGER

The information marked with this symbol must be carefully heeded to safeguard against injury to the operator GENERAL INFORMATION REGARDING SAFETY

• • • • • •

Read and keep the following instructions. Observe all warnings and follow all instructions attached to the printer. Before cleaning the printer, disconnect the feed cable. Clean the printer with a damp cloth. Do not use liquid or spray products. Do not operate the printer near to water. Do not place the printer on unsteady surfaces. It could fall and get seriously damaged. 1

FT190SP

INTRODUCTION

• • • • • • •

Use the type of electricity supply marked on the printer label. In the event of uncertainty, contact the seller. Position the printer in such a way as to ensure that the cables connected to it will not be damaged. Ensure that the maximum absorbed current of the printer does not exceed the maximum acceptable current for the type of feed cable used. Do not put objects of any kind inside the printer as they could cause a short circuit or damage parts which could affect its performance. Do not spill liquids on the printer. Do not carry out technical operations on the printer with the exception of the scheduled maintenance operations specifically indicated in the user’s manual. Disconnect the printer from the electricity supply and have it repaired by a specialized technician should any of the following conditionsoccur: A. The feed connector has been damaged. B. Liquid has penetrated to the inside of the printer; C. The printer has been exposed to rain or water; D. The printer is not operating normally despite the instructions in the user’s manual having been followed. E. The printer has been dropped and its case damaged. F. The performance of the printer is poor. G. The printer does not work.

FT190SP

2

INTRODUCTION

UNPACKING THE PRINTER

Remove the printer from the box, taking care not to damage the packing material, as it could be needed for future transportation of the machine. Ensure that all the components illustrated are in fact present and that they are in perfect condition. If this is not the case, contact the after-sales assistance department immediately. Printer Manual (or Cdrom) Paper roll (inside the printer) Long screws

(Fig.1)

N.B.

Before using the long screws, read the note to paragraph 4.2. GENERAL FEATURES

The FT190SP is a printer which, in addition to having an innovative design, guarantees high performance and is reliable and user-friendly. For these reasons, it is the ideal solution for applications which require the immediate printing of data on a ticket, whether they be of an industrial, professional or laboratory nature. Typical fields ofapplication are: weighing systems, receipts (not for tax purposes) as well as for security, controlling and diagnostics purposes. It has a 200 dpi thermal print mechanism and uses 57.5mm paper rolls. It can print 24 or 40 characters per line according to the selection made at the setup stage or through a software command . The FT190SP printer is so compact and lightweight that it can be installed extremely easily on any type of equipment. It is supplied with two interfaces: an RS232 serial and Centronics parallel interface. To select one or the other interface, some jumpers must be moved. The reception buffer is 1Kbytes. It can also be equipped with a Real Time Clock.

3

FT190SP

INTRODUCTION

DESCRIPTION OF THE PRINTER

The FT190SP printer has an ABS casing (1) with a front cover (2) which opens to allow access to the paper roll and print head. The control panel is located on the front (3) and has a PRINT key, a FEED key and two LEDs: Power and Status.

(Fig.2)

•

PRINT key. When pressed, in serial causes the “$0D” control character to be transmitted if enabled during printer setup. In parallel to the PRINT key is the J6 connector which can be used to connect to an external key (fig.1.1).

•

FEED key. When this is pressed, the paper feeds forward manually. If this key is pressed briefly, when the RTCK option is installed, the date and time of day is printed.

•

The POWER LED indicates that the printer is receiving a digital power supply.

•

The STATUS LED, when flashing, signals that the paper is finished. When lit steadily, it signals the presence of an error (head power supply too high or too low or head temperature too high). FT190SP

4

1. INSTALLATION AND USE

1.1 CONNECTIONS

(Fig.1.1)

1.1.1 Power supply

The FT190SP printer is equipped with a standard 4-pin male AMPMODU1-type connector (J4). The signals on the connector pins are as follows: WARNING

Respect the polarity of the power supply. 5V VERSION P IN

SIGN AL

N OTES

1

GND

2

GND

3

+VT: from 4.5 Volt to 7 Volt

(head power supply)

4

+VD C : 5 Vdc ± 7%

(logi c card power supply) (Tab.1.1)

1-1

FT190SP


VERSION 9 - 40V PIN

SIGNAL

NOT ES

1

GND

2

GND

3

from 9 Vdc to 40 Vdc

4

N.C. (Tab.1.2)

1.1.2 Paper winder

Connector J5 (fig.1.1) is used to feed the external paper winder. The position and function of the signals are given below in Table 1.3. Pin

Signal

1

MOTOR +

2

MOTOR (Tab.1.3)

1.1.3 External print key

An external print key may be connected to connector J6 (fig. 1.1). The polarity and function of the signals are given in Table 1.4. Pin

Signal

1

PRINT

2

GND

(Tab.1.4)

1.2 CONFIGURATION

The FT190SP enables the configuration of the printer default parameters.This procedure is enabled by holding down the PRINT and FEED keys while switching on, with the jumper JP2 (Fig. 2.1) present on the printer card open. FT190SP

1-2


After this, each time the PRINT key is pressed, the parameter is modified and its current value is printed. Once the required value has been obtained, press the FEED key to proceed to the next parameter, and so on. Once all the parameters have been run through, the printing of a message signals the end of the setting procedure. The parameters affected during configuration are: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Selection of the number of columns (24 or 40) Print direction (normal or reverse) Selection of the character dimensions (normal, double width, double height, expanded) Selection of the font (font 1 or font 2) Enabling or disabling of the CR command AUTOFEED enabling or disabling : if the function is enabled when the printer receives a characters number equal to the line buffer the next character will place on the left margin in a new line Selection of the print speed in function of the absorption Selection of the red intensity : using two-colour thermal paper is possible to set different red tonality Selection of the parameters for serial or parallel communication Enabling or disabling of the 1Kbyte buffer Enabling setting of the real time clock Enabling of seconds printing in the real time clock function

The settings made are saved on the EEPROM (non volatile memory). 1.3 AUTOTEST

To run the autotest, hold down the FEED key, while switching on the printer. The autotest causes the printing of the printer’s current setting data and the printing of the complete ASCII character set. 1.4 HEXADECIMAL DUMP

If the PRINT key is held down during switching on, the printer enters Hexadecimal Dump mode. This function is used for the diagnostics of characters received in serial or parallel. In fact, these are printed in hexademical code together with the corresponding ASCII code. 1-3

FT190SP


1.5 MAINTENANCE 1.5.1 Changing the paper roll

To change the paper roll, proceed as follows: 1) Open the printer cover and press down the swinging support of the print mechanism at the point marked PUSH; 2) Insert the end of the paper roll in the slit of the print mechanism and position the paper roll so that it rotates in the right direction, as shown in the figure; 3) The paper is automatically pulled by the roller for 3 or 4 centimetres; 4) Tear off the paper and re-close the cover.

(Fig.1.2)

WARNING

Make sure the paper edge is straight before inserting it in the machine.

FT190SP

1-4

2. INTERFACES

(Fig.2.1)

The selection of the RS232 or CENTRONICS interface is made through the 20contact strip: When the strip is placed in position 1-2 (fig.2.1) the standard CENTRONICS interface is selected; when placed in position 2-3 the RS232 interface is selected. 2.1 RS232 SERIAL

The printer has an RS232 serial interface and is connected using a 25-pin female connector. The communication signals used for serial protocol are TXD, RXD and RTS (if the RTS/CTS protocol was selected) or TXD and RXD if the XON/XOF protocol was selected. Given below are the signals present on the connector: PI N

S IG NAL

D I R EC TI O N

NC

-

2

TXD

Output

3

RXD

Input

4

RTS

Output

7

SG

-

1

2-1

DE SC RI PTI ON

Data transmission Datareception Same as DTR signal Groundsignal

FT190SP

2. INTERFACES

PIN

S I G N AL

D IR EC TIO N

DE SC RI PTI ON

When the DTR/DSR command is selected, this signal indicates when the printer is busy. SPACE indicates that the printer is ready to receive data and MARK that the printer is busy.

20

DTR

Output

23

GND

-

Ground

24

GND

-

Ground

25

GND

-

Ground

(Tab.2.1)

The diagrams below give sample connections between the printer and Personal Computer using a 25- and 9-pin female connector.

(Fig.2.2)

(Fig.2.3)

FT190SP

2-2

2. INTERFACES

2.2 CENTRONICS PARALLEL

The printer has a Centronics parallel interface and is connected using a 25-pin female connector. The following signals can be used for parallel communication: 1) 2) 3) 4)

7 or 8 bit data bus; STROBE signal that indicates data validity; BUSY signal that indicates if printer is available to receive data; ACK signal for data read confirmation.

Given below are the signals present on the connector:

PIN 1

SIG NA L

Strobe

D I R E C TI O N

Input

2

Databit0

Input

3

Databit1

Input

4

Databit2

Input

5

Databit3

Input

6

Databit4

Input

7

Databit5

Input

8

Databit6

Input

9

Databit7

Input

10

ACK

Output

11

BUSY

Output

12

PAPEREND

Output

13

HIGHT

Output

14

NC

-

15

FALT

Output

16

RESET

Input

GND

-

17-25

(Tab.2.2)

2-3

FT190SP

2. INTERFACES

2.3 CALENDAR CLOCK (optional)

The Real Time Clock is available as an option. Printing and adjustment of the clock are managed by a series of control characters, described as follows. N.B.

For the real time clock control characters, please refer to the description of the printer command sets in chapter 3 2.3.1 Adjusting the clock through the keypad

The time and date can be adjusted using the PRINT and FEED keys on the printer’s front panel. To set, proceed as follows: • • • •

While holding down the FEED key, press the PRINT key. The printer will print the time and date with an arrow indicating the digit to be modified; Each time the PRINT key is pressed, the digit marked by the arrow will increase and an updated version will be printed; To proceed to modify another digit, press the FEED key again. Each time the printerselected will printdigit; the updated time and date, highlighting with an arrow the currently To terminate the setting procedure, press PRINT and FEED at the same time.

FT190SP

2-4

3. PRINTER FUNCTIONS

3.1 PRINT DIRECTION

The FT190SP printer has two printing directions which can be selected by means of the control characters: normal and reverse.

P a p e r O u tf e e d D i re c t io n

SP

Panel printer

Normal mode

r et ni r pl ena P PS

Reverse mode (Fig.3.1)

3-1

FT190SP


3.2 CONTROL CHARACTERS

The command table lists all the commands for the management of the FT190SP printer functions. These commands can be transmitted to the printer with both the serial and parallel interfaces; if, however, the parallel interface is being used, the user will not be able to receive any kind of response, as this interface is mono-directional. The commands can be transmitted to the printer at any moment, but they will only be carried out when the characters previously transmitted have been printed or the commands previously transmitted have been carried out. There are no commands with priority status; all the commands arecarried out when the circular buffer is free to do so. COMMAND TABLE

(Tab.3.1)

AS C II C o m.

H E X C o m.

D e sc rip tio n

$ 00

P ri nts i n sma ll chara cte rs

$ 01

P ri nts i n d o uble wi dth

$ 02

P ri nts i n d o uble he i ght

$ 03

E xp and ed pri nti ng

$ 04

Restore s small chara cte r pri nti ng

$ 0A

F o rwa rd fee d s o ne li ne

(n) $ 0B

F o rwa rd fee d s (n) li ne

$ 0D

P ri nts li ne b uffe r

$ 0F

S ets C RLF mo de

$ 11

Gra p hi c mod e

$ 12

P ri nts ti me and d a te

$ 13

S ets ti me and da te

$ 14

Tra nsmi ts ti me a nd da te i n seri a l

$ 17 $ 18

P ri nts 1 st p rog ra mmab le cha racter P ri nts 2 nd p rog ra mmab le cha ra cte r

$ 19

P ri nts 3 rd p ro gra mma ble cha ra cte r

$ 1A

P ri nts 4 th p rog ra mmab le cha racter

$ 1C


$ 1D


FT190SP

3- 2


ASC II Com.

H EX C om.

Description

$1 E

Pri nts 7th programmable character

$1 F

Pri nts 8th programmable character

ESC A

$1 B $4 1

Executes [n] dots line feed

ESC R

$1 B $5 2

Sets reverse mode pri nting

ESC N

$1 B $4 E

Sets normal mode pri nti ng

ES C @

$1 B $4 0

Resets the printer

ES C D

$1 B $ 44

Enters date i n print buffer

E SC T

$ 1B $ 54

Enters time in pri nt buffer

E SC U

$ 1B $ 55

Enters date (mm:dd:yy) i n print buffer

ESC S

$ 1B $ 53

Enables printi ng of seconds

ESC X

$ 1B $ 58

Pri nts i n red

ESC x

$ 1B $ 78

Pri nts i n black

ESC B

$ 1B $ 42

Sets character font 1

ESC b

$ 1B $ 62

Sets character font 2

ESC I

$ 1B $ 49

Selects 24 columns

ESC i

$ 1B $ 69

Selects 40 columns

(aa) ESC r

Reads data at an address (aa)

(dd) ESC G

(aa) $1B $72 (aadd) $1B $ 77 (dd) $1B $47

(dd) ESC K

(dd) $1B $4B

Wri tes value (dd) i n option regi ster 1

(dd) ESC M

(dd) $1B $4D

Wri tes value (dd) i n print mode

ESC p

$ 1B $ 7 0

Transmi ts option register i n seri al

ESC k

$ 1B $ 6 B

Transmi ts option register 1 in serial

ESC m

$ 1B $ 6 D

Transmi ts print mode in seri al

ESC s

$1B $73

Transmi ts next character i n seri al

(dd) ESC a

$1B $61

Selects number of dot spaces

ESC J (n)

$1B $4A

Loads programmable character

ESC W

$1B $57

Prints graphic li ne of 200 dpi

ESC c

$1B $63

Management of bar code printi ng

ESC Q

$1B $51

Enables underli ning

ESC q

$1B $71

Di sables underli ni ng

(aadd) ESC w

3- 3

Wri tes data (dd) i n an address (aa) Wri tes value (dd) i n option regi ster

FT190SP


A more detailed description of the single commands can be found below. 00 H [ Name] [ Format ]

Small character printing

ASC I I Hex Decimal

[ Descript ion] [ Notes]

[ Def ault] [ Ref erence] [ Example] 01 H [ Name]

00 0

T ermparnindtss 0in0s •h Teheprcinotm Hm- a0ll9cHhadroacntoetrs ca(nncoerm l ta hle) print buf fer • The commands w hich modif y t he direct ion of t he charact ers ar e only act ive at t he beginning of t he line Sett ing in opt ion r egist er by means of f ront keys 01H, 02H, 03H, 04H

Double width printing

[ Format ]

[ Descript ion] [ Not es]

[ Def ault] [ Ref erence] [ Example] 02 H [ Name]

ASC I I Hex 01 Decimal 1 The print er print s in double w idt h f ormat • The commands 00H - 09H do not cancel t he print buf fer • The commands w hich modif y t he direct ion of t he charact ers ar e only act ive at t he beginning of t he line Sett ing in opt ion r egist er by means of f ront keys 00H, 02H, 03H, 04H

Double height printing

[ Format ]


ASC I I Hex 02 Decimal 2 The print er print s in double height f ormat • The commands 00H - 09H do not cancel t he print buf fer • The commands w hich modif y t he direct ion of t he charact ers ar e only act ive at t he beginning of t he line

FT190SP

3- 4


[D e fa ult] [Re fe re nce ] [E xa mp le ] 03H [Na me] [F orma t]

[D e scri p ti o n] [No te s]

[D e fa ult] [Re fe re nce ] [E xa mp le ] 04H [Na me]

[F o rma t] [D e scri p ti o n] [No te s]

[D e fa ult] [Re fe re nce ] [E xa mp le ]

S e tti ng i n o p ti o n re g i ste r b y me a ns o f fro nt ke ys 00 H , 0 1 H , 0 3 H , 0 4H

E x p a n d e d p rin tin g A S C II He x 03 D eci ma l 3 The p ri nte r pri nts i n e xp a nd e d c ha ra cter mo d e • c omma nd s 0 0 H-0 9 H d o no t ca nce l the pri nt b uffe r • the co mma nd s whi c h mo d i fy the d i me nsi ons of the cha ra cte rs a re o nly a cti ve a t the b e g i nni ng of the li ne S e tti ng i n the o pti on re gi ste r b y me a ns o f the fro nt ke ys 00 H , 0 1 H , 0 2 H , 0 4H

R es to re sma ll c h ara c te r p rin tin g

A S C II He x 04 D e ci ma l 4 The p ri nte r re sumes p ri nti ng wi th sma ll cha rac te rs • c omma nd s 0 0 H-0 9 H d o no t ca nce l the pri nt b uffe r • the co mma nd s whi c h mo d i fy the d i me nsi ons o f the cha ra c te rs a re o nly a cti ve a t the b e g i nni ng o f the li ne S e tti ng i n the o pti o n re gi ste r b y me a ns o f the fro nt ke ys 00 H , 0 1 H , 0 2 H , 0 3H

0 AH

[Na me] [F o rma t]

[D e scri p ti o n] [No te s]

F o rw a rd fe e d s o n e lin e A S C II He x 0A D e ci ma l 1 0 F o rward fe e ds o ne li ne e q ui va le nt to a li ne o f p ri nt • Thi s co mma nd b ri ngs a b o ut the p ri nti ng o f the co nte nts o f the li ne b uffe r 3- 5

FT190SP


[D e fa ult] [Refe re nc e] [E xa mp le ] (n ) 0 B H [Name ] [F o rmat]

[D e sc ri p ti on] [No te s]

[D e fa ult] [Re fe re nc e] [E xa mple ]

0D H [Name ] [F o rmat]

[D e scri p ti on] [Note s]

[D e fa ult] [Re fe re nc e] [E xa mple]

0F H [Name ] [F o rmat]

[D e sc ri p ti on]

0B H

F o rw ard fe e d s (n ) lin es A S C II He x 0B D e ci mal 11 C a rri e s o ut the numb e r o f li ne fe ed s s pe c i fi e d i n (n) • The numb e r mus t b e A S C II a nd be twe e n 0 and 9 (whe n n=0 the co mma nd i s i g no re d ) • Thi s co mma nd cle a rs the li ne b uffe r 0 AH To fo rwa rd fe e d fa st, 5 li ne s a t a ti me : $ 3 5 $ 0 B (o r 5 and the co mma nd $ 0 B )

P rin t th e lin e b u ffe r A S C II He x 0D D e ci mal 1 3 Thi s co mma nd p ri nts the li ne b uffe r • If the li ne b uffe r i s emp ty, the co mma nd i s i g nore d • If the C RL F o p ti o n i s se t, thi s co mmand i s i g no re d a nd pri nti ng ca n o nly b e o rd e re d thro ug h the co mmand $ 0 A 0FH

S et C R L F mo d e A S C II He x 0F D e ci mal 1 5 Inhi b i ts the c omma nd $ 0 D ma i nta i ni ng e na b le d o nly the co mmand $ 0 A fo r p ri nti ng

FT190SP

3- 6


[No te s]


• To d i sa b le thi s o p ti o n, re se t the p ri nte r • Thi s co mmand c le ars the li ne b uffe r • On swi tchi ng o n the d efa ult va lue i s i n the Op ti o n Re g i s te r S etti ng i n the o p ti o n re gi ste r b y mea ns o f the fro nt ke ys 0D H

11 H

[Na me ] [F o rma t]

[D e scri p ti o n]

[No te s]

Gra p h ic mo d e A S C II He x 11 D e c i ma l 1 7 E na bles g ra phi c mo d e : a li ne i n 2 4 co lumn mo d e co rre s p ond s to 1 44 ho ri zo nta l d o ts d i vi d e d i nto 2 4 b lo ck s o f 6 d o ts e a ch; a li ne i n 4 0 co lumn mo d e c orre sp o nd s to 2 4 0 ho ri zo nta l d o ts d i vi d e d i nto 40 b lo ck s o f 6 d o ts e a ch. To o b ta i n g ra p hi c p ri nti ng , e nte r the co mma nd $ 11 a t the b e g i nni ng o f e a ch li ne . The fo rma t o f the byte i n g ra p hi c c o nfi g ura ti o n i s: X R P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 where : X i s no t use d (0 i s rec o mme nde d ); R must b e fi xe d at le ve l 1 ; P 1 ,.P 6 a re the g ra p hi c d o t d a ta (1 p ri nts, 0 d o e s no t p ri nt). The P 6 b i t o f the stri ng o f d o ts tra nsmi tte d i s p ri nte d o n the le ft a nd the o the rs fo llo w fro m le ft to ri g ht (P 5 , P 4 , P 3 , P 2 , P 1 ) a s sho wn: 1 st b y te

2 n d b y te

è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1


è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

3 rd b y te

è

P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

To p ri nt a li ne o f d o ts, tra ns mi t: $ 11 , n x $ 7 F (whe re n i s the numb e r o f cha ra cte rs p e r li ne ), $0D . To p ri nt a n e mp ty li ne , tra nsmi t: $ 11 , $ 40 , $ 0 D .

3- 7

FT190SP


1 2H

[Name]

P rint time and date

[Format]

ASC II

-

Hex

12

[D escripti on]

Deci mal 18 Pri nts the ti me and date i n the followi ng format: hh : mm dd - mm -yy If seconds printi ng is enabled, the format will be:

[Notes]

hh : mm : ss • The command resets the li ne

dd - mm -yy

[Default] [Reference]

13H , 14H

[Example] 1 3H

[Name]

S et time and date

[Format]

ASC II

-

Hex

13

[D escripti on]

[Notes]

Deci mal 19 Thi s command sets the time and date i n two possible ways: the fi rst uses the 24-hour clock and the second the 12-hour am/pm clock. In the fi rst case, transmit the 10 ASC II characters representi ng the time and the date followed by $13 and i n the second case transmi t the 10 ASC II characters representing the ti me and the date preceded by "A " or "P " and followed by $13. • It is advisable to transmi t the command $0D fi rst, in order to empty the print buffer

[Default] [Reference]

12 H , 14 H

[Example]

To set the ti me 12:45 on 19-01-93, transmit: 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $ 13 $ 3 1 $ 3 2 $ 3 4 $3 5 $ 3 1 $ 3 9 $ 30 $ 3 1 $ 3 9 $3 3 $ 1 3 To set the ti me A12:45 on 19-01-93, transmi t: A 1 2 4 5 1 9 0 1 9 3 $ 13 $ 41 $ 3 1 $ 3 2 $ 3 4 $ 3 5 $ 3 1 $ 39 $ 3 0 $ 3 1 $3 9 $ 3 3 $ 13

FT190SP

3- 8


14H

[Name]

Transmit the time and date in serial

[Format]

ASC II

-

Hex

14

[Descri pti on]

Deci mal 20 Transmi t the ti me and date on the serial port i n 11 ASCII: character format: hours/mi nutes/day/month/year + (CR) $0D

[Notes] [Default] [Reference]

12H , 13H

[Example] 17H ,...1FH

[Name]

Print 1st (...8th) programmable character

[Format]

ASC II

-

Hex

17, ...1F

[Descri pti on]

Deci mal 23, ...31 Thi s command pri nts the correspondi ng programmable character.

[Note] [Default] [Reference]

BIT MAP contai ned i n flash 17H , 18H , 19H , 1AH , 1C H , 1D H , 1E H , 1FH

[Example] E SC A [nH ] [nL]

[Name]

E xecutes [n] dots line feed

[Format]

ASC II

E SC

A

nH

nL

Hex

1B

41

nH

nL

Deci mal

27

65

nH

nL

[Descri pti on]

Executes [n] dots li ne feed

E SC R [Name]

Set reverse mode printing

[Format]

ASC II

E SC

R

Hex

1B

52

[Descri pti on]

Deci mal 27 82 Selects pri nti ng i n reverse mode: the recei pt feeds out of hte pri nter wi th the pri nti ng i n normal mode runni ng from left to ri ght 3- 9

FT190SP


[Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [E xample]

S etting i n opti on regi ster by means of front keys E SC N

ESC N

[Name]

S et no rmal mod e printin g

[F ormat]

A S C II

[D escription]

ESC

N

Hex 1B 4E D eci mal 27 78 S elect normal mode pri nti ng:the receipt feeds out of the printer wi th the pri nti ng upsi de down running from ri ght to left

[Notes] [D efault]

S etting i n opti on regi ster by means of front keys

[Reference] [E xample]

E SC R

ESC @

[Name]

R esets th e p rin ter

[F ormat]

A S C II ESC @ Hex 1B 40 D eci mal 27 64 C ancels all the data i n the print buffer and resets the pri nter mode, restori ng the mode which was enabled at the moment of swi tching on • S ame as hardware reset • A fter the command has been transmi tted, 1.5 seconds elapse before the pri nter is enabled

[D escripti on]

[Notes]

[D efault] [Reference] [E xample]

ESC D [Name]

Thi s can be useful duri ng swi tching on i n order to avoid the sendi ng of false characters duri ng initiali zati on by the master devi ce

E nters th e d ate in the p rin t bu ffer

[F ormat]

[D escripti on]

A S C II ESC D Hex 1B 44 D eci mal 27 68 E nters in the buffer the date of the calender clock i nstalled inside the printer, i n the following format: dd - mm -yy.

FT190SP

3-10


[ Not es]

[ Def ault ] [ Ref erence] [ Example]

• The dat e is print ed in 8 characters: if t here is not enough space in t he buf f er, it w ill not be print ed • I t does not zer o-set t he line buf f er ESC T, ESC U If you w ish to w r it e:

t ransmit t o print just t he dat e ESC T [ Name]

[ Format]


DATE: 11-09-93 TEST O K DATE: $1b $44 TEST O K $0D $1B $44 $0D

Ent ers the time in the print buf fer

ASCII ESC T Hex 1B 54 Decimal 27 84 Ent ers in t he buf f er t he t ime on t he calendar clock inst alled inside t he print er, in t he f ollow ing f or mat : hh: mm • The t ime is print ed in 5 char act er s and, if t he seconds opt ion is enabled, in 8 charact ers: if there is not enough space in t he buf f er, it w ill not be pr int ed. • I t does not zero-set the line buf f er

[ Def ault] [ Ref erence]

ESC D, ESC U, ESC S

[ Example]

I f you w ish t o w rit e: tr ansmit to print just the date

HO UR: 16: 45 TEST O K HO UR $1b $54 TEST O K $0D $1B $54 $0D

ESC U

[ Name] [ Format ]


Ent er t he date (mm - dd - yy) in the print buffer

ASCII ESC U Hex 1B 55 Decimal 27 85 Ent er in t he buf f er t he dat e on t he calendar clock inst alled inside t he print er, American st yle: mm-dd-yy • The dat e is print ed in 8 charact ers: if t her e is not enough space in the buf f er, it w ill not be pr int ed • I t does not zero-set the line buf f er

[ Def ault] [ Ref erence] [ Example]

ESC D, ESC T I f you w ish t o w rit e:

tr ansmit to print just t he date 3-11

DATE: 09-11- 93 TEST O K DATE: $1b $55 TEST O K $0D $1B $55 $0D FT190SP


ESC S

[Name]

E nables printing of seconds

[Format]

A SC II

ESC

S

Hex

1B

53

[D escription [Notes] [D efault] [Reference]

D eci mal 27 83 Enables the pri nting of the seconds when the ti me of day i s requested through command ESC T Setting i n opti on regi ster by means of front keys E SC T

[E xample ESC X

[Name]

P rints in red

[Format]

ASC II

ESC

X

Hex

1B

58

[D escripti on]

Deci mal 27 78 After recei vi ng this command the pri nter prepares i tself to print i n red

[Notes] ESC x

[Name]

P rints in black

[Format]

ASC II

ESC

x

Hex

1B

78

[D escripti on]

Deci mal 27 1 20 After recei vi ng this command the pri nter prepares i tself to print i n black

[Note]

FT190SP

3-12


E SC B

[Name]

Sets font 1

[Format]

A SCII

ESC

B

Hex

1B

42

D eci mal

27

66

[D escription] [Notes]

[D efault] [Reference]

S elects the fi rst character font • The complete font i s pri nted during the autotest. Some codes are not standard: $60, $7B, $7C, $7D, $7E, $7F, $8D, $ED , $FA , $FF S etting i n the option regi ster by means of the front keys ES C b

[E xample] E SC b

[Name]

Sets font 2

[Format]

A SCII

ESC

b

Hex

1B

62

D eci mal

27

98

[D escription] [Note] [D efault] [Reference]

S elects the second character font •The complete font is pri nted during the autotest. The font contai ns cyri lli c characters S etting i n the option regi ster by means of the front keys ES C B

[Example] ESC l

[Name]

Select 24 columns

[Format]

ASCII

ESC

l

Hex

1B

49

[D escription]

Decimal 27 73 On receivi ng this command, the pri nter enters 24-column per line printing mode

[Notes] [D efault] [Reference]

ESC i

[Example] 3-13

FT190SP


ESC i

[Name] [Format]

S elect 40 columns

[D escription] [Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [Example]

ASC II ESC i Hex 1B 69 Decimal 27 1 05 On receiving this command, the printer enters 40-column per line printing mode

E SC l

(aa) ESC r

[Name] [Format]

R ead data at an address (aa)

[Description]

a R eaisd tahemm em aH osotrysilgonciafitcioannt(nEiE bbPleRO ofM)a aetxapdredsressesd in: ASC II aL is the least significant nibble of a expressed in ASC II • There are 256 legible locations (from $00 to $FF) The whole memory bank contains the value $20 by default

ASC II Hex Decimal

[Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [Example]

aH aH aH

aL aL aL

ESC 1B 27

E SC w

To read address $01, transmit in ASC II: $3 0 $ 3 1 $1 B $ 7 2 If address $01 contains $A5, we will receive: $ 41 $ 3 5

FT190SP

3-14

r 72 114


(aadd) E S C w

[Name]

Write data (dd) in address (aa)

[F ormat]

A S C II Hex

aH aH

aL aL

dH dH

dL dL

ESC 1B

w 77

D eci mal

aH

aL

dH

dL

27

119

[D escription] S ave data d i n address a in the memory (E E P ROM): aH i s the most si gni fi cant nibble of a expressed i n A S C II

[D efault]

aL i s the least signi ficant ni bble of a expressed i n A S C II dH i s the most si gni fi cant nibble of d expressed i n A S C II dL i s the least signi ficant ni bble of d expressed i n A S C II • There are 256 wri table locati ons (from $00 to $FF ). The data maxi mum is $F F (255) and both the addresses and the data must be expressed i n A S C II on two bytes The whole memory bank contai ns the value $20 by default

[Reference]

E SC r

[E xample]

To save the data $A 5 in the address $01, transmi t: $ 3 0 $ 31 $ 4 1 $ 3 5 $ 1B $ 7 7

[Notes]

(dd) E S C G

[Name] [F ormat]

Write the value (dd) in the option register A S C II dH dL ESC G

Hex

dH

dL

1B

47

D eci mal

dH

dL

27

71

[D escri ption] Modify the confi guration regi ster. (dd) are two asci i characters whi ch represent the hexadecimal code for the programmi ng of the register. (dd) bit=0 bit=1 bit0: setti ng of real time clock bit1: pri nt di recti on bit2: number bits in parallel reception bit3: pri nting of seconds bit4: C R ($0D ) bit5: reception parameter selection bit6: font selection bit7: reception buffer 3-15

di sabled

enabled

normal

reverse

8

7

di sabled enabled

enabled di sabled

hardware (dipswi tch) font 1 1K byte FT190SP

software font 2 N° columns


[Notes]

• The setti ng is memori zed i n the EEPROM and assumed as the default value the next ti me the pri nter is switched on

[Default] [Reference] [Example]

ES C K To send setting byte 00001001 ($09): $3 0 $39 $1B $47

(dd) ESC K [Name]

Write the value (dd) in the option register 1

[Format]

ASCII

dH

dL

E SC

K

Hex

dH

dL

1B

4B

[Descripti on]

Deci mal dH dL 27 75 Modi fies the confi gurati on regi ster. (dd) are two ASCII characters representing the hexadeci mal code for the programmi ng of the regi ster. (dd)

bit=0

bit=1

24 columns 40 columns bit0: number of columns • The setti ng i s memori zed i n the EEPROM and assumed as default value the next ti me the pri nter is switched on

[Notes] [Default] [Reference] [Example]

E SC G To send setti ng byte 00001001 ($09): $ 30 $39 $1B $47

(dd) ESC M [Name]

Writes the value (dd) in the print mode

[Format]

ASCII

[Descripti on]

dH

dL

E SC

Hex dH dL 1B Deci mal dH dL 27 Sets the print mode default parameters: $00 small character printing $01 double wi dth printi ng $02 double hei ght printi ng $03 expanded pri nti ng

FT190SP

3-16

M 4D 77


[Notes]

• The setti ng i s stored in the EE PROM

[D efault]

Setti ng by means of the front keys

[Reference]

ES C m For double hei ght pri nti ng, transmi t: $30 $3 2 $1B $ 4D

[Example]

ES C p

[Name] [Format]

[D escri pti on] [Notes]

Transmit the configuration register in serial AS C II E SC p

Hex

1B

70

D ecimal

27

112

Transmi t the option register byte on the seri al port • If the pri nter is using the parallel protocol, nothi ng wi th be transmi tted

[D efault] [Reference] [Example]

ES C G, ES C K , ESC k The response is on two bytes. E .g., i f you recei ve: $30 $39

i t means that the default confi gurati on i s 00001001 ES C k

[Name]

Transmits the second configuration register in serial

[Format]

AS C II

E SC

k

Hex

1B

6B

[D escri pti on]

[Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [Example]

D ecimal 27 107 Transmi ts i n seri al the value of the second confi gurati on register i n A SC II format on two characters whi ch represent the hexadeci mal value • If the pri nter is using the parallel protocol, nothi ng wi th be transmi tted ES C K The response i s on two bytes. E .g. i f you recei ve: $30 $39 i t means that the default regi ster i s 00001001

3-17

FT190SP


ESC m

[Name]

Transmits the print mode in serial

[Format]

ASC II

ESC

m

Hex

1B

6D

Deci mal

27

109

[D escripti on] [Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [E xample]

Transmi ts the pri nt mode confi gurati on on the seri al port • If the pri nter is using the parallel protocol, nothing wi th be transmitted Setting i n the opti on register by means of the front keys E SC B The response i s on two bytes. E.g. i f you recei ve: $30, $32 it means that pri nti ng i s i n double height mode

ESC s

[Name]

Transmits the next character in serial

[Format]

ASC II

ESC

s

Hex

1B

73

Deci mal

27

115

[D escripti on]

Transmi ts the next character i t receives on the serial port

[Notes] [D efault] [Reference] [E xample]

If you transmi t: E SC s A the last character, A, wi ll not be pri nted but immedi ately transmi tted on the seri al line

(dd) ESC a

[Name] S elects the number of dot spaces ASC II (dd) ESC a

[Format]

Hex [D escripti on]

(dd)

1B

61

Deci mal (dd) 27 97 (dd) are two AS CII characters whi ch i denti fy a hexadeci mal byte and correspond to the number of dot lines between one print li ne and another

FT190SP

3-18


[Notes] [Default]

=0

[Reference] [Example] ESC J (n) 10*(d)

[Name]

Load the programmable character

[Format]

ASCII Hex

[Description]

ESC 1B

J 4A

(n) (n)

Deci mal 27 74 (n) (n) corresponds to the character number,i.e. between 1and 8. The bit map that represents the character is contai ned in the next 10 bytes expressed i n bi nary code. The formatting of these bytes is as follows: bi t 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 d d d d d d

[Notes] [Default]

The 8 characters avai lable on swi tching on are loaded with a bi t map contai ned i n the pri nter's flash. To modify these bit maps, a firmware upgrade i s requi red.

[Reference] [Example]

If you wish the symbol of the code $1F to be #, transmi t ESC J 2 followed by the 10 bytes maki ng up the character: $1B $4A $32 $52 $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $7F $52 $52 $52

E SC W

[Name]

Print a graphic line at 200 dpi

[Format]

ASCII HEX

[Description]

ESC 1B

W 57

Deci mal 27 87 After recei vi ng thi s command, the pri nter waits for 48 bytes whi ch correspond to an entire graphi c li ne. In fact, 48 bytes of 8 bi ts each correspond to 384 dots per li ne.

[Notes] 3-19

FT190SP


[D efault] [Reference] [E xample] ESC c

[Name]

Management of bar code printing ESC c [code] [height] [posi ti on] [opti ons] ASC II [length] [data] Hex 1B 63

[Format]

[D escripti on]

Deci mal 27 [AS CII code] I C B e E

99 Type of bar code Interleved 2/5 C ode 39 C odaB ar EAN8 EAN13

[hei ght] Number of dot li nes in 1/8 mm. uni ts. [posi ti on] Left hand margi n, expressed in 1/8 mm. uni ts [options] bi t bi t 0 bi t 1 bi t0: check digi t i s not printed i s pri nted bi t3,2: HRI 0=no 1=above 2=below 3=above & below bi t5,4: size 0=normal 1=double 2=tri ple 3=quadruple [maxi mum length] Interleaved 2/5 = 12 characters C ode 39 = 10 characters C odaB ar = 10 characters EAN8 = 8 characters EAN13 = 13 characters [data] Expressed i n ASC II [Notes] FT190SP

3-20


[D efault] [Reference] [Example] E SC Q

[Name]

Enable underlined printing

[Format]

AS CII

ESC

Q

Hex

1B

51

[D escription]

D eci mal 27 81 After thi s command has been recei ved, the characters are pri nted underli ned

[Note] [D efault] [Reference]

ES C q

[Example] E SC q

[Name] [Format]

[D escription]

D isables underlined printing AS CII ESC q

Hex

1B

71

D eci mal

27

113

Annuls underlined pri nting

[Notes] [D efault] [Reference]

ESC Q

[Example]

3-21

FT190SP

4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

4.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The main technical features of the printer are listed in Table 4.1. Table 4.1

C olumns

24 2 4

40 4 0

Normal

2x3

1x3

Double hei ght

2x6

1x6

Double width

4x3

2x3

Expanded

4x6

2x6

0,125 x 0,125

0,125 x 0,125

14 4

240

Lines/sec

30

30

Characters/sec

220

320

Feed (li nes/sec) Line buffer

53 24 byte

53 40 byte

Print buffer

1Kbyte

C haracter (L x H mm)

Graphic dot C ustom emulation dots per line

Print speed (speed/current = normal)

Print method

Thermal dot matri x

C haracter matrix

16 x 24

8x24

Print direction

Normal or reverse

C haracter set

Normal and extended

Paper roll dimensions

58 +/- 1mm x Ø50 mm max

Standard interfaces

RS232 or C entroni cs

Pow er supply

Double or si ngle 5 Vdc. ± 10%

Absorption (w ith 5 Volt pow er supply)

Selecti on “Speed/current = LOW” Pri nting

3A

Stand by

100 mA

In feed

750 mA 4-1

FT190SP

4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Selecti on “Speed/current = NORMAL” Pri nti ng

4,5 A

Stand by

100 mA

In feed

750 mA

Selecti on “Speed/current = HIGH” Pri nti ng

6A

Stand by In feed

100 mA 750 mA

Environmentals conditions

Operati ng temperature

0°C - 50°C

Operati ng humidity

20% - 85% (no condensi ng)

Storage temperature / humidity

-25°C - +70°C / 10% - 90% Real time clock 9 - 40 Vcc Power supply

Options 4.2 DIMENSIONS

The dimensions of the FT190SP panel printer are shown in the figure below. With the screws fitted in the printer, the maximum thickness of the panel is 5 mm; using the two additional screws provided, the printer can be mounted on panels with a maximum thickness of 15 mm. For even thicker panels, use longer M3 screws.

(Fig.4.1) FT190SP

4-2

5. CHARACTER SETS

5.1 CHARACTER SETS

The FT190SP printer has two characters sets, each containing 224 characters (font 1 and font 2), which can be called up through the programming (paragraph 1.2) or through the control characters (paragraph 3.2).

(Fig.5.1)

(Fig.5.2)

5-1

FT190SP

APPENDIX A - ACCESSORI ES AND SPARE PARTS

A.1 ACCESSORIES A.1.1 Power supply

The drawing below shows the power supply manufactured byCustom Engineering to be used with the FT190SP printer. The power supply is available in 3 models: - PSM05 for the 5V version - PSM12 and PSM24 for the 9-40V version (Fig.A.1)

GND chassis

LED on

(Tab.A.1)

0V 5V

N L

Input specifications Input voltage

100 Vac to 240 Vac

Input frequency

50 Hz to 60 Hz

PSM05 O utput specifications O utput voltage

5V

O utput current

Minimum

0A

Maximum

3,6 A

Peak

5 A(1)

Short Circuit

6 A(2)

A-1

FT190SP

tt

APPENDIX A - ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS

PSM12 Output specifications (for 9-40VDC version)

Output voltage Outputcurrent

Minimum Maximum Peak ShortCircuit

12 V 0A A4 A 6 6A

PSM24 Output specifications (for 9-40VDC version)

Output voltage Outputcurrent

Minimum Maximum Peak ShortCircuit

24 V 0A A2 3,5 A 6A (Fig.A.2)

A.1.2 Paper winder

The AV03 model paper winder can be connected to the FT190SP at the J5 connector.

Technical specifications: Tecnical specifications:

Range of applicat ion

Universal

Paper w idt h (max)

60 mm

Roll diamet er (max)

70 mm

Pow er supply Electr ical input ( max) FT190SP

5 - 12Vdc ± 10% 450 mA A-2

(Tab.A.2)

APPENDIX A - ACCESSORI ES AND SPARE PARTS

A.2 SPARE PARTS (Tab.A.3)

R C T 57 X 5 0

Thermal paper roll

Quanti ty recommended per n° machi nes purchased N° machi nes

<10

<50

<100

>100

Quanti ti es recommended

5

30

60

90

A-3

(Fig.A.3)

FT190SP


COMPONENTE / COMPONENT Termostato Thermostat

CD220008

MODELLO / TYPE


55.32532.816

E.G.O. ITALIANA

S.p.A.


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6 . .9. . . . . . Temperatura C Temperatura min. bulbo . . . . . . . . -.-1. 0 C . .40 Temperatura max. bulbo . . . . . . . 3 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 . .0. V .. Alimentazione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 0 .A . ...... Corrente . .9 . .0 mm Lunghezza capillare . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ¯

_ _

¯

_ _

¯

_ _

¯ ¯ ¯


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 ...... . Temperature C .. Min bulb temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--10 C .. Max bulb temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 . . . . .V . Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 . . .A ... Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .890 ... Capillary lenght mm ¯

_

¯

_

¯

_

¯ ¯ ¯

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0157 ID no. 57667 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 2 -- Page 1/1 CODICE / CODE


CJ080026 CJ080035

Valvola di ritegno, silenziatore regolatore di portata Non--return valve, flow control silencer MODELLO / TYPE


Valvola di ritegno: EAK2000--F02 Non--return valve Silenziatore regolatore di portata: 0672

SMC LEGRIS

Flow control silencer CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE/ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

CODICE: CJ080026 Code

Valvola di ritegno: EAK2000--F02 Non--return valve

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G . . .1 . . /4 Attacco Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 bar Temperatura di lavoro . . . 5 ...60 C

Pipe G1/4 Max. pressure 10 bar Working temperature . . . .5...60 C

¯

¯

¯

_

¯

CODICE: CJ080035 Code Attacco ¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_

¯

Silenziatore regolatore di portata: 0672 Flow control silencer G1/4

Pipe ¯

......... ......... .......

Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 bar Temperatura di lavoro . . . --20 ...150 C

¯

_

¯

DIMENSIONI /

.

¯

DIMENSIONS

(mm)

CJ080035

CJ080026

¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

G1/4 .

.

.

Max. pressure Working temperature

¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

12 bar . . . .--20...150 C .

.

.

_


CODICE / CODE

Pressostato Pressure switch

CD240042

MODELLO / TYPE


PS1--A3A

ALCO CONTROLS


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--.0 . ..5 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--0.5 .... Range pressione ÷ 7 bar Pressure range ÷ 7 bar . ...5 . .. Differenziale regolabile . . . . . . . . . . . 0 ÷ 5 bar ÷ 5 bar Differential setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. /. 4 . .” .S . .R . .E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/4” . . . . SRE Attacchi Connection ......... .......2 . . 5. .b . ar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 . . . bar Pressione di prova Test pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. P . .4 . .4 . ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IP44 .. ..... Protezione Protection .. Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.-.5. .0 ...+70 C Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--50...+70 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .b . .r .o . .nzo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bronze ... Materiale diaframma Diaphragm material ¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯ ¯

¯

_

_

¯

¯

¯


86 44

70 32

64 25

1

4.5 30 75 35 24 25 M4 / UNC No. 8 -- 32 23



CJ070047

Valvola a sfera Ball valve MODELLO / TYPE


VSX--FF

FINECO S.p.A.


Attacchi ¯

1/4”

Connections ¯

......... ......... ......... ..

Materiali ¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1/4”

.

.

.

.

.

Material

Corpo, sfera e albero

DIMENSIONI /

.

.........

DIMENSIONS

AISI 316

(mm)

¯

Body, ball and shaft

AISI 316

......


COMPONENTE / COMPONENT Regolatore di portata Flow regulator

CB020137

MODELLO / TYPE


ASN2--01

SMC


.......... ......... 1 . . /. 8 . .” . Attacco Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5 bar Temperatura di lavoro . . . 5 ...60 C ¯ ¯

_

¯

DIMENSIONI /

DIMENSIONS

(mm)

Pipe 1/8” Max. pressure 1.5 bar Working temperature . . . .5...60 C ¯ ¯ ¯

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

_

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE STC0309 ID no. 80939 COMPONENT DATA SHEET Rev. 1 -- Page 1/1 CODICE / CODE

COMPONENTE / COMPONENT Pressostato

CD240057

Pressure switch

MODELLO / TYPE


XML--A010A2S11

TELEMECANIQUE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE

Attacchi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4” ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 . ./4 . .”. . . . . . . . . Connections Campodilavoro ÷12 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.6 .... ÷12 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 . ..6 ..... Operating range Pressione max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.5 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 2 . ...5 . .bar Max. pressure bar Protezione . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IP54 .. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. P . .5 . .4 . ...... Protection Temperatura di lavoro . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.-.2. .5 ...+70 C .. Working temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .--25...+70 C ¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯

¯ ¯


¯

_

¯

_

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE COMPONENT DATA SHEET

STC0362 ID no. 83925 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1


CODICE / CODE

Valvola di s icu rezza senza leva Safety relief valve without lever

CJ060365 CJ060366

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE /

SLKC10APBT

MANUFACTURER

NUOVA COI

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION •

• • •

• • •

•

Fluido di processo

vapore saturo aria compressa Diametro orif izio ............... 10 mm At tacco in entrata............. DN 10.2 At tacco in us ci ta ............... ½” G file ttato Femmina Coeffici ente d’e fflus so .. 0.937 Sovrapressione ................. 10% Massimo errore di taratura ammissibil e ....... - 0…+4% Omologazione .................... PED ...........

• • • •

• • •

• • •

•

Process fluid ..................... saturated steam compressed air Opening diameter .......... 10 mm Inlet connection .............. DN 10.2 Outlet connection............ ½” G threaded female Flow Coefficient............... 0.937 Overpressure ................... 10% Max allowable setting error....................... - 0…+4% Homologation................... PED

CODICE / CODE

Pressione di taratura Set pressure

Condizioni di processo Process condition

Portata di vapore Steam flow rate

Portata di aria Air flow rate

Temperatura max Max temperature

CJ060365

4.0 barg

-1…+4 barg

206 kg /h

278 kg/h

158°C

CJ060366

3.5 barg

-1…+3 barg

186 kg /h

250 kg/h

152°C

Materiali •

•

Tenuta .................................... Boccaglio ............................ Otturatore ............................. Corpo ..................................... Molla .......................................

Material PTFE (certifi cato FDA) AISI 316 L AISI 316 L Ottone AISI 316

• • • • •

Seal .................................... PTFE (FDA certified) Nozzle ................................ AISI 316 L Shutter ............................... AISI 316 L Body .................................... Brass Spring.................................. EPDM

STC0363

SCHEDA TECNICA COMPONENTE COMPONENT DATA SHEET COMPONENTE / COMPONENT

CODICE / CODE

Compressore Compressor MODELLO / TYPE

ID no. 84024 Rev. 1 - Page 1/3

CF040013 COSTRUTTORE /

607CD22LK

MANUFACTURER

ASF THOMAS - PUMPS & COMPRESSOR


• • • • • • •

Portata ........................................ Pressione max. ........................ Protezione .................................. Tensione ..................................... Frequenza .................................. Potenza ....................................... As so rb im ento n om in ale....

19,5 l/min 7 bar IP20 220 V 50 Hz 0,175 kW 1,3 A


• • • • • • •

Flow rate ......................................... 19,5 l/min Max pressure ................................. 7 bar Protection ........................................ IP20 Voltage ............................................. 220 V Frequency ....................................... 50Hz Power ................................................ 0,175 kW Nominal electrical absorption..... 1,3 A


STC0363 ID no. 84024 Rev. 1 - Page 2/3


STC0363 ID no. 84024 Rev. 1 - Page 3/3

STC0364


CODICE / CODE

Compressore Compressor MODELLO / TYPE

ID no. 84025 Rev. 1 - Page 1/4


807CGH60

MANUFACTURER

ASF THOMAS - PUMPS & COMPRESSOR


• • • • • • •

Portata ........................................ Pressione max. ........................ Protezione .................................. Tensione ..................................... Frequenza .................................. Potenza ....................................... As so rb im ento n om in ale....

77 l/min 7 bar IP20 220 V 50 Hz 0,58 kW 3A


• • • • • • •

Flow rate ......................................... 77 l/min Max pressure ................................. 7 bar Protection ........................................ IP20 Voltage ............................................. 220 V Frequency ....................................... 50 Hz Power ................................................ 0,58 kW Nominal electrical absorption..... 3 A


STC0364 ID no. 84025 Rev. 1 - Page 2/4


STC0364 ID no. 84025 Rev. 1 - Page 3/4


STC0364 ID no. 84025 Rev. 1 - Page 4/4


ID no. 84026 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Elettrov alvola 2/2 Solenoid valve 2/2 MODELLO / TYPE

STC0365

CJ000098 CJ000100 COSTRUTTORE /

150/R-5630SM5

MANUFACTURER

L.G.M. Engi neerin g S.r.l.

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION • • • • • • • • • • •

Fluido ....................................................... Tipo ........................................................... Azi onament o ........................................ At tacch i ................................................... Orifizio ...................................................... Pressione di esercizio ...................... Temperatura di esercizio ............... Al im entazione ....................................... Protezione ............................................... Bobina tipo ............................................. Bobina classe .......................................

vapore NC diretto ¼” gas 2,8 mm 0-6 barg 0…+180°C 24 Vdc IP65 SM5 H

• • • • • • • • • • •

Fluid .................................................. Type ................................................. Acting ............................................... Pipes ................................................ Orifice................................................ Operating pressure...................... Operating temperature............... Voltage ............................................. Insulation ......................................... Coil type ........................................... Wire class ........................................

steam NC direct ¼” gas 2,8 mm 0-6 barg 0…+180°C 24 Vdc IP65 SM5 H

Materiali / Materials Codice Code

Corpo Body

CJ000098

Ottone stampato Moulded brass

CJ000100

AISI 316 AISI 316

Canotto Plunger

Orifizio Orifice

Tenuta Seal

Ac ci aio in ox Stainless steel

Ac ci aio in ox Stainless steel

Viton Viton


ID no. 84027 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Elettrov alvola 2/2 Solenoid valve 2/2 MODELLO / TYPE

STC0366

CJ000099 COSTRUTTORE /

D106BE64/521

MANUFACTURER

L.G.M. Engi neerin g S.r.l.

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION • • • • • • • • • • •

Fluido ....................................................... Tipo ........................................................... Azi onament o ........................................ At tacch i ................................................... Orifizio ...................................................... Pressione di esercizio ...................... Temperatura di esercizio ............... Al im entazione ....................................... Protezione ............................................... Bobina tipo ............................................. Bobina classe .......................................

vapore NC diretto ¼” gas 6,4 mm 0-5 barg -10…+140°C 24 Vdc IP65 521 H

Materiali • • •

•

• • • • • • • • • •

Fluid .................................................. Type ................................................. Acting ............................................... Pipes ................................................ Orifice................................................ Operating pressure...................... Operating temperature............... Voltage ............................................. Insulation ......................................... Coil type ........................................... Wire class ........................................

steam NC direct ¼” gas 6,4 mm 0-5 barg -10..+140°C 24 Vdc IP65 521 H

Materials

Corpo .................................... ottone Canotto ................................ AISI 316 L Orifizio ................................... acciaio inox Tenuta

•

...................................

EPDM


• • •

•

Body ................................... brass Plunger .............................. stainless steel Orifice.................................. stainless steel Seal...................................... EPDM


ID no. 84028 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Cartucci a filtr i Filters cartridge MODELLO / TYPE

STC0367

CC120130 COSTRUTTORE /

MCY1110PFRPH4

MANUFACTURER

PALL Process Filtrati on Limi ted


• •

•

• • •

•

• •

Tipo ........................................ Junior Style Configurazione .................. innesto con 4 alette Temperatura operativa max .................... Materiale setto .................. Superficie fi ltrante ........... Materiale strati di supporto ............................... Materiale gabbia esterna ................................... Tipo o-ring ........................... Potere di ritenzione assoluto ................................

• •

•

90°C doppio strato PTFE 2 0.045 m

• • •

Polipropilene •

Polipropilene Silicone

• •

0.003 µm in gas

Type ................................... Junior Style Configuration ................... single open ended with 4 locking tabs Max operating temperature....................... 90°C Membrane ......................... double layer PTFE 2 Filtering area .................... 0.045 m Support and drainage layers ................................... Polypropylene Cage, end cap and core.............................. Polypropylene O-ring type ........................ Silicone Absolute removal rating .................................... 0.003 µm in gases


Massima Pressione Diff erenziale Maximum Differential Pressure Temperatura Flusso Temperature Forward

50°C

5.5 bar

90°C

3.5 bar

5

32


ID no. 84029 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Interruttore di l ivello a g alleggiante verticale Vertical level switch with float MODELLO / TYPE

STC0368

CD340115

COSTRUTTORE /

211-985

MANUFACTURER

RS Comp onent s Ltd .


•

• • • • •

Tempera ture di funzionamento ................. 0°C…75°C Tensione max. ................... 50 V Corrente max. .................... 0,5 A Potenza max. ...................... 10 W/VA 6 Durata elettrica .................. 5x10 operazioni Lung hezza cavo ................ 1,5 m

Materiali • • •

Flottante ................................ polipropilene As ta ........................................ PPS Corpo/prolunga ................. PVC classe 7


•

• • • • •

Temperature range ................................. 0°C…75°C Max voltage ...................... 50 V Max current....................... 0,5 A Max power......................... 10 W/VA 6 Electrical life ..................... 5x10 operations Cable length ..................... 1,5 m

Materials • • •

Float ................................... polypropylene Bar ...................................... PPS Body/pipe........................... PVC class 7


ID no. 84030 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Miniradia tore completo di ventilatore assiale compatto Air cooler condenser supplied with compact axial fan MODELLO / TYPE

STC0369

CJ090081

COSTRUTTORE /

STFT82110 (Miniradiatore / Air cooler condenser) A12A 23HTS (Ventilatore assiale/ Axial fun)

MANUFACTURER

LU-VE


• •

• •

3

Portata ................................... 115 m /h Al im entazione .................... 230 V AC (cod. 6125.0004) Frequenza ............................ 50/60 Hz Potenza assorbita ............ 16/14 W

Il ventilatore è adatto a lavorare in continuo 24h/24h


• •

• •

3

Flow rate ........................... 115 m /h Voltage ............................... 230 V AC (cod. 6125.0004) Frequency ......................... 50/60 Hz Power .................................. 16/14 W

The fan is able to work continuously 24h/24h


ID no. 84031 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Pompa a membrana Vertical centrifugal pump MODELLO / TYPE

STC0370

CF030191

MANUFACTURER

COSTRUTTORE /

H30P3P Elect ro AD

MARAZ

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION • • • • •

• •

Potenza ....................................... Al im entazione ......................... Frequenza .................................. As so rb im ento .......................... Temperatura flusso max. in condi zione di vapore saturo ........................................... Protezione .................................. Materiale membr ana ............. ........................................

50 W 230 V monofase 50/60 Hz 0.6 A

• • • • •

135°C in IP54 EPDM

• •

Power ................................. 50 W Voltage .............................. 230 V one-phase Frequency ......................... 50/60 Hz Electrical input ................. 0.6 A Max flow temperature for saturated steam ........ 135°C Protection .......................... IP54 Diaphragm material....... EPDM

DIMENSIONI / DIMENSIONS

Gruppo di connessione Connections

Membrana Diaphragm


STC0371 ID no. 84032 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1


CODICE / CODE

Interruttore di prossimità induttivo Inductive proximity sensor

CD200053

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE /

XS1-M08PB370

MANUFACTURER

TELEMECANIQUE


• • • • •

•

• • • •

Tipo ........................................ Tensione nominale ......... Limiti di t ensione ............ Corrente commutata ....... Campo di funzionamento ................... Tempera tura di funzionamento ................... Collegamento ..................... Sezione cavo ...................... Lung hezza cavo ................ Protezione ............................

3 fili PNP, NC 12…48 V 10…58 V 0…200 mA

• • • • •

0…1.2 mm •

-25…+80°C cavo 2 3x0.11 mm 2m IP67

• • • •

Type ........................................3 wires PNP, NC Nominal voltage ................... 12…48 V Voltage limits .........................10…58 V Load switching capacity .... 0…200 mA Operating zone ..........................................0…1.2 mm Operating temperature range.........................................-25…+80°C Connection.............................cable 2 Cable section ........................ 3x0.11 mm Cable length ..........................2 m Protection ...............................IP67


a = 50 b = 40 c=8


ID no. 84033 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Regolatore di fluss o Flow regulator MODELLO / TYPE

STC0372

CB100022 COSTRUTTORE /

MV120018

MANUFACTURER

C.MATIC


• • • • • •

At tac co .................................. 1/8” Tolleranza sui tubi ........... + 0,05 mm Temperatura di lavoro ... 0°C…70°C Pressione max ................... 10 bar Campi di applicaz ione ... circuiti pneumatici Materiale ............................... ottone nichelato

• • • • • •

Connection ....................... 1/8” Hose tolerance ............... +0,05 mm Working temperature ... 0°C…70°C Max pressure .................. 10 bar Application field .............. pneumatic circuits Material............................... nickel-plated brass


D1

L1

L 2max

S1

S2

1/8”

6

32

14

10


ID no. 84035 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Valvola di ritegno Check Valve MODELLO / TYPE

STC0373


S22

MANUFACTURER

ULKA


• •

At tac co .................................. 1/8” G Au to in nesco in co nt ropr ess io ne

Installazione sul l ato mandata della pompa a vibrazione prodotta da ULKA mod. EX5


• •

Connection ...................................... 1/8” G Self-priming in counter pressure conditions

Installation on delivery head of vibration pump manufactured by ULKA mod. EX5


00010000

ID no. 84036 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Rubinetto con galleggia nte Taps with float MODELLO / TYPE

STC0374

CB100021 COSTRUTTORE /

MANUFACTURER

M.T.M. HYDRO s.r .l.


• • • • •

At tac co .................................. Pressione max. .................. Tempera tura max. ............ Ingombro .............................. Materiale ...............................

3/4” M 10 bar (145psi) 60°C (140°F) 200 mm (78 inch) plastica

• • • • •

Connection ....................... 3/4” M Max pressure .................. 10 bar (145 psi) Max temperature............. 60°C (140°F) Overall size ....................... 200 mm (78 inch) Material............................... plastic


STC0375 ID no. 84038 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Scambiatore di calore Heat exchanger

GL400649

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE /

-----

MANUFACTURER

FEDEGARI

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION • • • •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Diametro ............................................... 88.9 mm Lunghezza ........................................... 258 mm Volume utile ....................................... 1.6 lt No. spire utili serpentina acqua di scarico ............................. 16 Superficie interna serpentina 2 acqua di scarico ............................. 56520 mm Volume interno serpentina acqua di scarico ............................. 0,085 lt No. spire utili serpentina aria compressa .................................. 16 Superficie interna serpentina 2 aria compressa .................................. 25120 mm Volume interno serpentina aria compressa .................................. 0,025 lt Tempera tura aria compressa in ingresso ................. 20°C Tempera tur a acqua in us cita al genera tore

Materiale

...................

.....................................................


90°C AISI 316L

• • • •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Diameter ...................................... Length ........................................... Operating volume...................... Number of coil active loop for water discharging ................ Coil internal area for water discharging ................ Coil internal volume for water discharging ................ Number of coil active loop for compressed air........... Coil internal area for compressed air..................... Coil internal volume for compressed air..................... Inlet compressed air temperature............................ Outlet water to steam

88.9 mm 258 mm 1.6 lt 16 2

56520 mm 0,085 lt 16

2

25120 mm 0,025 lt 20°C

generator temperature............. 90°C Material.................................................. AISI 316L


ID no. 84040 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Trasduttor e di pr essione Pressure transducer MODELLO / TYPE

STC0376

CD230037 COSTRUTTORE /

404366/024/998/405/502/020/061

MANUFACTURER

JUMO


• • • • • • •

• • • • • • •

Campo di mi sura .......................... Segnale uscita ............................... Tensione ........................................... Connettore ....................................... At tac co .............................................. Protezione ........................................ Protezione EMC ............................

0-5 bar abs 4-20 mA, 2 fil i 12-30 Vdc DIN 43650 ¼” gas maschio IP65 EN50081-1 EN50081-2 EN50082-2 Errore ................................................. < 0.5% FS Isteresi ............................................... < 0.1% FS Coefficiente T dello zero ........... < 0.1% FS/10K Coefficiente T dello span ......... < 0.1% FS/10K Temperatura di lavoro ............... - 20…+120°C Temperatura del fluido .............. - 20…+120°C Temperatura di calibrazione ... 25°C

• • • • • • •

• • •

•

• • •


Pressure range .......................... 0-5 bar abs Output ........................................... 4-20 mA, 2wire Voltage .......................................... 12-30 Vdc Connector..................................... DIN 43650 Connection................................... ¼” gas male Protection ..................................... IP65 EMC protection........................... EN50081-1 EN50081-2 EN50082-2 Error................................................ < 0.5% FS Hysteresis..................................... < 0.1% FS Ambient T error to zero ........... < 0.1% FS/10K Ambient T error to span .......... < 0.1% FS/10K Working temperature................ - 20…+120°C Fluid temperature...................... - 20…+120°C Calibration temperature........... 25°C


STC0378 ID no. 84043 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Sensore di livello magnetico Magnetic level sensor

CD050012

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE /

ILMU.5 (cod . 14512210)

MANUFACTURER

SAIET Elett ron ic a


• • • • •

• • • • •

•

•

Galleggiante ........................ pieno Diametro galleggiante .... 31 mm Peso ........................................ 25 gr Peso specific o 3 minimo del liquido ........... 0,7 kg/dm 2 Pressione max. .................. 2 kg/cm Fissaggio .............................. ¼” G Montaggio ............................ orizzontale Uscita ..................................... NA, NC Tempera tura di funzionamento ................... -20°C…+80°C Grado di protezione ........ IP67 Collegamento ..................... cavo Lung hezza cavo ................ 0,3 m Contatti .................................. 5 Tensione di commutazione max. ........ 240 V AC Corrente di commutazione max. Potenza di commutazione max.

........ 0,5

A

•

• • •

• • • • •

• • • • •

•

•

........ 50

VA

Materiali •

•

Contenitore ......................... plastica Cavo ...................................... PVC, AWG 22


Float ................................... full Float diameter .................. 31 mm Weight................................. 25 gr Min liquid 3 specific gravity ................. 0,7 kg/dm 2 Max pressure ................... 2 kg/cm Connection........................ ¼” G Mounting ............................ horizontal Output ................................. NA, NC Operating temperature....................... -20°C…+80°C Protection degree........... IP67 Output connection .......... cable Cable length ..................... 0,3 m Contacts ............................. 5 Max switching voltage................................. 240 V AC Max switching current ................................. 0,5 A Max switching power ................................... 50 VA

Materials • •

Case ................................... plastic Cable .................................. PVC, AWG 22


ID no. 84044 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Pompa Pump MODELLO / TYPE

STC0379


EX5

MANUFACTURER

ULKA


• • • • • •

Temperatura fluido ................... Al im entazione ............................. Frequenza ..................................... Potenza .......................................... Portata ............................................ Classe .............................................

25°C 220V 50 Hz 48 W 0,4 l/min F


• • • • • •

Fluid temperature .......... 25°C Voltage ............................... 220V Frequency ......................... 50 Hz Power .................................. 48 W Flow rate ............................ 0,4 l/min Class ................................... F


ID no. 84046 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Serbatoio Tank MODELLO / TYPE

STC0380

CK070015

MANUFACTURER

COSTRUTTORE /

PL 416

LAMA PLAST


• • • •

Capacità ................................ 15 litri Diametro ............................... 240 mm Al tezza ................................... 460 mm Diametro bocc a ................. 115 mm

• • • •

Capacity ............................ 15 litres Diameter ............................ 240 mm Height.................................. 460 mm Cap diameter.................... 115 mm

Materiali

Materials

Polietilene alta densità

Polyethylene high density


STC0381


ID no. 84053 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Resistenze elettriche Heating elements MODELLO / TYPE

GM550096 COSTRUTTORE /

Esecuzione second o dis egno FEDE GARI Execution according to FEDEGARI drawing

MANUFACTURER

IRCA


• • • •

Potenza ................................. Potenza specifica ............. Tensione ............................... Lung hezza cavi .................

7000 W 2 5.4 W/cm 230 V 2000 mm

Materiali • •

Resistenza elettrica ........ Incol oy 800 Flangia ................................... AISI 316 L


• • • •

Power ................................. Specific power ................. Voltage ............................... Cables lenght ...................

7000 W 2 5.4 W/cm 460 mm 2000 mm

Materials • •

Heating elements............ Incoloy 800 Flange ................................. AISI 316 L


ID no. 84502 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Valvola di ritegno Non-return valve MODELLO / TYPE

STC0394


MV 33 04 M5

MANUFACTURER

C.MATIC


• • •

Pressione di lavoro .............. 2 ÷ 10 bar Pressione di apertura ......... 0.2 bar Temperatura di lavoro ........ -10 ÷ 70 °C


• • •

Working pressure .......... 2 ÷ 10 bar Opening pressure .......... 0.2 bar Working temperature ... -10 ÷ 70 °C

STC0408


ID no. 86354 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Motore con motoriduttore Motor equipped with motor reducer MODELLO / TYPE

CF020026

COSTRUTTORE /

AMF1 25/2 R.1/4.8

MANUFACTURER

PIEMME s.r.l .

CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE / TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION • • • • • • • • • •

Tensione ............................... 230/400 V Frequenza ............................ 50 Hz Potenza ................................. 0.18 kW Numero pol i ........................ 4 Velocità ................................ 292 rpm Rapporto di r iduzione .... 1 / 4.8 Coppia resa ..................... 5.6 Nm Al bero in u sc it a ................. Ø 14 mm Protezione ............................ IP55 Classe di isolamento ...... F ........................................

• • • • • • • • • •

Voltage .............................. Frequency ......................... Power .................................. Poles ................................... Speed ................................ Reduction ratio ............... Torque ................................ Shaft ................................... Protection .......................... Isolating class ..................

230/400 V 50 Hz 0.18 kW 4 292 rpm 1 / 4.8 5.6 Nm Ø 14 mm IP55 F


d

L

T

F

G

R

S

U

cMF

14

25

55

105

70

85

7

3

116


STC0409 ID no. 86355 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Scambiatore di calore Heat exchanger

GL400658

MODELLO / TYPE

COSTRUTTORE /

-----

MANUFACTURER

FEDEGARI


•

•

•

•

•

•

•

Diametro ........................................... Lunghezza ....................................... Volume utile ................................... No. spire utili serpentina acqua di scarico ......................... Superficie interna serpentina acqua di scarico ......................... Volume interno serpentina acqua di scarico ......................... No. spire utili serpentina aria compressa .............................. Superficie interna serpentina aria compressa .............................. Volume interno serpentina aria compressa .............................. Tempera tur a aria compressa in ingresso ............. Tempera tur a acqua in us cita al genera tore

Materiale

...............

.................................................


88.9 mm 198 mm 1.3 lt

• • • •

11 •

33814 mm

2 •

0.051 lt •

11 •

16462 mm

2 •

0.016 lt •

20°C •

90°C AISI 316L

Diameter ...................................... 88.9 mm Length ........................................... 198 mm Operating volume...................... 1.3 lt Number of coil active loop for water discharging ................ 11 Coil internal area 2 for water discharging ................ 33814 mm Coil internal volume 2 for water discharging ................ 0.051 mm Number of coil active loop for compressed air........... 11 Coil internal area 2 for compressed air ..................... 16462 mm Coil internal volume for compressed air ..................... 0.016 lt Inlet compressed air temperature............................ 20°C Outlet water to steam generator temperature............. 90°C

Material.................................................. AISI 316L


ID no. 86618 Rev. 1 - Page 1/1

CODICE / CODE

Trasmettitore di livello con c ontrollo di capacità e conducibilità Level transmitter for checking of capacity and conductibility MODELLO / TYPE

STC0423

CD050024 CD050025

COSTRUTTORE /

ET-CL/SRC1/FDG

MANUFACTURER

EUROTEK s.r .l.


• •

Codice .................................... Segnale in uscit a .............. Al im entazione .................... Corrente massima di uscita ................................ Tensione ............................... Collegamento .....................

15218 ON/OFF 7.5 mA

•

• • •

18.5 mA 12.0 V cavo a tre condutto ri

• •

Code ................................... 15218 Output signal ................... ON/OFF Electric input .................... 7.5 mA Max output current ................................ 18.5 mA Voltage .............................. 12.0 V Connection ........................ cable with three wires

Trasmettitore di livello Level transmitter CD050024

Lungh ezza cavo Cable length 2,0 m

CD050025

5,0 m

Materiali •

•

Corpo sonda ....................... acciaio INOX Cavo ...................................... silicone


Materials • •

Probe body........................ INOX Cable .................................. silicon

Fedegari Autoclaaf Technical Manual

Recommend Documents